HP PhotoSmart 945 User Manual
HP Photosmart 945 Digital Camera with HP Instant Share user's manual User's Manual
T rad emark a nd Cop yr ight Information © 2003 Cop yr i gh t He wl e tt-P ac kar d Dev e lopme nt C ompan y , LP Reprodu c tion, a d aptat io n, or tran s la t ion wi th ou t prior w r it t en per missi on is pr oh ib ited , e x cept as allo wed under the cop y ri ght la w s . T he inf or mat ion c ont ained in this doc umen t is sub j ect t o change w ith ou t noti ce . Hew let t-P ac k ar d shall not be li a bl e f or e r r ors cont aine d her e in or f or con seq ue nti al dam ages in conn ecti o n w ith t he f urni shin g , perf or mance , or u s e o f this m ate r ial . Mi cr os oft® and W indo ws® ar e U .S . r egiste r e d tr ade mar ks of Microsoft Co rporatio n. Appl e®, Mac int o sh®, and M ac® ar e r egis ter ed tr ad emar ks o f App le Comp u ter , In c. Mult i Med i aC ar d TM is a tr ade mar k o f Inf in eon T ec hnologi e s A G . SD logo is a tr ade mar k .
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting St ar ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cam er a Pa rt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Attac hing th e Le ns C ap Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Attac hing th e Ne ck S trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 In stallin g the Ba tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 In stallin g the M emor y Ca rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Tu rnin g on Powe r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 Unde rs tand ing the Sta tus Sc reen . . . . . . . . 18 Ch oosin g t he La ngu age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Sett ing th e Date an d T ime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Adju sting th e Dio pte r Co nt rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 In stallin g the So ftwa re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 Chapt er 2: T aking Pictures and Recording V ideo Clip s . . . 23 Using th e Displ ays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 Using th e Fo cus Br acke ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Fo cu s Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6 Tak ing S til l Pic tu res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Rec ord ing Aud io w ith St ill P ict ures . . . . . . . . . . 28 Rec ord ing Vid eo Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9 Using Z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0 Op tical Zo om . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Digi tal Z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Using th e P op- up Fl ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using S elf-Time r Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using B urst Mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 Using the Fo cus Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Focu s Sear ch P rior ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Hi nts o n U sing Manu al Foc us . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Sett ing the Expo sur e M ode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 2-se con d r elease p rior ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Noise Re duct ion for Lon g E xposu res . . . . . . . . .39 Using th e Cap tur e Men u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Help f or the Me nu Op tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 EV Co mpen satio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 White Bal anc e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Man ual Wh ite B alan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 AE Meter in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 IS O Sp eed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Digi tal Fl ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Reso lu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Com pres sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Satu ratio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Sh arpne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Con trast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Chapt er 3: Review ing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Using P layb ack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Tot al Ima ge s Summ ar y S cre en . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 9 Orien ta tion Se nsor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Sel ectin g Im ag es for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Using th e P layba ck M enu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Pl ay/R eco rd Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Pl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rec ord Au dio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Magn ify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Ima ge Inf o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Chapt er 4: Using HP Ins t ant S hare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Sett ing Up the S har e Me nu o n th e Ca me ra . . . . . . . . 70 Using th e Sha re Men u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3 Sele cting I mages f or HP Ins tant S hare Des tina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 How HP Insta nt S hare E-m ails I mage s . . . . . . . . 75 Chapt er 5: Unloading, Printing, and Display ing Image s . . 7 7 Unlo ad ing I mage s to a Co mp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Prin ting Ima ges Dir e ctly fr om the C am era . . . . . . . . . 79 Displa yin g I ma ges o n a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1 Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3 Cam er a So und s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Eye S tart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Focu s Assis t Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 LCD B righ tne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 In stant Revi ew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6 Auto Po wer O ff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Date & T im e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 USB Con figu rat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 TV C o nfigur ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 Rem em bere d Sett ing s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 Rese t Settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Rese tting th e Ca me ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Prob le ms and Solu tio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Err or M essa ge s o n the Ca me ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Err or M essa ge s on the Co mpute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cam era Self -diag nostic T ests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Gettin g Ass istan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14
HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l HP Acce ssib ility Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 HP Photo sm art We bsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Su ppor t P roce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Pho ne S uppo rt in the U nited Stat es . . . . . . . . . .1 16 Pho ne Su pport in Euro pe, the Middl e Ea st, and Afr ica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Oth er P hone Supp or t Wor ldw ide . . . . . . . . . . .119 Appendix A: Batter ies and Camera A cces sori es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Man aging Batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21 Ba ttery Ga uge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Ex tendin g B attery L ife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Rec har geabl e Batter ie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24 Sle ep Time-o ut for Po wer Co n serv ation . . . . . .125 Pu rcha sing Cam era Acce sso rie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 26 Appendix B: Camera D ock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 9 Getting S tarted with th e Do ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29 Dock Ligh ts an d Button s . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Unlo ad ing I mage s to a Co mp uter Usin g th e D ock . .132 Prin ting I mage s Usin g th e Doc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 33 Displa ying I mages o n a TV U sing the Do ck . . . . . . . 134 Appendix C: S peci fications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 5 Mem ory Ca rd Capa ci ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 41
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 9 C hapte r 1 : Get ti ng St arted Co n gr a tula ti on s o n y o ur p ur cha s e o f this di gita l ca mer a! T his camera has many f eatur es t o enhance y our p ictur e-taki ng e x per ience , includ ing HP I nst an t S har e TM , di r ect pr in ti ng capabi lit y , manua l and automatic controls, on-c a mer a Hel p , and an opt ional cam era dock. Wi t h HP Inst an t S har e , y ou can e a sil y s e lec t ima ges in y our cam er a to b e auto mat ica lly se nt to y our favor ite dest i nat ion s (such as e - mai l a ddr esses and onlin e album s ) t he ne xt ti me y ou connect t he camer a t o y our co mput e r . Y our fr ie nds an d f a mil y ca n ea si l y r ece i v e and v i e w y ou r p i c tur es in e-m ail w ith o ut bein g bur den ed b y large f ile at ta chment s. And with the di r ect pr inting capa b ility , y ou can e asil y sel ect im age s in y o ur cam e r a to be auto mat ica lly pr i nte d the next ti m e y ou c on ne ct the camera to y our computer or dir ectly to an y HP P hotosmart pr inter or other se lect HP pr inter s without ev er co nnect ing to y our computer . T o f urther enhance yo ur e xper i ence , y ou ma y pu r c ha se an HP Photosmart 8881 camer a d ock . The ca mer a dock a l lo w s y ou t o ea s il y do wnl oa d im ag es t o a co m pu t er , se nd im age s t o a p r int er or t el e v i si o n , an d r echar ge th e came r a ba tte r i e s . It also pr o v ides a co n venient home fo r your ca mer a . NO TE A do c k inse rt is inc lu ded in y our came r a bo x . P leas e d o no t disc ar d it , bec ause it en ables your cam er a to us e the optional HP 8881 camer a dock. Se e pa ge 129 f or in struct ions on h o w t o u s e the ca me r a doc k .
10 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Camer a P arts NO TE Ref er to the pag e s in p ar enth eses af ter the pa r t n am es f or mo r e in f o r m ati o n abou t tho se par ts . # Name Des c r ipti on 1 Fl a s h bu tton (p ag e 3 2) Allows y ou t o sel ect the di ffer en t flash settings ( this bu tton only wo r k s when th e f lash a ssembl y is up) . 2 Tim e r / B urs t button (pages 34, 3 5) Allo ws you to select between NOR MA L , SELF - TI MER , SELF - T IMER - 2 SHO T S , and BU RS T mode . 3 Fo c u s button (p ag e 36) Allo ws you to select between NOR MA L , MA CRO , INFINI TY , and MANU AL fo cu s settings . MF 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 1 13 12 14 15 16 17 MF
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 11 4 Z oom le v e r wi t h Zo om O u t and Zo o m I n (pag e 30) Z ooms out the lens to the w ide angle position , and in to t he tel ephot o positio n. 5P o w e r / M e m o r y li ght ( page 17) z Sol id green â camer a is on. z Soli d amber âcamer a is wr itin g to t he memo ry car d. z Blin k in g g r een âcamer a is o ff and is c har ging th e batter i es . z Blin k in g r ed âbatter i e s d eple t ed an d camer a is s hutting d o wn . z Off âcamer a is o ff . 6M e m o r y c a r d door (page 17) Allo ws y ou access to insert or r emov e the memory ca r d. 7 Contr oller w ith and buttons Allo ws you to mo v e thr ough menus and images on the I mage Displa y . 8 OK bu t ton (pag es 40, 61) Allo ws you to displa y the Capture and Pl a yb a c k menu s and to select m enu opti ons on the Image Displa y . 9 ON/OFF s w it c h ( page 17) T ur ns th e camera pow e r on and off . 10 HP Inst ant Shar e button (p ag e 6 9) Tu r n s t h e Shar e menu on a nd off on the Image Displa y . 11 Pr in t bu tton (p ag e 60) Allo ws you to select images f or pr in ting . 12 Playb a ck button (page 5 7) Tu r n s Pla y back on an d off on th e Ima g e Displa y . # Name Des c r ipti on
12 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l 13 Liv e V i e w button (page 2 3 ) Tu r n s Live View on a n d of f on th e Im a g e Displa y . 14 Image Displa y (p ag e 2 3) Allo ws y ou to f r ame pictur es and vi deo clips u sing Live View and r e v ie w t he m afterwar d in P lay back , and to vie w a l l th e m e nus. 15 Ey e Sta rt s en so r (pag es 2 3, 84) T ur ns on t he mic r odisplay in the vi e wfinder when it detects t hat y ou ar e lookin g into the vi e w f inder . 16 View fin d e r wi th mic r odisplay (p ag e 2 3) A ll o ws y ou t o f r a me t he s u b j ect of y o ur pi ctur e or vi deo clip . 17 Di opt er contr ol (pag e 19) A dj u s t s th e f oc u s in th e mi c r o di s pl ay . (I t does NO T a ff ect the foc u s of the image or v i deo c lip that y ou ca ptur e). # Name Des c r ipti on
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 13 # Name Desc r ip tio n 1 Shu tt e r button (pages 2 7, 2 8 , 29) T ake s a pictur e and r e cor ds audio , or starts and stop s r ecor ding a v ideo clip 2 Mode selecto r (p ages 29, 38) Allows y ou to sele c t b et we en vi de o m od e and a number of diff er ent e x posur e modes f or still p i c tur es 3 N e ck str ap mount (page 1 6) Allo ws y ou to attach a neck s tr ap ( a mount is on each side of t he camer a) 4 S peaker P la y s camer a sounds and audio clips 5 Po p - u p f l a s h re l e as e (page 3 2) P o p s u p t h e fl as h as s e m b ly . T he fl as h wi l l be set to FL AS H O FF until yo u pop up the flash 6 P op-up fl ash assembly (page 3 2) Pr ov ides additi onal ligh t to im pr o ve pict u re -t a k i n g OFF Av Tv AUTO 4 5 3 6 1 2
14 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l # Na me Desc r ipti on 1M i c r o p h o n e (p ag e 28) R ecor ds a udi o clips 2 Self-Timer/ F oc u s Assist ligh t (p ag es 34, 85) z Blin k in g r ed â Se lf- T im er is ac tivate d z Sol id red â on f or shor t per i ods in lo w light co nd it io ns to i mp r o ve au to fo cus 3 USB connec to r (p ages 77, 7 9) Allo ws y ou to connec t a USB ca ble f r om the cam er a to a USB-enabled computer or pr inte r 4 T V connecto r (pag e 81) Allo ws y ou t o conne ct an opti onal Audi o/ V i deo cable f r om th e camera to a t ele vision 5P o w e r a d a p t e r connector (p ag e 126) Al lo w s y ou t o conne ct an opti onal HP A C po w er adapter t o the cam er a to e ither op e rate th e ca m e ra wi th o ut b a t teries, or r ec ha r ge th e batte r ies in th e cam er a 6 T r ipod mount Allo ws you t o mount the ca mer a to a tripod 6 7 8 1 4 5 2 3
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 15 Setu p At ta c hin g t he Lens C a p T et h er 1 W ith the f r on t o f t he cam er a f ac ing y ou , inser t the sm al l lo op of the len s cap te the r thr ou gh the neck str ap mo un t o n t he r igh t si d e of t he camer a. 2 Ins ert the long lo op of th e tether t hr oug h th e sma ll loo p an d p ull t o tig hte n th e kn o t . 3 Ins ert the long lo op of th e tether through th e len s c ap te ther mou nt . 4 P u ll the lon g lo op o v er the sides of the lens c ap and then un der the len s cap , as s hown . P ul l to tig hten the knot . 7 Cam er a dock connector (p ag e 126) All ows yo u to c o n n e ct th e c a mera to t h e op ti onal HP 8 881 camer a dock 8 B atte r y door (pag e 16) Allo ws ac cess to insert and r emo ve th e b a t te ries # Na me Desc r i pti on
16 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l At ta c hin g t h e Nec k Strap In se rt on e en d of t h e n ec k s t r ap t hr o ugh a neck strap mount . T hen th r ead the neck st ra p th r ough th e plastic tab to se c ur e it . Repeat to at tach the oth er end of the ne ck s tra p to the o t her n e ck st r ap mount . Insta llin g t he B a t teries 1 W ith the f r on t o f t he cam er a f ac ing y ou , op en the batt ery door on the bot to m of the ca me r a b y s lid i ng th e latch to th e â u nl ockâ ( ) pos i tion an d pull ing th e do o r to wa r d y ou . 2 Inse r t the batte ri es a s indi cated ins ide the door . 3 Close the bat ter y door by pu shi ng the do o r t o w ar d th e bac k o f th e camer a an d s lid ing th e la tch t o th e â lo ckâ ( ) posi tion . NO TE Digi tal cam era s use bat ter ies at a m u c h f a s t e r r ate t han f ilm cam er as . Bat ter y life in digi ta l ca mer as ca n be measu red in m i nutes a nd hours of use r a t he r than the y e ar s m or e t y p i cal o f f il m camer a s . Battery life may v a r y dramatically fr om one user t o another , de pend ing o n w ha t mo de s t he cam er a is be ing u se d in mo st f r equ en tl y . Ba tte ry lif e w ill al s o v ar y dr amat i cal l y de pen din g up on the t yp e of ba tte r ie s inst alle d in the camera . F or hints on optim i z in g bat ter y perf ormance , see Managi ng Batte r ies on p age 121.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 17 NO TE If y ou hav e r echargeabl e bat ter ies, y ou ca n use the optional HP Photosmart 8881 cam er a dock or the optional HP A C po wer adapter to r ech arge the bat ter ies w hile th e y ar e in th e camer a . F or mor e inf or m ati on a bou t these opt ional acce ssor ies, see P u r c hasing Ca mer a Ac ce s s ori e s on p age 12 6. Insta llin g t he Memor y C ard 1 W ith the camer a tur ned of f and the ba ck o f th e c am er a facing you, open the memor y car d door by s lid i ng the do or to th e right . 2 Insert t he memor y ca r d , maki ng sur e tha t it c li c ks int o p lace . 3 Close the memor y c ar d door . T o r emo v e the memor y c ard , turn the cam er a off and open the m emory car d do or , th en pu sh the m em ory car d in an d it w ill s p r in g out war d fr om th e s lot . Tu r n i n g o n Po w e r T urn the camer a on b y sli ding the ON/OFF sw itch to th e right a nd th en r eleas ing it . T h e l e ns e xt e nds , th e Im a g e Disp la y tur n s on , an d t h e P o w e r /Me mo ry li gh t tu r ns o n so li d gr een . NO TE If the P ow er/M emor y l ight i s bli nki ng r ed , the b at teries ar e v ery l o w , and th e c ame r a w ill sh ut do w n s o o n . Replace or r echarge the bat ter ies, or use the optional HP A C ad apter to p o wer the c am era .
18 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Understanding th e S tatus Sc reen When y ou turn on the camera , the HP log o scr een and then the status screen appe a r brie fly on the Image Di s play . T h e main part o f the st at u s sc r een show s the numb er of pictur es r emainin g , batte ry le v el , an d th e cu rren t s e t t i n g s fo r Fl a s h , Re s o l ut i o n , and Co mp r essi on . A n y non-d ef a ult Captur e m enu set t in gs ar e sh ow n as ico ns acr oss the to p of th e sta t us scr een (default set ti ngs for Capture menu items do not hav e ico ns ) . The stat us screen al so appe a rs f or a fe w se c onds a ny time you pr ess the Fl as h button , Ti me r / Burst butto n , Foc us b u tto n , o r open /close the p op-up flash asse mbly . Choo s ing the La ngu age T h e f irs t time y ou tur n t he came r a on , the f ollo wing s c r een appea rs and pr ompts y ou to choose a la nguage. 1 Scr ol l to th e la ng u ag e th at y ou wan t by us in g th e bu t to n s on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr ess the OK bu tton to s ele ct the high lighted l ang uage. NO TE If y ou nee d to go ba ck and chan ge th e la ng ua ge la te r , you ca n do th is i n the Setup menu . See Chap te r 6 : Usi n g th e Se tup M e nu on page 83.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 19 Set tin g t he D a te and Time The ca mera has a clock th at recor ds th e date an d t i me at which y o u tak e eac h pi ctur e . T his info r mati on do es not a ppear in the ima ge itse lf , bu t is r ecor d ed in th e ima ge p r oper ties , w h i c h y o u can see when v ie wing the i mage i n the Im a ge I nf o scr een (pa ge 6 7) , in the Pl ay b a ck me nu scr een (p age 61) , or on your com pu te r . T he f ir s t time y ou tur n t h e cam er a on , th e f ol lo wing scr een appears af ter y ou choose th e la ngua ge . 1 Adjust th e val ue of th e h ighl ig hte d se lec ti on u sing the bu tto ns . 2 Pr e s s th e bu tto ns t o mo v e to the other selections. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 unt il the corr ect dat e , ti m e , and date/t i m e f o r mat ar e se t . NO TE mm =mont h , dd =day , a nd yy yy =y ea r 4 Pr e s s th e OK butto n when the p rope r valu es ar e enter e d . Th e Ima ge Di spl a y then turns off . NO TE If y ou need to go back and c hang e this setting late r , y o u can do this in t he Se t u p men u . See Chapter 6 : Usi ng the Set up M e nu on page 83. Adjus tin g th e Diopter Co ntrol Th e rubber e y e piece on the v ie w f inder is a diopter c ontr ol that al low s you to a djust the focus i n the microd ispl ay . Pu t your e ye u p to the v i e wf inder , and the n tur n the di opt e r con tr o l until the inf or mation o ver l ay s (such a s the number of p ic tur es r e maining , Com p r essio n s e tting , an d Res o l ut io n setting) ar e in foc u s on the micr od isplay . The diopter c ontr ol has N O ef fe ct on t he ac t ua l p ic tur e y ou t ak e o r v i d eo c lip y o u r eco r d .
20 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Insta llin g t he Sof t w are NO TE A copy of this Userâs M anual (in sever al dif fer en t languag es) is located on the HP Photo & Imagi ng s o ftw ar e CD . L oo k in t he \docs\Readme f ile on t he CD t o see wher e the manual is lo c ated. T h e ca mer a s o f t w ar e allo w s y ou t o unl oad im age s f r om th e ca mer a , vi e w th em , pr int th em , and e- m ail th em . It also all o ws y ou to con f igur e the Sha r e m e nu on t he cam e r a. Win dow s NO TE Fo r t h e HP I n stant Sha r e component of the HP Photo & Imagin g soft war e to f unction pr op er l y on yo ur Windo ws com pu ter , yo u m u s t ha v e instal le d at le a st In te r net Explo r e r 5 . 01 on W indow s 2000 or X P , or I nter net Ex plor er 5. 01 Ser vice P ack 2 on Wi ndo ws 98 , 98 S E , or M e . 1 Cl o se all p r ogr am s and tem po r ar ily dis a ble an y v iru s pr ot ection soft war e r unni ng on y our c ompute r . 2 In se rt t he HP Pho t o & Ima ging so f t w ar e CD i nt o th e CD dr i v e of y o ur co mp ut e r . T h e ins t all ati o n w ind o w sho uld automatic al ly appea r . NO TE If the in stal l ati on win do w doe s no t app ear , cli c k St ar t , cl ick Ru n , t ype X: \Setup . e x e , wher e X is the le tter o f y our CD dri v e , then c lick OK . 3 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e . Y our W indo w s CD ma y also include b onu s soft war e f r om other manufacturer s. T o instal l an y bonus soft w ar e : 1 Click St ar t , c lic k Ru n , t y pe X:\B onu s\S etu p .e x e ,wher e X is t he le tt e r o f y our CD dr i v e , t h en c li ck OK . 2 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 21 Mac i ntosh 1 Cl o se all p r ogr am s and tem po r ar ily dis a ble an y v iru s pr ot ection soft war e r unni ng on y our c ompute r . 2 In ser t th e HP Ph ot o & Ima ging so f t w ar e CD in t o t he CD dri v e of y our computer . 3 Doub le -cl i ck the C D ico n o n th e com puter des k to p . 4 Double - click the i nst aller icon, a nd th en f ollow th e on -scr een in struct ions to i nst al l the soft w are . NO TE Befor e y ou can unlo ad images fr om the camera t o a Mac intosh comp uter , y ou mu st f i rs t change the USB Con figu r atio n setting to Disk Dr i v e in t he Setup men u on t he c am er a . See Chapt er 6: Usi ng the Set up Menu on page 83, a nd then s ee US B Con figu ration on page 88. Y our M acint osh C D may a lso include bonus soft w a r e fr om other man ufactur ers. T o inst all a ny bonus soft war e: 1 Do ub l e-cli ck t he Bonu s fo l d e r ic on. 2 Double - click the i ns taller icon for the bonus soft w ar e . 3 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e .
2 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 3 C hapte r 2 : Ta k i n g P i c t u r e s a n d Reco rdin g Vi d eo C lips Usi n g t h e Dis pl ay s Y our cam e r a has two d isp la y s - the Micr o dis play and t he Image D is pla y . Whi che v er d ispla y is cu r r entl y o n w il l be called t he â ac t i v e displ a yâ t hr ou g ho ut thi s ma n ual: NO TE Using t he Ima ge Dis p la y cons umes a lo t o f ba ttery pow er . T o preserve bat teri es, use the micr odi splay in stead. NO TE If the mic r odispla y does not tur n on au to mati cally w hen y ou look thro ugh the vie w finder , you ma y need to cha nge the Eye St ar t setting in th e Setu p m en u . See Eye St ar t on page 8 4. Mic r odisplay ( vi e w f inde r ) Imag e Dis pl a y Al lows you to fr am e pict u re s and v ideo clips using Li ve Vie w , and to v i e w t he Captur e an d Setup me nus . Acti v ate Live View by looking thr ough the v ie w finder . T he Ey e St art sensor belo w the v ie wf inder detects y o ur e y e and aut omati call y turns on the mic r odispla y . Use t he diopt er contr ol to adj u st th e foc u s in the mic r odispla y (see pa ge 19) . Al lows you to fr am e pict u re s an d v i deo c li p s u s i ng Liv e Vie w , r e v ie w images and vi deo clips in P lay bac k , and t o vi ew all the menu s . Acti v ate Live View by pres s i n g the Live View button .
2 4 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l The follo wing tabl e describes the i nformation th a t is disp lay ed in th e Live V iew sc r een of the act i ve display when t he ca mer a sett ings ar e at thei r default values. If y ou cha n ge ot he r c ame r a settin gs, ico ns for tho se settin gs wil l a lso b e displ ayed . # Icon Desc r ip ti on 1 12 or 1:18 R emaining p i ctur es coun t or r emaining v i d eo c lip r e cor ding time (actual number s depend on ho w muc h space r emains on the memory ca r d ) . 2 Compressio n se tting (default is , or Be tter ). 3 5 MP Resolution se tting (defa ult is 5 MP ). 4 A shaking hand icon w ill appear when you pr ess the Shutter butt on half- wa y do wn while taking a s till pi ctur e if the camer a detects t hat the pi c tur e is lik ely t o be bl urry due to the lo ng exposur e that will b e r equi r ed . T h er e f or e , y ou ma y wa n t t o u se t he f l ash (s ee Us i n g th e P o p - u p Flas h on page 3 2) or a tr ip od. 5 1/2 F12 .4 The sh utter s pee d and F - number . T h is appears when y ou pr ess the Sh utter button half - w a y down while taking a s till p i ctur e. 6 or z Battery level whe n using b atteries (see B attery G auge on page 122 ). z A C pow er when us ing th e opti onal HP A C adapte r or Cam e ra Do c k. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 5 Using t h e F ocus Brac k ets The t wo br ack ets in the midd le of the act i ve di spl ay scr een sh o w t h e f o c u s r egi on f o r t he p i ctur e y ou a r e ta kin g or t he vi d eo c l i p y o u a re re c o rd i n g. Wh en y o u p re s s t h e Shutter bu tt on hal fw a y do wn , th e c ame r a u se s th is r egi o n t o mea sur e and the n loc k the fo cu s. NO TE In l o w li g ht con diti ons , t he r e d f oc u s as sis t l i gh t on t he f r ont o f the came r a (s ee pag e 14) ma y tu r n on b r i e fl y to he l p t he c a me r a f o c u s. If y ou ar e in a si tu a ti o n w he r e y o u do not w ant the f o c u s a ssis t l igh t t o tur n on , yo u can tur n it o ff in th e Setup menu (see F oc us As sis t L igh t on page 85) . T h e fo c us br ac k e ts tur n gr een w hen th e r egi on in th e b r a c k ets is in f o c us an d t h e cam e r a can l oc k t he f o c u s, bu t tur n r ed wh en the ca me r a i s u nabl e to focus. z If the f oc u s br ac k ets tur n r ed , r e le a se th e S hutte r b u tt on , r e - fr am e t he subject for y our pictur e or vi deo cli p , and then pr ess the Shutter b ut to n h a l f way d own a g a i n . I f th e fo cus br ack ets c onti nue to t urn r ed af ter sev er a l tr ies, there ma y n ot be e no u gh co n tr as t in t he f o c u s r e gi on . T ry u sin g a techni que called F ocus Lock to f ocu s on an object about the same d i stan ce awa y but i n a hig her -con trast r egion, th en po in t the camer a at the ob j ect y o u w er e or i gina ll y try ing to photogr a ph (s ee Us i n g Focus Lo ck on p age 2 6 ) . 7 or z FL AS H OF F when the pop-up flash assembly is down. z AU TO F L A S H ( defaul t flas h se t t i ng wh e n th e p o p- up fl ash assem bly is up) . 8 F oc u s br ac k ets (see t he ne xt sec tion belo w) . # Icon Desc r ip ti on A
2 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l z If the f o c u s br ac k ets turn r e d an d the MA CR O ico n b lin ks on t he a cti v e disp la y , one o f the f ollo w ing is tr ue: ⢠The ca m era is set to th e NORMAL foc us r an ge but dete ct s the fo cus i s close r t ha n th e n orma l r a ng e . ⢠T h e camer a is set to the MA CR O ( c lo se-up) f oc u s r ange bu t de t ects the f ocu s is f a rthe r a w ay than t he ma c r o r a nge . In this case , th e camer a w ill no t t ak e a p i ctur e if it canno t f ind f oc u s . NO TE No focu s br ack ets appe ar if the c amera is set to MA NU AL F OCU S (se e U sing the F ocu s Settings on page 36) . Us ing F ocus Lock Fo c u s L o c k allo w s y o u t o f o c u s on a su bj ec t th at is n ot in t h e center of the picture , or to c apture action shots mor e quickly b y pr e-f oc u sin g i n t h e ar e a w h e r e the a ct i on w ill occ ur . Y o u can also use Focus Lo ck to help achiev e f ocu s i n lo w lig ht or lo w con tr ast situ ati ons . 1 F r ame the s ubject f or y our pic tu r e w ithin the focu s br ack ets. 2 Pr ess t he S h utter button h alf w ay do wn to lo c k the fo c us and ex p o s u re . 3 Cont i nue to h old th e Shutter but ton hal f wa y dow n wh ile you r e-fr ame or adjust your s ubj ect fo r pr oper posi tionin g . 4 Pr e s s th e Shutter but ton a l l t h e wa y d o wn to ta k e th e pictu re .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 7 T a kin g Sti ll P ic tures You can ta ke a picture almo st any time the camer a is o n, re gar dle s s o f wh at i s be i ng s how n on the ac ti v e dis p lay . 1 Rota te the Mode se lector to AU TO or anoth er of th e exp osu r e mode s (see Set ting the Expo sure M ode on pag e 3 8 ). 2 Po p up the f la sh as sembl y (see pag e 32) . 3 Fra me the su bject fo r you r pic tu re in the active displa y. 4 Hold t he cam era steady ( especially if usin g z o om ) a nd press the Shu tter but ton ha l fwa y d o wn . The c amera m easures an d t he n l oc ks the f o c u s and e x pos ur e (t he f oc us b r ac k ets w ill tu r n gr een i f t he c a mer a is a b le t o f oc u s , se e p ag e 25 ) . If an i con o f a sh akin g h and ( ) ap pe ar s in th e a c ti v e dis pl a y , y o u m a y w a n t to e ith e r us e t he p op-u p f l a sh o r set th e cam er a on a tr ipod or stable su rface , otherwise the pi cture might be blu r ry . 5 Pr ess t he Shutte r b ut ton a l l th e wa y down to ta ke t he pict ure. Y ou w il l hear a sh utt er cli c k w he n the cam er a tak es th e pic t u r e. After a pi ct ure is ta k en, the ima ge app ea rs f or sever al se co nd s in th e a cti ve disp l a y . T h is is cal led Ins t an t R e vi e w . Y ou can delete th e image du ring Instant R e v i e w b y pr essing the OK button. If y ou pr ef er , y ou can tu r n off Ins tant R e v ie w in the Setup me nu (see Instan t R e v ie w on page 86 ) . T o r e v ie w the pi ctu r es y ou hav e tak en , press the Pl ay b ac k button (se e Us i n g Playb ack on p age 5 7) . O FF Av Tv AUTO AUTO 1 2
2 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l NO TE If you r ele ase t he Shu tter button only hal f wa y after t aki ng a p i c tur e , th e f oc us an d e xpo su r e me asu r eme n ts fr om the pr e v iou s pi ctu r e ar e r etained. Y ou can t hen pr ess the Shutte r button al l the wa y do wn ag ain and ta k e anothe r picture w it h th e sam e focu s a nd e xp os ur e as the pr e v ious pictur e . Y ou ca n c onti nue to do th i s to captu r e a seq uen ce o f p i c tu r es u sin g t h e same f oc u s and e x po sur e. T his is h elp f ul w hen r ap i dl y t ak ing p i c tur es an d f or cap tur ing imag es f o r panor amic stitc hing . Recordin g Audi o wit h Still Pic tures Ther e are t wo w a ys to atta ch an audio cli p to a sti l l picture: ⢠R e co r d t he a u di o w h il e y o u a r e t a king t h e p ic tur e (e x pl ained in t his sec ti on). ⢠Add a n audio an no tation to the pi ct ure later (or r e - r ecor d the audio that was captu r ed when the pi ctu r e w as ta k en) . F or de ta ils o n how to do th is, se e Play/ R ec ord Au d i o on pa ge 6 4. NO TE Th e met ho d desc r ibed in this secti o n is no t av ailabl e in Self- T imer or Bu rst mod es. 1 Pr e s s th e Shutter but ton a l l t h e wa y d o wn to ta k e th e pictu re . 2 Co nti nu e to hol d the S hu tter button down to r ec ord the au dio c lip . A mi cr op ho ne i con ( ) an d a udio co un te r appea r on the ac tive display du r ing r eco r d i ng. 3 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g , re l e a s e t h e Shutter button, ot her w is e the au di o w il l contin ue r e cor ding fo r u p to 6 0 seco nds or un til t he me m o ry ca r d f ill s up , w h i c he v er co me s fi r s t . T o play back, dele te , or r ec or d new audio cli ps, use th e Re c o rd Au d i o se ct ion i n th e Pl ay b a ck men u (s ee U sing th e P la y bac k Men u on page 61 ) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 9 Record in g Vi de o C lips 1 R ota te th e Mode selec tor to Vid e o mo de. 2 F r ame th e s u b jec t f or y o u r v i de o i n t he active displ ay . 3 Pr ess t he Shutt er butt o n ha lfw a y dow n to meas ur e an d lock foc us (e x posur e is co n tin ually m ea sur e d an d adj u sted du r in g r ecor ding). 4 T o s t a r t re c o rd i n g , p res s t h e Shutter bu t ton al l the w a y dow n and r el ease it. A cou nter a n d RE C appe ar in t he act iv e dis play . 5 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g, p re s s t h e Sh u tt er b u tt on al l t he w ay do wn ag ain . Othe rw ise , th e camer a w ill a u tom ati ca ll y s top r ecor din g w hen the ma x imum vi deo clip length of appr o x ima tely 1 mi nu te i s r eache d , or the memor y ca r d is f ull , whic he v er comes f irs t (note that ma x imum clip length can v ary dependi ng on scene c ontent) . After r ec ordin g h as sto ppe d, the first frame of the video cl ip and PROC E SSIN G.. . appe ar on the active disp lay . Whi le it is pr o c ess in g, y ou can delete the v ideo cl i p b y pr essi ng the OK button. Y ou c an use Pl ay b a ck to revie w t he vide o cl i ps you ha v e ta k en. Se e Pl ay on pa ge 64. NO TE If you use the z oom , motor no i se fr o m optica l z oomin g will be recor ded i n the audio p or tion of a video cl ip. Thu s, for best audio qualit y , do not use the z oom whi le re c o rd i n g vi d eo. Av Tv AUT O Av Tv AUTO AUTO
30 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Usi n g Z oo m NO TE The mor e you z oom in on the subj ect of y our p i ctur e , the more th at ev en sma l l mov em ents of the c amera are ma gnif ie d ( this is cal l ed â came r a shak e â ) . S o , es pe c i a ll y at ful l tele photo z oom ( 8x) , y ou r e al ly nee d to hold the cam era steady in or der to take a p icture that is not blurr y . If an i co n o f a s hakin g h an d ( ) ap pe ar s in th e a c ti v e disp l a y , y o u ma y w ant t o se t th e camer a o n a tr ipod o r stable s u rfac e , other wise th e pictur e will likely be bl urr y . O pti cal Z oom Op ti ca l z oom w o r ks lik e th e z o om on a tr aditi o na l f ilm c ame r a , w ith p h ysi cal le ns elements mo ving ins ide the c am er a to make the subject of y ou r pictur e appe ar clos er . Pr e s s Zo o m O u t and Z oom In on the Zoom le v e r t o mo v e the le ns be tw e en w ide an gle (1 x) an d teleph oto (8 x) p osi tions. Whene v er the z oom le v er is pr essed , a z o om met er appe ars at the b ot tom of the active disp lay . A white ba r i n the m iddle of the z o om met er separates optical and digi tal z oom . T his z oom me te r is n ot s ho w n when v i d eo c lips ar e b ein g r ecor d ed . NO TE If the cam er a is set to MA CR O f ocu s, you can on ly z oom to 3 . 5x. The z oom meter will conse quently look di f fer ent in Macro mode , with a wider whi te ba r in the middl e of th e meter . MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 31 Dig ital Z oom Unli ke optical z oom, digita l z oom uses no mov ing lens pa rts. T h e c ame r a es s en t i al l y c r op s t he i ma ge t o gi v e an a p pear a nc e of the subject of the pic tu r e being an addi tional 1.2 x to 7x larger . NO TE Y ou ca nnot us e dig ital z oom while r ecor ding v ideo cl i ps. 1 Pr e s s th e Z oom In contr ol to opt ically z oom in to th e max imum lev el , then r elease the but ton . 2 Pr e s s Zoom I n ag ain and h o ld it until you r ea ch the desir ed si z e in t he ac ti ve dis pl a y . A y ell o w f r ame sur r oun ds t he ar ea o f the im ag e that w il l b e c aptured . The Re so l ut ion n u mb e r o n t h e le f t si de of the screen al so be c omes sm aller as y o u di git all y z oom . F or e x am pl e , 2. 9 appe ars in pla ce of 5 MP , indi ca ting that t he imag e is be ing r e duced to a si z e of 2. 9 M e g a p i x e l s . 3 W he n th e y e ll o w f r ame is at th e desir ed si z e , pr es s th e Shutter but to n to ta ke the pictu r e . T o turn d igital z oom off and r etu r n to opt ical zoom , pr ess Zoom Out until dig ita l z oomi ng stops. R elease the z oom contr ol , and th en pr ess i t ag ai n. NO TE D ig i t al zo o m re d u c e s th e re s o l u t i o n o f a n i ma g e, so y our pictu r e will ten d to be more p i xilated th a n th e sa me im ag e t aken wi th o ptic al zoom. I f you just in ten d to e - ma i l an ima ge o r post it t o a w e b site , this lo ss of r eso luti on w ill n ot be n oti cea ble , bu t in situati ons w he r e t he highe s t qu ality co unts ( suc h a s pr inting), limit the u s e o f di gi tal zo o m.
3 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Usi n g t h e P op-u p Fl a s h NO TE Th e fl a s h wi l l n ot work wh i l e re c o rd i n g vi d e o c l i p s . T h e f la sh is t ur ned o ff and w ill no t f ir e un til y o u man ual ly po p it u p b y sliding the pop-u p f la sh re l e a s e o n t o p o f the c amera . When the flash is po pp ed-u p , it be gins t o c har ge a nd is autom at ical ly set to the AU TO F L A S H se tting . T o change the flash set ti ng , pr ess the Fl a s h butt on on the ba c k of th e ca mer a until the desi red set t ing app ea rs on the activ e disp lay . The follo wing table de sc r ibes the diff er e nt fl as h setting s . NO TE If y ou chan ge the flash s et ti ng, the ca mer a w ill r emain in t ha t s etting until y ou change it or turn off the camer a . Icon Setting Desc r i pti on AU TO F L A S H The ca me ra m easur es l ight and use s the flash if necessary. AU TO W I T H RED -EYE RED UCTION Th e camera measur es li ght and uses the f lash w it h r ed-e ye r educti on if necessary (see Not e bel o w f o r f urt he r des c r ipti on of re d - ey e re d u c t i o n ) . FLASH ON The ca mera a lwa ys flashe s. I f the light is behind your subje ct, you can use this setting to increase the light on the front of your sub ject. T his is called â fill-flash.â OFF Av Tv AUTO MF A A
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 33 T o turn t he flash off , pr ess the p op-up flash assemb ly down un ti l it sna ps sh u t . Whe n the f la sh is off , the FLASH OFF ico n appe ars at the top of the Live View sc r e en . NO TE The r ed-e ye phenomenon is cau sed b y light f r om t he fl ash re flecting off the s ub jects â e y es, which someti mes makes a humanâs or ani m alâ s e yes appe ar r ed i n th e capt ur ed i mag e . When you us e a flash sett in g with Re d - e ye Re d uc ti o n , the camer a flashes t wice , mini m i z ing t he r ed-e y e in t h e ca p tu r ed ima ge s o f h uma ns o r ani mal s . It wil l ta ke l ong er to ta ke a pict u re usi ng Red - eye Re d u c t i o n , bec ause the shut ter is del ay ed for th e ad diti o nal f l a sh . In tu r n , ma k e sur e y o ur su b j ec ts w ait f o r the s e co nd f lash. FLASH ON WI TH RED -EYE RED UCTION The c a m e ra wi l l a l ways fi re t h e fl a s h wi th r e d-e y e r eductio n , no matter the lighting conditi ons (see Not e belo w for f u rther d e s c ri pt io n o f red - eye red uc t io n) . NI GH T Th e c a m e ra fire s th e fl a s h i f n e c e s sa r y to illuminate obj ects in the f o r egr ound. It then contin ues to expose a s if the flash had not f ir ed to gather the back gr ound. NI GH T WI TH RED -EYE RED UCTION Th e c a m e ra fire s th e fl a s h i f n e c e s sa r y (u s i n g red - eye red u c t i o n ) t o i l l u m i n a te obj ects in the f or egr ound . It then contin ues to ex po s e as i f th e flas h h ad no t f ired to gather the back gr ound ( see Note belo w f or f urther desc r ipti on of r ed-e ye r e duction). Icon Setting Desc r ip ti on
34 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Us ing Sel f- T imer Mode 1 Secure the ca mera to a tripod or set it on a stable surface . 2 Pr ess t he Tim er/ B u rs t ( ) b utton until SELF - TI MER or SELF - TIM ER â 2 SHO T S appear s in the active d ispl ay. 3 Frame the subject in the active d isplay. 4 The n ex t s te ps depe n d o n wh at yo u ar e ca ptu r in g: Sti l l pict u re 1 Pr ess t he Shutter butt on halfwa y do wn f or Fo c u s L o c k (ca mer a me asures , then locks the focu s and e xposure). The camera w ill hold these settings until it tak es the pi ctur e . 2 Pr ess t he Shutter butt on al l the wa y down . A 10 - second count do wn a ppear s on the ac ti v e displ a y and the Self - T imer ligh t on t he fr ont o f the camer a blinks f o r 10 se conds b ef or e the c amera tak es the pictur e . If you set SELF - TIM ER â 2 SHO T S , the Self - Timer l igh t blink s for a f e w mor e seconds until the second pictu re is taken. NOTE If you imm ed iate ly pre ss the Shutter button all th e way do wn wi tho ut u sin g F ocus Lo ck , th e cam er a will lock focus and exposu re just before the end of the 10-sec ond coun tdown. This is useful when one or more sub jects will be e ntering the p icture during the 10- second cou ntdow n perio d. Y ou cannot recor d audi o when using the Se lf - T imer , but you can add a n audio clip lat er (see page 6 4). Vide o cl i p 1 R otat e the Mode selecto r to Vide o mode . 2 T o start re cor ding , pr ess the Shutter button an d then r el ea s e i t . A 10 -s e con d cou n t do w n a p pe ar s in th e acti v e displa y , and then th e v ideo w ill st art r e cor d ing. 3 T o st op r ecor ding the v ideo c lip , pr ess the Shutte r button again . o r let it time out b y itself (see page 2 9) MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 35 Usi n g B u r s t M ode Burst al low s you to tak e mult iple st il l pic tu res in a r o w as quickly as the c a mer a p oss ibly c a n . Thi s feat ur e i s not av ail able for video c lips. 1 Pr e s s th e Tim e r /B u rst but ton until BU RS T a ppe ars i n t he ac ti ve disp la y . 2 F rame the s ubject an d pr ess th e Sh utt er bu tt on all the w a y do w n an d h o ld it . 3 The ca m er a takes pictu r es as quickly as p oss i ble and as man y as the m emory bu ffer c an hold (t y p ically b et ween 4 and 6 ) or un ti l the Shutte r button i s r e le ased (w h iche ver ha ppens fir st). T h e Im ag e Dis p la y r emain s o ff dur ing the b ur st ca p tur e , an d then after the burst pi ctur es hav e been tak en , each imag e appea rs one at a t im e on th e Ima ge D is play . I f you hav e Inst ant Review t ur n ed o ff ( pa ge 8 6), t he Ima g e Dis pl a y w ill s t a y o ff f o r a fe w second s while the ca mer a pr ocesses the ima ges, then it re t u r n s t o Li ve Vi e w . NO TE Y ou can use the f lash w ith Bur st mode, but it w il l s lo w do w n t h e r at e at w h i c h t h e pi ctu r es a r e ta k en . F or t he fastest bu rst r a te, turn of f the flash, but be awar e of c a m e r a s h a ke i f t h e s c e n e i s d a r k ( y o u m i g h t w a n t t o u s e a tr ipo d t o st ab iliz e the camer a) .
3 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l U sing the F ocus Se ttings The Fo cu s butto n le ts y o u t oggl e be t w een f o ur f oc u s setting s on the camer a. The follo wing tabl e describes each of the fo cu s ra n g e s e t t i n gs o n th e c a m e ra. Icon Set ting Des cr ipt i on Non e NOR MA L Use when tak ing pi ctur es of subj ects greate r t han 0. 8 m (3 1. 5 in) a w a y . Au t o f oc u s is li mited to a r ange of 0.8 m (31. 5 in) to inf init y . T his is t he def a ult f oc u s se tting. MA CR O Use wh en t akin g clos e -up pi c tu r es o f sub j ects le ss than 0.8 m (31. 5 in) aw a y . In this mode , the cam er a will not tak e a pic tur e if it cannot f ind f ocu s (the foc u s brac k ets tur n r ed in the acti v e displ ay an d an er r o r message a p pe ar s). Au to f oc u s h a s a di s t a nc e r ang e o f 0.1 to 0.8 m (3 .9 to 31.5 in). Z oom positi on is li mit ed to a r ange of wide to 3. 5x. INFINI TY Use when taking pictur es of distant obj ects and landscapes. F oc u s r ange is limited to a small r egio n near inf inity . MF MANU AL FOC US All ows you to ste p m a nual ly th roug h t he fu ll f o c u s r ange . U se t h e b u tt ons t o adju s t the foc u s. Y ou ca n deter mine the foc u s b y obse rving the image in the acti v e displa y and b y a meter that appears on the r ight si de of the acti v e di spla y . F or mor e infor mati on , se e Hi nt s on U s in g M a nu a l F ocus on page 3 7. MF MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 3 7 F o cus Se ar ch P r i o ri ty When the c am e r a is set to NORM AL or MA CR O fo cu s, i t b e g i n s se arch i n g fo r fo c us from th e l a s t fo cus p os it i o n. H owever , you can u se the butt ons to c ha ng e t his b eh av i or . T his featur e is usef ul when t her e ar e multi ple object s at d iffer ent di stan ces in t he f oc us r egi o n . z Ho l din g t h e bu tt o n w hil e p r es sin g t he S h utter hal f w ay do w n cau se s th e came r a to begin se ar ching f or f oc us f r om th e farth e st po sitio n (inf inity in NORM AL mode a nd 0. 8 m i n MA CRO mode ) , thu s mak ing t he c amera mor e li kel y to f ocu s on an object in the ba c kgr ound. z Hol ding th e button w hile p r essing th e Sh utt er halfwa y do w n cau se s th e came r a to begin se ar ching f or f oc us f r om the ne arest p os it ion ( 0. 8 m i n NORMAL mode and 0.1 m i n MA CRO mode ) , thu s mak ing t he c amera mor e li kel y to f ocu s on an object in the fo r egr ound . Hint s o n U sing Manua l F ocus z Ma k e sure to ad ju st the diop ter control pr oper l y befo r e u sing m anu al f o c u s w ith the m i cr odisp la y ( see page 19) . z T o f ind t he b est fo cu s p osit ion , a djust th e focus so tha t th e ima ge lo oks lik e it is in f oc u s o n the a c ti v e displ a y . F r o m t his posi tion, pr es s the button u nti l the i ma ge begi ns to blu r , then press the button un ti l the image be gi n s to blur . T h en set the fo c u s pos iti on half w ay betw een th e locati on s w her e the i mage be ga n to blur . z T o loc k f oc us f o r a s et o f p i c tur e s , l et the cam er a f ind t he be st f o c u s u sing the NOR MA L s etting , t he n s w itch t o MAN U AL FO C US . T he f o c u s w ill then be loc k ed a t that dis t ance until y o u adj u st it man uall y o r sw it c h to ano the r fo c u s setting .
3 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Set ting t he Exposur e Mod e The Mode se lector lets y ou ch oose be t w e e n si x e xp o sur e mo des f or still pic t u r es. (A seven t h s e t t i ng, Vid e o mo de , is e xp lain ed o n p a ge 2 9 .) The exposu r e mode set ting det er mi nes h o w the camer a sele cts se tting s suc h as aper ture (F -number ) and shutt er spee d for th e giv en scen e br ig htness. T o c ha ng e t he e x po sur e m ode , tur n t he Mo de sel ec tor to th e se t tin g y ou w a nt . The f oll o win g ta b l e des c r ibe s eac h o f th e e xposu r e mode se tting s on the ca me r a . Ico n Setting Des cr ipt i on AU T O Th e c amer a aut omaticall y selects an ape rtur e and shutter speed . AC T I O N Th e c am era bi a s e s towa rd fas t er sh u t t er speeds and higher IS O spe eds to stop acti on . When the ca mer a is set to this opti on , the ISO Sp ee d menu option is gr a y ed-out in the Capture menu . This mode al so has a â2 -se cond re lease priori t yâ fe a t u r e ( s ee p a ge 39 ) . LAN D S C A P E Th e cam er a bi a ses to w ar d smaller apertur es and lo w er ISO spee ds for bet ter d epth of f oc us and quality . When the camer a is set t o this opti on, the IS O S pe ed me n u o pt i o n i s gr a y ed-out in the Capture menu . PORT R A IT Th e cam er a bi a ses to w ar d w i der apertures t o blur t he back gr ound . VIDE O Camer a r ecords v i deo c lips (see Re co rdi n g Vid e o C l i p s on p age 29) O FF Av Tv AUTO AUTO
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 39 2 -s eco nd r ele as e pri o ri t y W he n t he e xpos ur e mo de is se t t o AC T I O N , y ou ca n ta ke m ultiple p ictur es in r ap i d succe ssi o n w ith ou t h av ing to w ait f or the ca m era to me asu r e f ocus and exp os ure f or e ach pict u r e . R e lea se an d the n r e-pr es s t he Shu tter bu t ton a ll the wa y dow n w it hin 2 se con ds afte r taking a pi c tur e , and the came r a t ak e s t he ne xt p ictu r e u si ng th e s am e f oc us a n d e xpo sur e measu r emen ts as the pre vious pictur e . Nois e Reduc ti on for Lon g Expo sures A t long e r shu tte r spee ds the camer a w ill a ut o ma ti call y tak e a seco n d e x po sur e w it h t he sh utter c l o se d in o r der to m ea sur e and r e duce the n o ise (gr ain y loo k) in t he ima ge . In t hese ca se s, t he e xp o sur e w i ll s ee m t o ta k e tw i ce a s l on g as e xpec t ed . F o r e x am pl e , in a 1-s econ d e x po sur e , the a cti ve di spl a y w ill s ta y dar k f o r 2 seco nd s un til t h e no ise r educ t i on f r ame is e xpose d . This mea ns that at longer shutt er sp ee ds, y ou ma y not be able to ta k e qui te as many shot s ba ck -to - b ack. Tv SHUTTE R PRI O R IT Y Le ts you sel ect the shutte r speed in Live View usi n g t h e b utt ons , w h il e th e c a me r a se lects the appr opr i ate a pertur e setting. This allo ws y ou to cr eate special eff ects using the shutt er s pee d (such as blur r ing the mo v ing w at er in a s tr e am) . Av AP ER TURE PRI O R IT Y Le ts y ou sel ect t he apertur e setting (F -num b e r) i n Live View us i n g th e buttons , w hile the camer a selects the appr opr i ate shu tter speed. T his allo ws y ou to contr ol the depth o f f i eld (fo r e x a mple to blur the bac k gr ound) . Ico n Setting Des cr ipt i on
40 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Usin g t he C a pture Me nu The Capture menu a llow s you to a djust vari ous cam era sett in gs t ha t aff ect t he q ual iti e s o f t he imag e s and v i deo cl ip s y ou cap tu r e w ith y our cam er a , suc h a s t he ir e xposu r e , col o r , an d re s o l u t io n. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ure menu , press the Live View button , an d then pr ess OK . If t he I m age Dis p la y is alr ead y off , you can just si mply pr ess OK . 2 U se the bu ttons t o scr oll thr o u gh th e Captu re menu options. 3 E ither pr ess the OK bu tt on t o s el ec t a hi ghli g h ted o pti o n an d dis pl a y its su b-men u , o r u se th e b utto ns to change the se tting for the highlig hted op tion withou t going to its sub- me nu . 4 W it hin a sub -menu , use the bu t tons an d then the OK but ton to ch a ng e th e set t i ng for the Capture me n u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Captu r e menu , h ighl ight t he EXIT CA PT URE ME NU option and pr es s the OK button. NO TE Some of the setting s in the Capture menu ar e gra yed ou t w he n the came r a is se t to VID E O mode , meanin g that y o u can n ot u se tho s e setting s whe n r ecor ding v i deo c lips . Scr e en one Scr een t wo
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 41 Help for th e Menu Optio ns Hel p ... is the last opt ion in eac h of the Captu re su b-me n u s . T h e Help ... option pr o vi des information ab out that Capture menu op tion a nd it s sett in gs. F o r e x a mple, if you pr ess OK when Hel p ... is hig hli ght ed in the AE M e ter i ng sub -m enu , the AE M eteri ng Hel p scr een i s d ispl ay ed , as show n. U se the bu ttons t o sc r oll thr ou gh th e Help sc r eens . T o e x it th e H elp an d r eturn to the pa rt icul a r Capture sub -me n u , pr ess the OK but ton .
4 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l EV Com pens a tion In difficul t lighting conditions, you can u se EV (Ex p os ur e Valu e) Compe nsa tion to o verride the automa tic exposure setting that the camera makes. EV C om pensa ti on is usef ul in s cenes that contai n many light ob jects (l ik e a w hit e ho u se in t he sno w) o r ma n y dar k ob jec ts (lik e a bl a c k ca t o n a da r k ba c k gr oun d). Sce ne s con tainin g man y light objects or man y dar k objects c ould turn out gra y w ithout the use of EV Compensat ion . F or a scene with man y li gh t o b j ec ts , inc r ea se t he EV C om p ensa ti o n t o a po s iti v e number to pr o duc e a bri ghter r esult . F o r a sc ene with man y dark obj ects, decr ease the EV Compens ation to dark en t he scene to be cl oser to b lack. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t EV C ompe nsa tio n . 2 In the EV C ompensatio n menu, use the b utto ns to change the EV settin g in 0.33 steps f rom -3.0 to 3.0. The new setting is appl ied to the Live View scr ee n behind the me nu, so you should be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pictu re. 3 Pr e s s OK to save th e set ti ng an d retu rn to th e Capt ur e menu . If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f 0 (z er o) , the number value will app ea r in the Liv e View screen ne xt to the ico n . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til t he came r a is tur ned o ff (u nles s EV C om pensa ti on is check ed i n the Rememb er ed Set t ings me nu - see page 90) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 43 White Bal ance Differ ent kinds of lighti ng condit ions cast dif fer ent colors. F or e xam pl e , sunli ght is mo r e blue , wh ile indo or tungs ten li ght is mo r e y ell o w . S cen es do mina t ed b y a s in gle co l o r m a y r eq uir e an ad j u s tmen t of the whit e bal an ce se tting t o h elp the camer a r epr o d uce colors mor e accurately and ens u r e th at wh ites appe ar white i n th e f inal pictur e. Y ou c an als o ad ju st the whi te bala nce to pr oduce cr eativ e effects. Usi ng t he Sun or Tu n g s t e n sett in gs ca n produce a warmer look to the pictur e , and the Shade set ting c an make a suns et picture look mor e or ange. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Whi t e B ala n ce . 2 In the White Balance me nu , use the butt ons to high li gh t a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View screen be hind the menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ur e. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting an d r e tur n t o the Captur e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : Ico n Setting Descr iption Non e A u t o The camer a automa tically identifie s and corrects for scene illuminanc e. This is the def ault setting. Sun The cam er a ba lanc es color assumi ng i t is outdoor s under su nn y or br i ght c lo udy conditions . Shade The cam er a ba lanc es color assumi ng i t is outdoor s in shade , in dar k cl ou d y conditions, or at dusk .
44 HP P ho t osma rt 9 45 U se r âs Man u al If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f Aut o , the icon for the se tt in g ( in the table ab o ve) will appe a r i n th e Live Vi e w sc r een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til the came r a is tur ned o ff (unle ss Whit e B a la nc e is c h ec k ed in th e Rem em b e re d S e t t i ng s menu - see page 90) . Manual White B alance If you se lect the Man ua l option , the Man ual W hite Ba la nce scr een dis play s . The Live View port ion of th e scr een sho ws the c olor ti nt fr om the pr e v ious Man u al W hi t e B a l a n c e se tting that w a s ma de . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r ev i o u s Man ual W hite Ba la nce s ettin g , sim pl y pr es s t he OK button i n th e M an ual Whi te B ala n ce sc r een wi t hou t pr essi ng th e Shutte r button. Tu n g s t e n The ca mer a b alanc es c olor based on incandescen t or halogen lighti ng (typ i call y fo u nd i n ho m e s ) . F l uor escen t T he ca mer a b alanc es c olo r based on f luor escent ligh ting . Manual The camer a calc ulates a c ust om White Balance based on your target image ( see the fo l lowi n g su bs e ctio n ) . Ico n Setting Descr iption
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 45 To c h a n g e t h e Man ual Whit e Balance set ti ng: 1 P oint th e cam er a at a whi te or g r ay target (s uch as a piece o f p ape r ), ma king sur e th at the r egi on insi de t he f oc us br ack ets enc ompass es the whi te or gr a y tar get . 2 Pr ess t he S h utter b utton (t he ca mer a w ill not t ake a pic tur e ) . T h e camer a t he n cal c ul ate s a c u sto m White Balance set t ing based on the r eg ion in s i de th e f ocus br ack ets. Du ring th e calc ulatio n , PROC ESSIN G... is disp lay ed on t he s cr e en. When the ca lcul atio n i s c omple te , th e c olo r t i nt i n Live V iew chan ges to match the new Manu al Whi te B ala nc e setting , and WHITE B AL ANCE SE T is disp l a y e d . 3 If nee de d , r epe at s tep s 1 an d 2 un til y o u ge t th e des ir ed Man ual W hite Ba la nce s etting . 4 W he n y ou ar e sa tisf i e d w ith t h e Ma n ua l set t ing you ha v e made, pr es s the OK but ton to e xit th e Manu al W hite Balance s c re e n a n d re t u r n to th e Ca p t ure men u . AE Meterin g T his s etting al lo w s y o u t o s pec ify w hi ch r egio n o f a s cene the came r a w ill u se t o cal c u la t e th e e xpos ur e . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct AE Mete r in g . 2 In the AE Me t er i ng me nu , use the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu .
46 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Center - W eight ed , the icon for th e set t i ng ( i n the tab le ab ove) w il l appea r in the Live View scr e en. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til the ca mer a is tu r ned o ff (unles s AE Me ter ing is ch ec k ed in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) . Ic on Setting Desc r ip tio n Ave ra g e The camer a u ses the en tir e scene r egi on to mea sur e an d cal cu l a t e e x po sur e . U se t h is s et t i n g wh e n you wa nt ever y t h i ng in the pict u re to be u sed equally wh en calculating e xposure . None Ce nter - We i g h t e d T he c ame r a u ses a l ar ge ar ea i n t h e ce n t e r o f the scene re gion to measur e and ca lcul ate e xposur e. This setting is good to use when the subj ect is in the center of the f r ame . Expos ur e w ill be b ased mor e on the sub ject th an on its surr oundings . T his is t he def a ult setting . Sp ot The camer a u ses a small ar e a in th e center o f the scene re gion to measur e and ca lcul ate e xposur e . This c an be usef ul in backlit scenes or w h en th e su bj ect is v ery da r k o r l i gh t compar ed to the re st of the scene . When using this setting , put the sub ject of the pi ctur e in the center of t he vi e wfinder , then pr ess t he Sh utter button halfwa y do wn to l o ck t he exposur e and f ocu s on the spot in the c ent er , and then r e compose the scene as desir ed .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 4 7 I S O Speed T his se tting adj usts th e sensiti vity o f th e came r a to l igh t . Wh en IS O S pee d is s et t o Aut o , the ca mera select s the best ISO spee d for the sc ene. NO TE If the came r a is in AC T I O N , LA N D S C AP E , or VIDE O mode, th e IS O S pee d wi l l a lway s b e s e t to Au to and the IS O option in the Capt ur e me n u w ill be gr a y ed ou t . Lo w er IS O spe ed s al low slow er shutter sp ee ds, and will c apture t he bes t q u ality p ic tur es w ith the lea s t am o unt o f gr ain (or n ois e) . If ta king a p ict ur e in lo w l i gh t cond itio ns w itho ut a fl a sh at IS O 100 , y o u m a y w ant t o u se a tr ipod . In c on tr a s t , hi g he r IS O n umb e r s allo w hi g he r sh u tte r sp eeds , an d ca n be u s ed w he n ta king p ictur es in dar k ar eas w ith o ut a f la sh , or pi c tu r es of fa st mo ving obj ects. Higher IS O sp eeds produce pic tu r es w i t h m or e gr ai n o r n o is e and , t h us , can be o f lo w er q u ality . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct IS O Speed . 2 In the ISO Spe ed menu, u se the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f Aut o , the n u mber v alu e for the set t ing w ill appe a r in the Live V iew scr een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t un til it is c ha nged aga in o r un til t he came r a is tur n ed o ff (unle s s IS O S peed is c he c k e d in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) .
4 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Dig ital Flas h T his s ettin g bal an ce s the r el a ti on ship be tw een br igh t an d da r k ar eas i n a pictur e , pr eservin g ge ntle contrasts but compr essi ng ha r sh co nt r as ts . So me ar ea s in t he p ic tur e ar e lig h te n ed , wh il e ot h er s ar e le f t al on e . Her e is an e x am ple o f ho w Digi t al F l as h can enhanc e an i mage : Di gital F la sh is u sef ul in situ ati o ns lik e the s e: z outdoor scenes with a mi xt ur e of sun and shade z cloud y da y s when ther e is a lot of â gla r e â f r om the s ky z indoor scenes that use flash photogr aph y (to soften or e v en ou t t he e ff ect o f the f l ash) z backl it scenes wher e the subject is to o far aw a y f or the re g u l a r f l as h t o re a c h NO TE Yo u c a n u s e Di git al F la sh wit h o r wi t h ou t r eg ul a r fl a s h , but i t is no t recomm ende d as a r eplac ement for r eg ula r fla s h . Un l i ke reg ul a r fl as h, Dig ita l F lash does not af fect e xposu r e settin gs , so br i gh t en ed ar eas m a y a pp ea r â no is y â or gr ain y , an d in d oor o r nig ht im age s ma y be blurr y if taken w ithout a regula r flash or a t r ip od. With out Dig ital Fl a s h Wi t h Digit al Fl as h
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 4 9 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Digit al F la sh . 2 In the Digit al F la sh menu, us e t he bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Off , th e i co n f o r th e se ttin g (in the ta b l e a bo v e) w i ll ap pe ar in the Live View s cr e en. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t un til it is c ha nged aga in o r un til t he came r a is tur ne d o ff (unl ess Digita l Flash is che c k ed in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) . Icon Setting Desc r ip tio n Non e Of f Cam er a will pr ocess the image as nor ma l . This is the def ault setting . Low Usef ul for mos t t ypes of scenes containing a mi xtur e of sun and shade , or f or images captur ed wi t h re g u la r fl as h . High Usef ul f or c onditions of extr eme backlighting , or w he n y o u w an t a dr ama ti c e f f ec t . Th i s se t ti ng is v ery str on g, and you ma y not w ant t o pr int photos muc h lar ger t han 5â x 7â because t he dark ar e as of the phot o w ill be gr ain y .
5 0 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Colo r Th is s etting all o w s yo u t o con tr ol the col or in w hic h y our ima ge s w ill be ca p tu r ed . F or e x am ple , w he n y o u set Color to Sepia , y our im ages will be captu r ed i n br o w n colors to ma k e them lo ok ag ed or old- fashioned. NO TE Once yo u ha v e tak e n a pi c tur e using e ither t he Blac k & Whi t e or Sepi a s etting , the imag e canno t be a dj u sted back to F u ll Co lo r la t e r . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Color . 2 In the Color menu, us e th e bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . T h e ne w setting is app lie d to t h e Live Vi ew s c re e n b e h ind th e me nu , s o y ou sh o ul d be a b le t o see the effect the set t ing w ill hav e on the pi ctur e . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting and r etur n to th e Capture menu . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til t he came r a is tur ned o ff . T he Color setting r ese ts to t he defa ult ( F u ll C ol o r ) wh en y o u t ur n th e cam e r a off (un l es s Color is c hec k ed in t he R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 51 Res o l u t i o n This setting al lo ws y ou to set t h e r esol uti o n (n umbe r o f p i x els) a t w h i ch your imag es will b e c aptured. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Re s o l ut i o n . 2 In the Resolution menu, us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : The Pi c t u r e s re m a i n i n g count a t th e botto m o f th e s c r e en u pda tes w he n y ou hi ghlig h t eac h s e tting . See Me m o ry C ar d Capacit y o n p a g e 1 41 fo r mo re in forma t i on ab out h ow th e Re so l ut ion se tting aff ects the numbe r of ima ges th at can be sav ed on y o ur memor y ca r d . T h e i co n f o r t he n e w se ttin g (i n th e ta ble abo v e ) w il l a pp ea r in the Live View scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect (e ven if y ou tur n t he ca mer a o ff) un til it is ch anged ag ain . NO TE When y ou use digital z oom , the r esolution changes as yo u z o o m i n . S e e Digital Z oom on p age 31. Ic on Setting Desc r ip tio n 5MP 2 6 08 x 19 5 2 T he captur ed image will be f ull siz e ( 2 608 x 19 5 2 p i x els). This is the de f a ult setting , and is the best choi ce if you int end to p rin t pict u res. 1MP 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 The cap tu r e d image will be 1/4 si z e (12 9 6 x 9 7 6 pi xels). This se tting is use f u l if y ou j ust in ten d t o e- mail images or post th em to th e i n tern et.
52 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Compr ess i o n This setting de ter mines ho w m uc h JP E G com p r e ss io n y ou r ima ges w ill ha v e . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Compression . 2 In the Compr ession me nu, us e t he bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu r e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : The Pi c t u r e s re m a i n i n g count a t th e botto m o f th e s c r e en u pda tes w he n y ou hi ghli gh t ea c h se tting . See Me m ory Ca r d Capacit y o n p a g e 1 41 fo r mo re in forma t io n ab o ut how t h e Compr ession set t ing affects the numb er of images that c an be s av ed on y o ur me m o ry c ar d . The icon f or the n ew set t ing ( in th e tab le abov e) will ap pe ar in the Live View sc r een . T h e ne w setting r e mains in e ff ec t (e ve n if y ou tur n the ca me r a o ff ) un til it is c h ang ed a g ain . Icon Setting De scr iptio n Best Produ ces the hig hest- qual ity im ages, bu t uses the mo st m emory. This is recom me nded if you plan to enlarge imag es, or print imag es to a size larg er than 18 by 24 cm (or 8 by 10 in). Better Produces high-qua lity ima ges an d r equire s les s memory than the Bes t settin g. This is the de fault setting, and is recommende d for printing images up to 18 by 24 cm (or 8 by 10 in). Good T he most memory-e ff ici ent set ti ng, for ima ges that you w ant to e- mail or post to the Interne t.
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 5 3 Satura tion T his s etting al lo w s y o u to de ter mine ho w s atur ated t he co lo r s w il l be in your pi ctur es. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Satur a tio n . 2 In the Sat ur ati on menu , us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View screen be hind the menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ur e. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting an d r e tur n t o the Captur e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View sc r een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is c hanged again . Ic on Setting Descr ipti on Low Mute s color s t o gi v e a so fter , mor e â natur alâ loo k to the subje ct . None M edium C o l o rs wi ll b e n o rm a ll y s at u rat ed . T h i s i s t h e def a ult setting . High Emphasi z es mor e vi v id col or s in a scene . Outdoor landscape photogr aph y ca n use high satur ation t o cr e ate skies t hat ar e mor e blue , or sunsets that a r e mor e or ange . -
54 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Sh arpnes s This sett i ng a llow s you to set ho w sh arp the edg es wil l b e in y our pictur es. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Sha rp ness . 2 In the Sha r pne s s menu, us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View sc re en beh in d th e menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ure. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting and r etur n to th e Capture menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View screen. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is chan ge d again . Ico n Setting De s cr ipti on Low Th e e dges in your imag es will b e softer , w ith less gr ain . Y ou ca n use this setting for tak in g p o rt rai t pic tu res wi th sof t er , m ore nat u r a l ed ge s. Non e Medi u m T h e ed g e s i n y o u r im a ge s wi ll h av e n or mal shar pness. High T h e ed ge s in y o u r i ma ge s w ill be mo r e p r on ounced . T his setting ma y be help f ul f or out door landscapes , but the images w ill co n t ain m o r e gr ain . -
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 5 5 Con t r ast This sett in g allows y ou to contr ol how muc h contra st ther e will be b et w een th e dark a nd lig ht c o lor s in your c aptu red ima ges, incl uding th e am ount o f d eta il th er e w ill be in t he hi ghli gh ts and s had o w s with i n t he im ages. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Contra st . 2 In the Cont r ast m enu , use the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View screen. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is c hanged again . Ic on Setting Desc r ip ti on Low Y our images w ill ha v e less contr ast: dark and li ght color s in the image w ill be less distinct , and ther e will be mor e details in the highlights and shado ws . None M e dium Y our images will ha v e nor mal contr a st . T h is is the def ault setting . High Y our images will hav e mor e c ontr ast: dark and li ght color s in the image w ill be mor e distinct , and ther e will be less detail s in the highli ghts and shado ws . -
5 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Setup If y ou p ress OK when the Setu p optio n is highlighted in the Captu re me nu, t he Setup menu di sp lays . See Chapter 6 : Using the Set up M e nu on page 83.
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 5 7 C hapte r 3 : R e v i e w ing I mag e s Yo u c a n u s e t h e Pl ayb a ck f eature to r e view the i mages and v ideo c li ps in your camera . In addit ion, the Pl ayba ck men u all o w s y o u t o ad d , ch ang e , or del e te a u di o c lip s , del e t e imag e s or v id eo c lips , ma gnify still imag es , an d v ie w all t he se ttings that wer e used when that im ag e or v ideo cli p w as captu red . NO TE Wh en r e v i e wing imag es in Pl ay b a ck , y ou can u se the Pr int but ton to sele ct im ag es th a t you want to hav e pr inte d a ut o ma ticall y the ne xt time y o u conne ct t he camer a. See Se lecting I mages f or Pr in ting on page 6 0. Usi n g P l ay bac k 1 Pr e s s th e Playb ack butt on to a cti v ate P la ybac k . The most r ecently tak en or re vie w ed image or v ideo cli p appea rs on t he Im a g e Disp l a y . 2 U se the butto ns to scr oll thr o u gh y ou r image s and v ide o c lips . Pr e ss an d ho l d t he or butt o n to sc r ol l f a s ter . NO TE Y ou only see the f i r st fr ame of e ach vi deo cl ip , whic h is in di cate d b y th e Vi d e o i con . Y ou c an then u se the Play option in the Pl ayb a c k menu to play v ideo or audio cl ips. See Us i n g t h e Playba ck M e nu on pa ge 6 1. 3 T o tu r n t he Im a ge D i sp l a y o ff aft e r r e v ie w ing y our ima g es and v ideo cl i ps , pr ess the P l a y bac k but ton agai n .
5 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Dur ing Pl ay b a ck , som e i nformation about each image or video c lip is also d isp la ye d . T he f o llo win g t a bl e des c r ibes th e inf or ma tio n . # Ic on Des cr ipt i on 1 or z Battery level (actual icon shown depends on the state of your came ra batteries). z A C pow er when us ing t he opti onal HP A C pow er adap te r or H P c a m e r a d o ck. 2 D i sp l a ys for th e fi rs t few se co n ds wh e n y ou ent e r Pla y b a ck to i n dic a te th a t you ca n s croll t h r ou g h al l the images or v ideo c lips. 3 1 Indicat es this image has bee n selected to be sent to 1 des tinati on using HP I n st ant Sh ar e (se e Chapter 4 : Using HP Instan t Shar e on page 6 9) . 4 2 In dicate s this image has been selected f o r pr in ting 2 copi es (see page 60) . 5 5 of 14 Sho w s the cur r ent image number a nd the total number of images /vi deo clips on the me mor y c ard . 6 or z In dica tes this ima ge has an audi o c lip . z In dica tes this is a vi deo c lip . 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 59 T otal Im a ges Summ ar y Screen When y ou pr ess the but ton while v ie w ing the la s t ima ge , a sc r een appea rs sh o w ing the num ber of imag es capt ur ed, number of i mag es r e maining , and counte r s indi cat ing the total number of images sel ected for HP Ins t ant Sh a r e and printi ng. Y ou ca n al so v ie w this s c r een f r om an yw he r e in Play b a ck by pr essing either of t he button s. O rienta tion Sensor An electr o -m echan ical dev i ce in the ca mera deter m ines whether the camer a is being hel d hor i z ont all y or ve rti call y when the p i ctur e is tak en . T he ca mera uses the data f r om this sensor to aut omati cally r otate the image to its pr oper or i ent ation w hen sav ing the f ile .
60 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Sel ec ting Im a g es f or Pr inti ng The Pr in t b u t t o n o n t h e b a c k o f t h e c a m e ra a l l o w s y o u t o s e t ho w m an y co pies of a sti l l ima ge you w a nt to have pr inte d autom atic al ly th e next ti m e you c on ne ct the ca mera to your com pu ter o r dir ectl y t o certa in HP p r in te r s. NO TE Yo u c a n u s e t h e Pr in t bu tto n an y time t hat y ou s ee a sti l l i mage d isp lay ed on t he Imag e Di s play , s uch as d uring Pl ay b ac k , or w hen y ou a ccess t he main Pla yb a c k me n u o r the Sha r e me n u . T o sel ec t a still image f or dir e ct pr int: 1 Pr ess the Pr int bu tto n . 2 U se the butto ns t o set the number of copies y ou w ant to pr int . T he max imum numb er of cop i e s is 99 . Th e pr int e r i co n w ith the numb er of copies th at you set appe a rs in the low er r ight- hand corner of the image . T h e n e xt time y ou c onn ect t he ca me r a t o y o ur co m p u te r o r pr inte r , the ima ges y o u ha v e se lec ted w il l pr int a utoma tica ll y (se e P ri n t i n g I m a g es D i re ct ly fro m th e Ca m e ra on p age 7 9.)
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 6 1 Usi n g t h e P l a y bac k M e nu The Pl a yb a c k me n u al lo w s y ou to pl a y or r ecor d aud i o c lip s , play v ideo cli ps, delete im ages, aud io cli ps, or video cl ips or for ma t the memor y c a r d , mag nif y an image on the Ima ge Disp l a y , o r v i e w all o f the se ttin g s th at w e r e u s ed wh en cap tur ing an im ag e . F r om this me n u , y o u can al so acces s t he Setup me nu to set a numb er of pr efer ences on the c amera . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl ay b a ck menu , pr ess the OK button while yo u a re i n Pl a yb a c k . If yo u ar e not c ur r en tl y in Pl ay b ac k , pr ess th e Pl ay b ac k but ton first , then press the OK but ton . 2 U se the bu ttons to mo v e t o th e im ag e o r v i d eo c lip y ou wan t t o us e. 3 U se t he bu tto ns to hi ghlig ht t he me nu o pti on s on th e le f t o f t he Im a g e D isp l a y . 4 Se lec t a h i ghli gh ted o p ti on b y pr es sing the OK button. Each of th e Pl ayb a ck menu op ti o ns ar e e x pla ined l at er in t his se ction. NO TE Whi l e a P la y bac k menu opti on is hi ghl i ghted , yo u can use th e button s to scr ol l to other im a ges an d video clip s . T h is is us ef ul f or perf or ming the same a cti on o n sev eral im ages or video clips, such as de leti ng mu lti pl e ima ges or v ideo c lips . 5 To e x i t t h e P l a ybac k me nu and r etur n t o v i e w ing image s in Pl ay b ac k , hi g hli gh t t he EX I T P L A YB A CK ME NU option and pr ess the OK but ton .
62 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Th e follow ing table s umm ar i z es each of the Pl ayb a c k menu options and des cr ibes the information in th e bott om r ight cor ner of ea ch image while the Playb ack men u is dis pl a y ed . # Ico n Desc r ip tio n 1 Exits the Pl a yb a c k me n u . 2 o r o r z P la y s the audi o clip that is att ach ed to this image (se e Pl a y on page 64 ). z Re cor d s an audi o clip to a ttac h to this image (se e Rec ord A u d io on page 64) . z P la ys this v i deo clip (see Pl ay on page 64). 3 Pre sents a su b-me nu wher e y ou can delete this image or vi deo clip , d ele te only the audio clip attached to this still image , dele te al l images and v ideo clip s, or f or mat the memory car d (see Delete on page 6 5) . 4 M agnif ie s this image on the Image Disp la y (not av ailable f or v ideo clips -see Ma gnify on pag e 6 6). 5 Allo w s y ou to v i e w all of t he setting s that w e r e used w hen captur in g this image (see Image Info on page 6 7) . 6D i s p l a y s t h e Setup men u , w hi c h all o w s y ou to set a num ber of pr efer en c es on the ca mera (se e Chapter 6: Using the S etup M enu on page 83). 1 2 6 3 5 12 10 9 11 8 4 7 S till image Vi deo clip 13
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 63 7 5 MP Sho w s the Re so l u t io n (su ch a s 5MP ) and Compr e ssio n (suc h as the 2 star s f or Bette r ) for this image , or blank if it is a v i deo c lip (s ee Res o l ut i o n on pag e 5 1 an d Compr ess ion on pag e 5 2). 8 0:2 5 Visible if this image has an audi o c lip attached t o it , w it h the len gth of th e audi o clip displ ay ed t o th e l e f t o f t he i c o n . 9 5 o f 14 Sh o ws the cur r ent image numb er an d the total number of images/v ideo clips on the memor y card . 10 date Sho ws the date that this image was captur e d. 11 2 Indicate s this image has b een selected f or pr inting 2 copies (see Selec t ing Ima ge s f or Pr inting on page 6 0) . 12 1 Indicate s this image has b een selected to b e sen t t o 1 destinati on u sing HP Ins t ant Sh ar e ( se e Chapter 4: Using HP Instant Shar e on page 6 9) . 13 0:2 8 Visible if this is a v i deo cl ip , wit h t he lengt h of t he v ideo clip display e d to the l eft of the i con. # Ico n Desc r ip ti on
64 HP P ho t osma rt 9 45 U se r âs Man u al P la y /R ecor d Audi o In the Pl ayb ac k men u (pa ge 61) , the f ir s t men u o pti o n is e ithe r Pl ay or Re c ord Au d io dep e ndin g on t h e s till im ag e o r v i d eo clip t hat is c ur r en tl y dis p la yed . Pl ay Thi s Pl ayb a ck me nu option a ppe a rs if on e of t he f ollo w ing is c ur r en tl y dis play ed: z a sti l l ima ge w ith an audio cli p atta c hed t o it z a video clip Hig hl igh t Pl ay , an d the n p r es s OK to play the aud io cli p or v ide o c l ip . Y ou can ad j u s t t h e a u di o v olu me b y p r essin g t h e bu ttons w h ile the au di o c lip o r v i deo clip is p la y ing . T o st o p th e c lip wh ile it is pl a y ing , p r ess t h e OK but ton. Reco rd A ud io Thi s Pl ayb a ck me nu option a ppe a rs if a stil l imag e wit h no a u di o c lip atta c hed is cu r r entl y displ a y ed . T o re c o rd a n a ud i o c l i p f o r th e i m a g e : 1 Hig hl igh t Re c o rd Au d io, and t he n pr ess OK . A udi o r ecor ding s t arts imm e d iately af ter you select thi s menu option . A mic r ophone icon and audi o cou nte r are disp l a y e d dur ing r ecor d ing . 2 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g , p re ss OK agai n , otherwise the a udio will con tinue r e cor d ing f or up to 60 seconds or until the memo ry ca r d f ills u p , w hi c he v e r co me s f ir s t .
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 65 Delete 1 In the Playba ck men u (pa ge 61), hig hligh t Dele te an d the n p r es s OK . 2 In the Dele t e sub-m enu , use the bu tto ns t o hi ghli ght the option y ou w ant , and then pr es s OK. T hese options include : ⢠Cance l âRet urn s to th e Pl ay b ac k me n u w itho ut del eting an ything . ⢠Thi s I m a ge âDeletes t he c urr ently di sp lay e d i mage or vi d e o cl i p. ⢠Au d i o O n l y â Deletes only the audio clip att ached to the c ur r e n tl y dis pla y ed im age an d k eep s th e c ur r en t imag e . ⢠All I m ages âDel etes al l of the ima ges and vi deo cl ips on the m emor y c ard . ⢠Fo r m a t C a r d âDel etes a l l of the i mages, video cl ips, a nd f iles on the memor y c ar d , and then f ormats the me mory car d. NO TE P er i odi c f o r matting o f t he me m ory ca r d w il l k eep it c lea n of f i le r emn an ts tha t m a y ca u s e the cam e r a t o l oc k u p , sa v e im age s sl o w l y , or co r r u p t ima ges .
66 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Magni fy NO TE If t he im age th at is c u r r en tly dis pla y ed is a v ide o c lip , the Ma g n i fy menu option is gr a y ed out . Yo u c a n u s e Magn ify to see a close- up of the cur r entl y disp l a y e d ima ge . Th is opti o n is o nl y fo r v ie w ing a ma gnif i ed imag e on the I mage Di splay ; it does not permanently alter the ima ge . 1 In the Playba ck men u (pa ge 61), sele ct Magnify an d the n p r ess OK . T h e c ur r en tl y disp la y ed ima ge is aut om ati cal l y magnif ied on t he Im a ge Disp l a y , w ith t he cen t e r po rt i on of t he im age vi s i b l e. 2 Y ou ca n pa n ar o un d t he ma gnif i ed im ag e b y pr essing th e an d bu tt on s . 3 Pr e s s Zo o m O u t to decrease magn ifi c ation a nd pr ess Zo o m I n to inc r ea se magn if ica ti on u p t o 150x. A meter app ea rs br ief ly in the to p r ight corn er of th e I m age Di sp lay ea ch ti m e you pr ess one of the Zoom contr ols. 4 Pr ess the OK but ton to e xit the mag ni fied image an d r eturn to th e Pl ay b ac k men u .
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 6 7 Im a g e Info Thi s option a llow s you to see al l of the set t i ngs th at wer e u se d when capt u r ing th e cur r en tly di splayed image. 1 In the Pl ay b ac k menu (pag e 61) , select Ima ge I nfo , a nd the n pr ess OK . 2 Use the button s to scr ol l to other im ag es an d vie w th eir inf or ma tio n . 3 T h en p r ess the OK b ut ton to r et urn to t he Pl ayb ac k me n u . NO TE Th e inf o r ma tio n in t he l as t thr ee r o ws in th e botto m r ight co rner is th e same i n for mation t hat appe ars i n the Pl ay b ac k menu (page 61) vi e w of the i mage. # Des cr ip t i on 1 S ettings f o r still pi ctur es ( this r o w is blank f or v i deo clips): z Non-def a ult e xpos ur e mode se ttings ( AC T I O N , LA N D S C AP E , PORT R A IT , SH UTTER P R I ORI TY , or AP ER TURE PRIORITY ). z An y no n-def ault Ca ptur e me nu se ttings (r est of to p r o w) . 2 S ettings f o r still pi ctur es ( this r o w is blank f or v i deo clips): z Shutter speed. z F-number ( aper t ur e) . z EV Compe ns ati on s etting (if not the def ault o f 0) . 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4
6 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Setup If y ou p ress OK when the Setu p optio n is highlighted in the Pl ay ba ck menu, the Setup menu displ ays. S ee Chapter 6: Using the Se tup M en u on pa ge 8 3. 3 ISO Spee d setting that w as u sed ( 100 , 200 , or 400 ), o r blank if it is a vi deo clip . 4 Zoom position of lens when the pi ctur e was captur ed (blank fo r vid e o c l i p ) . 5N o n - d e f a u l t f o c u s s e t t i n g ( MA CR O , IN FI N IT Y , or MANU AL ) or blank if the it is a v i deo c lip or NO RMAL setting . 6 F la sh setting that w as used ( AU TO, F L A S H O F F , FL ASH O N , FL ASH O N W I TH RE D-EYE RE DUCTION , NIGH T , or NIG HT WITH RE D-EYE RE D UCTION ) , o r blank if it is a v i deo c lip . 7 F ile na me of the image on the memory car d . 8 F ile si z e of t he image on t he me mory car d . # Des cr ip t i on
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 69 C hapte r 4 : Usin g H P Ins tan t Sh are This camer a has an ex citin g feature cal le d HP I nst ant Sh are . T his f eatur e allo ws y o u to ea sil y se lec t im age s in y o ur came r a to be automat ical ly sent to a v ariety of dest in ation s the next time y ou co nnect the cam er a t o y our co mput er . F or ex ampl e , y ou c an sele ct im ages in your c am er a to b e automatic ally sent to e -m ail add r esses ( in cludi ng g r ou p dis t r ibution li sts ) , onl i ne albu ms, or other onl ine ser vices the ne xt tim e y ou con nect the camer a to y our co mpu ter . NO TE A v a i lable onl ine ser vices v ary b y r e g ion . Once y ou hav e tak en still pi ctur es w ith y our camer a , u sing HP I nst ant Sha r e is as e asy as 1- 2 -3! 1 Set up the Share menu on your ca mer a , as expla ined in the ne x t secti on st arting on page 7 0. 2 Use t h e Sha r e me nu t o s elect imag es in y our camer a f or par ticula r HP I nst ant Sha re desti na tion s. F i rst se e Us i n g t h e Shar e Menu on pa ge 7 3, an d th en se e Select ing I mages fo r HP In stan t Sh a r e D est in at ion s on p ag e 7 4 . 3 Connect the cam er a to y our computer and unloa d the ima ges as e x plain ed in Unlo ad in g I mag es to a Computer on p age 77. On ce t he im ag es ar e un l oad e d t o y our com pu te r , the y w ill be a u t oma ti call y sent to t h e ir r es pecti ve HP I nst ant Sha r e desti nat ion s. NO TE Vi s i t ww w . h p .c o m / g o / i ns t an ts h a r e to se e HP I nst ant Shar e in act i on .
7 0 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Set ting U p t h e Sh are Menu on the Camer a Bef o r e yo u can use HP Ins tan t Shar e , y o u m u st f ir s t s et up the Shar e me n u o n y our came r a . Th e f o l lo w in g p r oced ur e ex pl ain s how to d o th is. NO TE Y ou w ill need an In ter net connecti on to comp lete t his pr o c ed ur e on a Window s computer . Al so , mak e su re that th e memo ry car d in y our came r a is no t lo ck ed and ha s some fr ee spac e on it . 1 Mak e sur e th at t he HP Photo & Imaging Sof twar e is insta lled on y our computer (see page 2 0) . 2 T u rn on the c amera , and t hen p r es s the HP Inst ant Sh are ( Shar e ) but ton on the back of the c amera . 3 The Sha r e menu a ppe ars on the Im age Dis play . ⢠If this is y our f ir s t time ad ding d es tinati o ns t o the Shar e menu , ther e is only one menu option av ailable ( C u st o mi z e th is menu ... .) . Pr es s t h e OK butto n to se l ec t t his me n u o p ti on . ⢠If you hav e pr e v iou sly ad ded dest i nation s to the Share me nu , u se t he butto n to sc r oll to t he bo ttom of the lis t o f c ur r en t d es tinati ons in th e Sh a r e m e n u , hi gh li gh t C u st o mi z e th is menu ... , an d then pr ess th e OK button. Once y ou hav e sel ect ed C u st o mi z e th is menu ... , a messag e l ik e t hi s on e ap pe ars on t he Im a ge D ispl a y a sk in g y o u t o connect t he cam er a to y o ur com pu ter .
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 1 NO TE If your comput er is r unning Windo w s XP , wh en yo u connect the ca mer a to y our computer in the ne xt step , a di al og bo x ma y disp l a y th at r equ es ts y ou to Select the pr og r a m to lau nch for th i s act ion . Si mply click on Ca ncel t o cl o se th is di al og bo x . 4 Connect the c amer a to y our computer b y u sing the USB cable or an optional HP 8881 cam er a dock (if you u se the do c k , pr ess the Sav e/Pr int button on the do ck after pu tting th e ca mer a in th e d ock ) . T his ac ti v a t es t h e C amer a Shar e Men u Se tup W i z ar d on y ou r com pu t e r . 5 In t he f irs t w ind o w o f the W i z ar d t ha t a p pe ar s o n y our com pu ter , clic k on eithe r Re t rieve fro m C a m e ra on a Wi n dow s c om pu t e r , o r Ne xt on a Macintosh computer . 6 In the scr een call ed Modify S har e Men u : ⢠On Windo ws, check to se e th at HP Ins ta n t Shar e E- m a i l is v is ibl e abov e th e Ad d ... button, t hen c lick on the Ad d ... butt on . If t his is the f ir s t time y ou ar e add ing desti nat ion s to the Sha r e menu , yo u will be asked to sign i n t o t h e H P P a s s p o r t p r o g r a m . H P Pa s s p o r t a l l o w s y o u t o c r e a te a s ec ur e accou nt f o r th e ima ge s y ou shar e usin g HP I nst ant Sha r e serv i ce s . T h e f irs t time y ou s ee this scr een , yo u will nee d to r egi ster as a new u ser . F ollow the in struct ions on the screen to regi ster . ⢠On M aci nto sh, cl ick on th e Ad d ... bu t ton , add the e -m ai l addresses or w ebsi tes th at you w ant , an d the n sk ip to step 7 .
7 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l 7 Onc e you ar e s uc cess ful ly registered , s ign in to H P P asspor t , and t hen the HP Inst an t Sh ar e E -mail Se tup scr e en will appea r . Here y ou ca n eith er enter i ndivi du al e- mai l addresses or create g r oup dis t r ibut ion l ist s, a nd sp e cify how y ou wa nt th em to appe ar in th e c am era âs Sha r e menu . Y ou can als o e n te r a s ub jec t an d a t e x t me s s age t o go w ith all e-m ail s t ha t w ill b e se n t t o ea c h e-ma il ad dr ess o r distr ibu tio n lis t . A ft er com ple ting the f or m , c lic k Nex t . In the conf ir mati on s c r een th at a ppear s , c lic k Fi n i s h . 8 The nam es you spe cif ied for yo ur ne wly adde d e- mai l desti nation s or gr ou p dist ribution list s sh ould now appea r in the Modify Sh ar e Men u sc r een (i n the Cu rr e nt S h a re M enu sect ion) . T o add add it ional e- mail add resses or dis t r ibution lis t s to the cam e r a Shar e menu , r epeat steps 4 - 6 on W indow s, or steps 4 - 5 on Macintosh. If y ou ar e using a W indo w s computer , y ou w ill not need to sig n in to th e HP P assp ort pr ogram agai n. NO TE Y ou can conf i gur e a ma x im um o f 34 HP Inst an t Shar e desti nat ion s (such as indivi dua l e - mail add resses or gr oup dis t r ibut ion list s ) that can be l i ste d in the Sha r e menu on yo u r c a me ra. 9 Select a n y othe r HP Ins t an t Sh ar e desti nat ions that you would like to add to your c am era â s Shar e menu fr om th e Mo di f y Sh ar e M enu scr een . Complete the f orms fo r those other desti nat ions. After co mplet in g ea ch for m, click Ne xt . In the c onfirmation scr een th at app ea rs, click Fi n i s h . 10 When y ou hav e f inished adding HP I nst an t S har e desti nat ion s, click on ei ther Sav e to Camera on a Windo w s com pu ter o r Ne xt on a M acin tosh computer . T he new desti nat ion s a r e then saved to the c a mer aâs Shar e men u . When the computer conf irms the y hav e be en sa ved to y o u r camer a , disconne ct the camer a f r om the com p ut er .
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 3 Usin g t h e Sh are M en u Once y ou hav e set up t he Shar e menu on the c amera (se e page 7 0 ) , yo u can no w us e the Shar e menu . When you pr ess the Shar e button on the ca mer a , the most r ecently ta k en or v ie w ed image app ea rs on t he I mag e D isp lay . The Shar e menu also di sp lay s on the right side of the scr een. T he following table de s c r ibes ea c h o f t he Sha r e me n u opt i ons as sh o wn in the fol l o win g exa m p l e Sha r e scr een . # Icon Des cr ipt i on 1 Ch eck ma r k indicates thes e d es tinations hav e been se lected for the cur re ntl y display e d image . (Y ou ca n se lect mor e than one destinati on per image .) 2 E -ma il destinati ons t hat we r e set u p in this e xample Shar e men u . 3 A w ebsite destinati o n that w as s et u p . Other types o f destinati ons ma y hav e d iffer ent icons . 4 Cus tom i z e this m enu ... l e t s y o u a d d m o re e - m a i l a nd othe r HP Ins t an t Sh ar e destinations t o t he Shar e men u . (See Se tting Up the Shar e M enu on the Cam er a on page 7 0. ) 1 2 3 4
7 4 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Sel e c t in g Im a g es f or HP Ins tan t Sh are D esti n a tions NO TE Y ou can selec t each still imag e fo r an y numb er of HP In stan t S har e desti nat ion s. How e v er , you ca nnot s elec t v ide o c lips f or an y HP I nsta nt Sh ar e dest in ation s. 1 T u rn on the c amera , and t hen p r es s the Sha r e button. 2 U se the bu tton s to sc r oll to a s till im age f o r w hi ch y o u wan t to s e l e ct a n HP In st an t Shar e des tina ti on . 3 Use t he butt ons to s cr o ll to the des t in ation th at you want to sele ct in the Shar e men u f or t his im age , suc h a s an e-mail destina ti on . 4 Pr ess the OK but ton to s ele ct th e d esti nat ion, a nd a appea rs ov er that des t inat ion i n th e Shar e men u . T o un- sele ct th e desti nat ion, pr ess th e OK but ton agai n. 5 R epe at steps 3 an d 4 to sele ct any other HP In st an t Sh ar e de stina ti ons f o r this im age . 6 S c r oll t o ot h er im age s b y u sing t he b u tto ns , and r epea t steps 3 thr ou gh 5 to s elect HP I nst an t S har e de s tina ti ons f or each of th e other images. Y ou c an al so use t he button s to scroll to oth er i mag e s to r e vie w th eir de sti n atio ns. 7 W he n y o u ar e f i nis hed s e le cti n g a ll of t h e HP In stan t Sh ar e desti nat ion s for y our images, pr ess the Shar e button aga in to ex it the Sh a r e menu . 8 Conne ct the ca mer a t o y our co mp u ter a nd unload th e ima ges as e x plain ed in Unlo ad in g I mag es to a Computer on p age 77. On ce t he im ag es ar e un l oad e d t o y our com pu te r , the y w ill be a u t oma ti call y sent to t h e ir r es pecti ve HP I nst ant Sha r e desti nat ion s.
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 5 Ho w HP I nst ant S ha re E- m a il s I m a g e s Th e wa y images are e- ma iled v ia HP I n stan t S har e wo rk s dif fer ently on Windo w s and M ac i ntosh computers . Wi nd ows Im ages a r e not e -ma iled as attachmen ts. R athe r , a message is sent to each e -mail addr ess that yo u selected in the Sha r e men u . T h e me s s age co n tai n s thumbnai l images of the pi ctur es you selected f or that addr ess , as w ell as a link t o a we b page wher e t he r ec ip ien t can vi e w the images. F rom that w eb page , the r ec ip ient can do th ings lik e r e pl y to y ou , pr int the images, sav e images t o the ir comput er , f or war d images, and mor e . This make s it eas y f or people w ho u s e di ff e r en t e- mai l pr og r a ms to be ab le t o se e y o ur images with out the diffi c ulty of dea ling with e-mail attachments . Ma c i n t o s h Images ar e e -maile d dir ectl y t o r e c ipien ts u sing the def ault e-mail pr o gr am on your compu ter . Y ou must hav e an activ e Inte rn et e -mail ac count that is accessible when e -mailing an y images that y ou selected f or HP I ns ta nt Shar e e -mail destinati ons.
7 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 77 C hapte r 5 : Unlo adi ng , P rinti ng, and Disp l a y ing I m ag es Unlo ad in g Im a g es to a Co mput er NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠T he HP Pho to & Imaging so ftwar e is install ed on yo ur com pu ter (see Inst alling t he S o ft w ar e on page 2 0). ⢠If you are usin g a Ma cinto sh computer , th e ca mera âs USB C o n figu rat ion is s e t to Dis k Dr i v e in the Setu p me nu (see USB C o nfigu rat ion on page 8 8.) 2 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 3 Y our camer a came wit h a special US B c able for connecting t he came r a to a co m p u te r . Co nn ect t he la r ge r end of th at USB cable to th e com pu ter . 4 Ope n the ru bber door on the si de o f t he came r a an d conne ct th e smal l end o f the U SB ca b l e to t he U SB connect or on t he cam er a. MF
7 8 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l NO TE If your comput er is r unning Windo w s XP , wh en yo u turn on the ca mer a in the ne xt step , a dialog box w il l dis play tha t reques t s y ou to Sele ct the progr am to launch for th i s a ct ion . Si mply click on Cance l to close th is dia l og box . 5 T u rn on the cam era . T he HP Im age Unlo ad soft war e will launch on y our comput er . If y ou ha ve set the soft war e t o aut om atical ly unload the i mages in the c ame r a , the im ages w ill a ut om ati call y u nload t o the comp u te r . Otherw ise , in the We l c o m e scr een , clic k Sta rt U n lo ad . The i ma ges a r e unload ed to the computer , and then if there ar e an y st ill imag es th at wer e pr e v iou sly selecte d for pr inti ng (p age 60 ) or selected f or HP I nst an t Sh ar e de st in ations (p age 6 9), those actions ar e started. 6 When the unlo ad scr een on the c omputer say s Fi n i s h e d , y ou can dis connect t he camer a fr om t he com put er . NO TE T o un load image s to a W indo ws Me , 20 00, or XP computer that does not hav e the HP P hoto & Imag in g soft ware instal le d on it , ch ange the US B C on f igura tio n se tting to Disk Dr i v e in the Setup me nu . (see USB Con figu r atio n on pa ge 8 8). T h is all o ws th e ca me r a t o appe ar as an other d is k d r i ve on th e computer so that yo u can eas ily cop y the ima ge f il es f r om t he camer a t o t he ha r d dr i v e o f y o ur co m pu ter . Ho w e v e r , th e HP Ins t a nt Shar e feature w ill only w or k when the H P soft war e is installe d on your comput er . NO TE Ano the r w a y to unload im age s is to use a memo ry car d reader or one of the memor y c ard slots available in HP Photos mar t printers. Se e the manual for your printer for in structions on how to do t hi s.
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 7 9 Printin g Ima ges Direc tly fr om the Camer a NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. Y ou can connect t he cam er a dir ectl y to an y H P Phot o smart pr in ter o r t o a n y ot h er HP p r inte r w ith a f r on t panel U SB po rt , then either pr int al l ima ges in the c ame r a , or just those im ages yo u h a ve s e l e c t e d us i n g t h e c am e ra Pr int b utton (see Selecting Ima ges f o r Prin ting on p ag e 60 ) . 1 Ch ec k th at the p r inter is tur ned on an d is co nnect ed t o the com pute r . T he r e sho u ld be n o b linkin g l i gh ts on th e p r inte r or err or mess ages di s play ed about th e pr inter . Load p aper in to the p r inter , if needed . 2 Y our camer a came wit h a special US B c able for connecting the camer a dir ectl y to a pr i nter . Connect the squar e end of th e USB cab le to the printe r . 3 Ope n the ru bber door on the si de o f th e came r a and co nn ec t the s mal l en d of th e USB cab le to th e US B c on n ec tor on th e camer a. MF
80 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l 4 When the c amera is connected to the printe r , a Pr int Se tup me n u di sp l a y s on t h e c am er a . If y ou already sel ecte d i mag es to pr int us i n g t h e c a m e ra Pr in t butto n , the numb er of images sele cted is sh o w n . Othe r w ise , Ima ges : A LL is dis play ed . T o selec t or c ha nge t he sele ctions of i mages to pr int , pr ess th e Pr in t b u t to n, s cro l l t h ro u g h t h e i ma ge s u s i n g the but t ons, th en use th e bu t ton s to ad just the number of copies f or each im age , and when satis fied w ith yo u r s e l e c t io n s, p re s s t h e Pr in t bu tt o n a ga i n to return to th e Pr int Setu p menu . 5 If al l the se tt i ngs i n th e P r in t Setu p me n u loo k cor r ec t , p r es s OK on the camer a to beg in pr intin g . Or , yo u can chan ge se ttings in the Pr in t Se tup me nu us ing the ar r o w k e y s on the cam er a , then follo w in structions on the scr een to be gin pr inti ng. NO TE Th er e is a p r in t pr ev i e w in t he l o w er r i gh t-han d co r n er of t h e P r in t Setup scr een sho w ing the pa ge la y out that w ill be used for pr in ti ng i mages. T h is print pr e v ie w upda tes as y ou ch a ng e th e set t i ng s for th e Pr in t Si ze an d P aper S i z e .
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 8 1 Display ing Im ages on a TV Im age s in y our came r a can ea sil y be dis pl a ye d as a s li de sho w on almost an y tele v ision . NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. 1 T o connect the cam er a dir ectly to a T V , y o u need an A/V ( Audio/Video ) cable. The A /V cable i s i nclud ed i n th e HP 8881 c a mer a do ck kit, or may be pu r chased sep ar ately (se e Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra A c c e ss o ri e s on pa ge 12 6) . 2 Y our cam er a w ill se n d e ithe r an N T S C o r P AL v id eo si g nal to a T V . The NTS C f ormat is used pr imarily in Nort h Am e r ica an d Jap an , while the P AL fo r m at is used pr imar ily in E u r o pe . T his se tting is m ade f or y ou w he n y ou set t he lan gua ge o f t he came r a. T o c hec k t h e c u r r en t se tting or change th e video sig n al format , go to th e T V Con figu ration se tting in the Setup men u . See T V C on figuration on page 89. 3 Y our came r a w i ll be t he s o ur ce f o r the TV si gn al (j u s t li k e a V CR o r a camco r der ), so y ou m u st set th e TV t o tak e v i de o in pu t f r om an e xte r n al v i d e o sou r ce (y o ur came r a) inst ea d of the antenna or cable T V . Ref er to the T V user âs manual for direct ions on how to do th i s.
8 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l 4 T u rn on the c amera , then connect t he A/V ca bl e t o the A/ V i nput s on th e T V a nd to the T V co nne cto r o n your camer a. T yp i call y , th e y ello w connect or o n th e cab le should hook up to the Video in pu t on y o ur TV , and the r e d connector should hook up t o t he A u di o inpu t . T h e came r a st ar ts a sli d e sho w of eac h im ag e , pla yin g an y att ac he d a ud i o c lip o r v i deo clip , an d then sw itch i ng to th e next ima ge. Y ou can a ls o m anu al ly scr oll thr ough the i mages b y pr es sing the buttons. Wh ile v ie w ing the im ages on th e TV , y ou ca n also u se t he Pr in t bu tton t o sele ct spec if i c images th at y ou w ant to pr in t o ut later . NO TE The Image Disp lay on t he ca mer a tu r ns off when the camer a is connect ed t o a TV . Ho w e v er , y o u can s till u se the Pl ay b ac k and Shar e menu s while c onnecte d to the T V , sin ce t h e me n u s wi ll d i spl a y on t he T V sc r een . MF
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 3 C hapte r 6 : U sing th e Setup Me nu The Setup me nu all o ws y ou t o ad j u st a n umb e r o f cam er a se tting s , such as t he cam er a so un ds , dat e an d time , an d the co nfigu ration of the USB or T V c on n e ct ion. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup menu , open either the Capt ur e menu (pag e 40) o r t he Playb ack m enu ( p age 6 1) a nd then select the Se tu p menu option. 2 U se the bu ttons t o scr oll thr o u gh th e Set u p menu options. 3 E ither pr ess the OK butt on t o sel ec t a hi ghli g h ted o p tio n an d dis pl a y its su b-men u , o r u se th e b utto ns to change the se tting for the highlig hted op tion withou t going to its sub- me nu . 4 W it hin a sub -menu , use the bu t tons an d then the OK but ton to ch a ng e th e set t i ng for the Se t u p menu option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup men u an d r etur n to t he Capture menu or Pl ay b ac k menu , highl ight the EXIT SETU P ME NU opt ion and pr ess th e OK bu tto n . Sc r een o ne Scr een t wo
84 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Camer a So und s Ca me r a so u nd s ar e t he s ou nds th at the came r a m ak es w h en y ou tur n it on , pr es s a bu tto n , or tak e a pi c tu r e. C am er a so un ds ar e n ot th e audio s ou nds r e corded with i m ages or video cl ips. 1 In the Se tu p me n u (pa ge 8 3) , sel ec t Ca m era S o u n d s . 2 In the Ca mer a Sou nds su b-me n u , high light th e v olume lev el y ou w ould pref er . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . The de faul t Ca mer a Sounds set ti n g is Lo w . NO TE The volume le vel of camer a sou nds is not af fected b y t he a udi o le v e l ad j u stme n t p r o vi d e d w ith the Pl ay men u option in the Pl ayb a c k menu . Eye S t a r t B y defa ult, the microdispl ay w il l turn o n whenev er you put y our e y e up to th e vi ewf inder . I f you turn the Ey e St art se nsor Off , the micr odi splay will be on whenev er the Imag e Di spl ay is of f (use the Li ve Vi ew bu tt on t o t og gl e be tw ee n t h e tw o). 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Eye Sta r t . 2 In the Ey e St art sub-m enu , hig hligh t On (the d ef ault) or Off . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . NO TE In the int er est of cons er v ing bat ter y p o w er , H P r ec omm ends leaving Eye Sta r t on .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 5 F o c us As sis t Light Som etime s in l o w-li gh t situa ti ons , th e camer a w ill u s e th e r ed f oc u s assist li gh t on the f r ont o f the camer a to ai d in f oc u sing . T his se tting all o w s y ou to tur n of f this li gh t (f or e x amp l e w hen y ou do not w ant th e foc us assi st l ight to di st r act th e s ubject of y our pictur e) . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct F o c u s A ssist . 2 In the F o c u s Assist su b-m en u , hig hligh t Au t o or Of f . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Set u p menu . NO TE HP r e commend s lea v ing this se tting at Aut o , s ince turning it off hinder s the a bil it y of the c a m e ra t o fo cus c o rre ct ly i n l o w l ig ht. LC D B r i g h t n e s s This set t ing l ets you ad j ust th e br ightn ess of t he Imag e Dis play . B y de f a ult , the I mag e Dis pla y is optimi z e d f o r in door u se . Y ou can use th i s set t in g to in cr ease the br ight ness an d con trast f or bet ter outdoor vie w ing . NO TE If y ou u s e t h e Outdoor sett in g , the image may appea r o ve r e xpo s ed w h en v ie w ing it o n t he came r a indo or s . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct LC D B r i g h t n e s s . 2 In the LC D B ri g h t n e s s sub-m enu , sele ct Ind oor or Out door . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Set u p menu .
8 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Instant Re v ie w After a pictur e or v ideo cl i p is captu red , the i mag e appe a rs f or sev e r al se c onds i n th e act iv e di splay . T his set ti ng al lows y ou to se l ec t ho w l on g a n im ag e w ill be dis p la y ed a ft er a p ic tur e is tak en or v i de o cl ip r ecor ded . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct In stant Re v ie w . 2 In the Ins tan t R e v i e w sub-m enu , h ig h lig ht o n e of the fou r ch oic e s av ail able. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . Au to P o w er Of f T his se tting allo ws y ou t o dec i d e w he n (or if ) t he came r a w il l au toma ti ca ll y po w er itse lf of f a fte r a pe r io d o f ina cti vity t o cons erv e po w er . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Au t o P owe r O f f . 2 In the Aut o P ower O f f sub-m enu , h ig h lig ht o n e of the fou r ch oic e s av ail able. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . R e g ar dles s o f w hat se ttin g y ou c h oo s e , th e c ame r a w ill ha v e a â s le ep t i m eou tâ af ter 6 0 se co nd s ( b oth the micr od isp lay an d Image D ispl ay turn off) . When the camera is in the â s leepâ state , press ing any but ton will wake th e c a mer a up a gain. The time s sel ec te d in this sub -me n u inc l ude the sl eep time o ut .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 7 D ate & Time T his s ettin g allo ws y ou to se t the current date and time, as well as th e da te/ time f orma t, f or the cam era . This is usu all y do ne when you f irst set up the cam era; however, you may need to re-set the date and time when you ar e trav el lin g to d iff eren t time zones, or if the date and tim e is in correct. 1 In the Se tu p me n u (pa ge 8 3) , sel ec t Da te & Tim e . 2 In the Date & T ime su b- me n u , adju st the value of the highlighted sele ction by using the buttons. 3 Press th e b ut to ns to move to the o t her s e lec tio ns . 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 unt il the corr ect dat e , ti m e , and dat e/t im e for mat are set . 5 Pr ess OK to s av e the s e tting a nd r etur n t o the Setup menu .
88 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l USB Confi guration T his se tting determines how t he camera is re cognized when connected to a compu ter. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct US B Con f igurat ion . 2 In the US B C on figu r atio n sub-menu , highlight one of choices av ai lable : ⢠Digital Camer a âCau ses t he computer to recogn ize the camera as a digital camera using the Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) standard. T his is the default settin g on the camera. ⢠Disk Dri v e â Causes the compu ter to recognize the c amera as a disk drive using the Mass Storage Device Class (MSDC) standard. Use thi s table as a gu ide f or wh ich USB Configur ation se tting to u se w it h y our com p ut er : 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu . HP Photo & Imag ing soft war e: Win dows Maci nt osh Insta l led o n your computer Di gital C amer a Dis k Dr i v e Not install ed on yo ur com put er Disk Dr i ve Di gital C amer a (OSX sy stems)
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 9 T V C onfi gura tion Thi s set t in g a llows you to set the f ormat of the video s igna l for dis play i ng ca mer a i mages on a tel e v is ion ( T V) that is conne ct ed t o the came r a w ith a n o pti o nal A udi o /V i de o cabl e or HP 8881 camer a dock . The de f a ult setting de pe n ds on the lan gua ge tha t y o u sele ct ed w he n y ou po w er e d o n the ca mer a f or t he f ir s t time . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct T V C on figurat ion . 2 In the T V Co n figu r atio n sub -men u , hig hli gh t one of the se tw o cho i ce s: ⢠NT S C âF or ma t u sed pr imar ily in Nor th Amer ica and J apa n ⢠PA L âF or mat us ed pr imar ily in Eu r op e 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu . F or mo r e inf or m ati on on co nnecting the came r a t o a T V , see ei t he r Displ a y i ng Ima ge s on a TV on page 81 when usi ng the optional Audio/ V ideo cable, or Dis pl a y ing Im ag es o n a TV Us in g the D o ck on page 134 w hen u sing the HP 8 881 camer a dock.
90 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l La n g u a g e T his se tting allo ws y o u t o set the language used in t he ca mera interface, su ch as the text in m enus. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct La ng ua ge . 2 In the Lan g uage sub -m enu , high light the lan guage you w ant to us e . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . Re m em b e red S et t i n g s This set t ing a ll o w s y ou to save som e c am er a s et ti ngs that wo uld n or m all y r es et to the ir de f a ult v a lue s whe n th e came r a is tu r ned of f . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Re m em b ere d S e t t i n gs . 2 In the R emembe r ed Settings su b- me n u , u se t he bu tt o ns to highlight a set t i ng , then use the buttons to ch eck or uncheck a sele ction. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s etting s an d r etur n t o th e Setup menu . NO TE Th e s ave d se t ti n g fo r Fl a s h is tem por aril y ignor ed if the camer a is in Vi deo mode or the f la sh is dow n . NO TE An y Captur e menu item tha t is not in this scr een a l re a dy rem a i n s s e t to w h at eve r yo u se l e c t e d w h e n t h e came r a is turn ed of f and then bac k on .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 91 Re s e t S et ti n g s T his op tio n all o w s y ou to r ese t th e camer a to th e f a cto ry def a ult sett in gs. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Re se t S ettings . 2 In the Re s e t S e t t i n gs su b-me n u , hi g hli gh t o ne o f t he f o ll o win g: ⢠Cance l - exit s the m enu wi tho ut maki ng a n y changes. ⢠All Capt ur e S ett i ngs - r ese ts Fla s h , Fo c u s , Ti m er/ B u rs t , and Captu r e m e nu s e t t i ng s to fa c t o r y d e fau l t s. I f t h e fla s h is d o w n o r the came r a is in V i de o mod e , t he Fl a s h set ti ng wi l l b e AU TO F L A S H the n e xt t ime the flash is av ai lable. Setting s that w e r e ch eck ed in the Remembered Setti n gs su b- me n u w i ll st a y che c k ed . ⢠Re se t Al l S e t t i ng s - r eset s all c aptur e set ti ngs as describe d abov e, plus all set tings i n the Setup men u e x ce p t Dat e & Ti me , Lang u ag e , T V Con figu ration , an d USB Con figu r atio n . A ll s e tting s th at w er e ch ec k ed in the R ememb er ed Set t in gs su b-me n u w il l be un ch ec k ed . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu .
9 2 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 3 C hapte r 7 : T roub l esho otin g and Suppo rt This chapter conta in s information on th e f ollowing topics: z R es e tting the camer a . z P ossi ble pr oblems, c auses, and sol utions. z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t h e c am e ra. z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t h e c om p u t e r . z Self -d i agno s tic te s ts on the camer a . z How to g et assi sta nce fr om HP . R e s e tt i n g th e Ca me r a I f yo u r c a m e ra do e s n o t re s p o n d w h en y ou p r ess an y bu t to ns , y o u can try r e setting t he camer a in the f ollo win g w a y : 1 Ope n the bat tery door on the bot tom of the cam er a and re m ov e a l l fo u r b a t te rie s . 2 Le av e the batt er ies ou t of th e came r a f or at le as t 10 min ut es . 3 Re inser t the ba tter ies a nd close the bat ter y door . 4 T u rn the c a m e ra b ack on. Y ou wil l p rob ab ly b e p rom p te d t o se t t he da t e an d tim e ag ain .
94 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Proble ms an d So lu tions Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion Th e c am era does not turn on . The batter i es ar e f unc ti oning incor r ectly , are dead , are install ed incor r ectly , or ar e missing . z T he c har ge in t he batte r ies could be lo w or comple t el y dr ained . T r y inst allin g ne w o r r ec har ge d batt er i es . z Ensur e that th e batte r i es ar e in se r t ed co r r ectl y (pa ge 16). z Do no t u se or dinar y alk alin e bat ter ies . F or best results, use pho to-lithium batter i es or r echar ge able NiMH batter ies. If y ou m us t u se alk ali ne ba tter i e s, u s e h ig h - g ra d e âu l t raâ o r â pre m i u mâ va ri e t ie s. If you ar e u s ing th e H P AC pow er ada pter , it is not connected t o th e c a m e ra , o r is not plugged int o a pow er outlet . Ensu r e t ha t the HP A C p o w e r adapter is connect ed to t he cam er a and is pl ugged into a w or king electr i cal outlet . Th e H P A C pow er adapt er is not fu n ct ion in g cor r e ctl y . Ensu r e t ha t the HP A C p o w e r adapter is not damage d or de f ec ti v e and i s pl ugge d in to a w or king electr i cal outlet . Th e c a m er a has st opped oper ating . R es et th e cam er a b y r e mo v ing t he batter i es and then r e- inserting them (page 9 3) .
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 5 Th e mi cr odi s p l a y in the view fi nd e r does not turn on when I put my eye up to it . Th e Eye Star t sens or cannot detect that y ou ar e lookin g th roug h t he view fi nd e r (sometim es occur s w hen we a ri n g glasses) Tu r n t h e Ey e Sta r t sensor to Off in th e Setup men u (p age 84). T he n , eith er the Ima ge Display or the mic r o displa y w ill al w a y s be on (toggle back and f orth bet w een them by pr essing the Live View button). Th e Eye Star t sens or has been tu r ned of f . z Pr ess the Live V i ew bu tton to manu all y tur n on the mic r odispl a y . z Tu r n t h e Eye Star t sen sor to On in t he Setup menu (page 84) Th e P o wer / Me m ory l i gh t blinks as if the bat ter i es ar e be i n g re c h arg e d, but ther e are no batter i es installed . Th e c a m er a does not re c o g n i ze t h a t ther e ar e n o bat ter ies install ed. Do not hing . T h e blinking is har mless and s hould stop af te r 5-30 minu te s . T he b attery gauge goes up and down fre q u e n tly . Di ffer en t oper ating modes o f th e cam er a r equir e differ e nt po wer lev el s. See Batte ry Gaug e on page 122 f or a f ull e xplanati on. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
9 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l I re place the camera batter ies fre q u e n tly . Extend ed Image D isplay use for Li ve View or vi deo re c o r d i n g, e x cessi v e f l ash use, a nd e x cessi v e zo o m i n g consum e a lot of b a t ter y pow er . z U se the mi cr odispl a y inst ead o f the Image Display whene v er pos sible , espec i all y if using alk aline batt er ies . z Use the zoom only when ne ces sa r y . z Us e AU T O F L A S H instead o f FL AS H ON . z U se an HP A C po w er adapt e r to pow er the c a mera when you a r e us ing th e Image Displa y f o r an e x tended per iod of time . Cam er a do es no t wo rk we l l wi t h reg u la r alkalin e bat ter ies. Do not u se or dinary alk aline batter ies . F or best r e sults, us e phot o -lithium batter i es or r ec har gea b le NiMH ba tt er i e s . If y ou mu st us e a lk aline b atter ies, use hi gh-gr ade â u ltr a â or â pr emium â v ar iet i es (page 121). Th e Ni M H batter i es y ou ar e u sing w er e r e char ged incor r ectly . Wh en N iM H bat t er ies ar e b r and new or ha ve no t b e en use d in s e v e r al mon ths , th e y wi ll no t r e ach optim um capac ity until the y h a v e bee n c h ar ge d an d th e n dischar ge d (u sed) c omple tel y 4 -5 times (p age 12 4). NiMH bat ter i es ha v e dr ained on the ir o wn because the y ha v e no t been use d l ately NiMH batteri es disc har ge on their o wn when not in use and when not install ed in the camer a . So if y ou hav e not u sed them in a w eek o r mo r e , th e y ma y ben e f i t f r o m being char ged ( p age 1 2 4 ) Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 7 Th e c am era batter ies w ill not char ge . Re char geable bat ter ies ar e not i n ser t ed. Install N iM H batter i es . L ithium an d alk ali ne ba tt er i e s can n o t be r echa r g ed (page 121) . Batter i es ar e alr ead y ch arg e d. Battery char ging w ill no t s tart if the bat teries wer e r e ce ntly ch arg e d. T r y ch a rgi n g th e m again after the y hav e dr ained awh i le. Battery voltage is too l o w f o r ch arg in g to start . Th e camer a w ill no t attem pt to char ge batter i es that ma y be damaged or o v er -disc ha r ged . R emo v e t h e ba tte r i e s f r om th e cam er a and char ge them in an e xte rnal battery char ger , then tr y them in the cam er a agai n . If this does n ot wor k , it is li kely that one or mo r e o f the batter ies ar e bad . P ur c ha se new NiMH batter i es and tr y again. Th e wron g AC pow er adapt er is be ing use d . U s e onl y th e HP A C po w er adapter appr o ved f or u se w ith this camer a (page 12 7) . The batter i es ar e damaged or bad . NiMH batter i es degr ade ov er tim e an d can f ail . If the came r a de te ct s a pr ob le m w ith th e batter i es , it will not st art char ging or will stop char ging prematur ely . P ur cha se ne w batter i es . Batter i es ar e not i n ser t ed cor r e ctl y . Ensur e t hat the batter ies ar e inse rted corr ectly (page 1 6) . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
9 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Th e c am era does not re s p o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c a m er a is tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . Tu r n o n t h e c a m e r a . Th e c a m er a is connected t o a comp ute r . Most of the cam er a buttons do not r espond when the ca mer a is connected t o a comput er . If the y r espond , it is only to tu r n the Image Displa y on if it is o ff , o r , in some cases, tur n the Image Displa y off if it is on. The batter i es ar e dr ained . R eplace or r echar ge the b atter i es . Th e c a m er a has st opped oper ating . R es et th e cam er a b y r e mo v ing t he batter i es and then r e- inserting them (page 9 3) . A lon g d elay occurs be tw ee n pr essing t he Shutt er button an d t he camera taking a pict u r e. Th e c a m er a needs time t o lock f ocus and exp os u r e. Use F ocus Lo ck ( page 25.) The scene i s dark and t he cam er a is ta ki n g a lo ng exp os u r e. z Use the flash. z If u sin g f l ash is not poss ible , the n us e a tri pod to k eep the camer a stea dy during the lo ng expos ure time . z Make sur e th at the F oc u s Assist li ght is set t o Au to (page 85). Th e c a m er a is using a f lash setting w ith Red -eye Red uct io n. It w ill t ak e lon ger t o tak e a p ic tur e wi t h Re d - e ye Red uct io n . The shutte r is delay e d becaus e of t he additional flash . In turn , make sur e y our subj ects wait f or the se c o n d fla s h. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 99 Th e c am era does not take a p i ctur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Yo u d i d n o t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d en ough . Pr ess the Shutt er button all t he way d own. T he memory car d is not install ed. Inst all t he memory car d. T he memory car d is f ull . Unload images f r om the c amera to y our computer , t hen delete all images on the mem ory c ar d. Or r eplace th e card w it h a ne w o ne. T he memory car d is loc k ed . S witch th e lo ck i n g ta b on th e memory ca r d to the unlock e d position . Th e fla s h i s re c h a rg i n g . W ait until t he fl ash has r e char ge d bef or e taki ng another p ictur e. Th e c a m er a is set to MA CR O f o c u s an d can not tak e a p ictur e until it fi n d s fo cu s . z Re - focus th e c a m era (t r y usi n g F o cus L o ck , page 2 6 ). z Mak e sur e th e sub j ec t o f the pict u r e is w i th i n t h e M acro (close -up) r ang e (pa ge 36) . Th e c a m er a is still sav in g the last p i ctur e y ou t ook . W ait a f e w se co n d s f or t h e camer a to finish pr ocessing the las t image befor e tak ing another pictu r e. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
100 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual My image is blurry . The lig ht is low and the f lash is se t to FLASH O FF . In dim ligh t , t he camer a r e quir es a longer e x posur e . Use a tr ipod to h old the camer a steady , impr o v e li ghting con ditions , or se t the pop up the fl ash and set the fla s h to FL AS H O N (p ag e 3 2) . Th e c a m er a w as set to the wr ong focu s setting f or the scene . Set th e camer a t o MA CRO , NORMAL , o r INFINI TY focu s and try taking the p i ctur e again (p ag e 36. ) . Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a while y ou t ook th e pict u re. Hold the cam er a stead y as yo u pr ess the Shutt er bu tton or u se a tr ipod . W at c h f o r th e icon in the activ e display (this means that is almost impossible to hold steady , and you must u se a tr ipod). Th e c a m er a fo cus ed on th e wr ong thing , or w as unable t o fo cus . z Make sur e the f oc u s br ac k ets tur n gr een bef o r e taking the pi c t ur e ( page 25 ) . z Us e Fo c us Lo c k (pag e 2 5). z Us e fo cus s e arch prio rit y (page 3 7). Th e d io p ter contr ol is out of adju stment , making the image appe ar blur r y in the mic r odisplay . Ad just th e dio p te r co nt rol so tha t inf o rmati on o v erl a y s in the mic r o displa y ar e mo r e in f oc us (p age 19 ) . Thi s on ly a ffec ts t he focus o f th e m icrod isp l ay , n o t t he Image Di spla y . I t does not affect t he f oc u s of t h e ca ptu r ed im ag e . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 101 My image is to o brig ht. Th e fla s h pr ov i ded too much l ig ht. z T urn t he flas h off ( p ag e 3 2) . z Mo v e bac k f r om the sub jec t and us e t he z oom to g et t he s ame fram i n g . z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth e r th a n t he fl as h p ro vide d too much lig ht. z T r y ta k i ng th e pict u re from a differ ent angl e . z A vo id po in ting the cam er a d i re c t l y t o w a rd a br i g h t l i g h t o r r ef l ec t i ve su r f ac e on a sunn y day . z Dec r ea s e t h e EV C om pen sat i o n ( page 4 2 ) . The scene had man y dark obj ects, suc h as a black dog on a blac k couc h. Decr e ase the EV Compensa tion (p ag e 4 2) . Th e I m a g e Displa y is set f o r o ut doo r displa y , making im ages a p pe ar t oo br ight . Chang e the LC D B r i g h t n e s s in the Setu p men u t o Indoor set ting for m o re a c cu ra t e b rig ht n es s o n th e Image Displa y . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
10 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. z Wait for natural lighting conditions to improve. z Add indirect lighting . z Use the pop-u p flash (page 3 2) . z Adjus t t he EV C ompens ati on (page 42). z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . The f lash was on, bu t the subject w a s too fa r aw a y. z Make sure yo ur subj ect i s withi n the flash wor king distance (s ee Appe ndi x C: S pec if i c atio ns on page 13 5). If so, try using the FLA S H O F F setting (page 3 2) , whi c h will require a lo nger expo su re (use a tri pod ). z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . A light is behind the subject. z Use the FL ASH ON setting (page 32) to brighten the sub je ct. z Incr eas e th e EV Compe nsat ion (page 42). z Us e Dig it al Fla s h (page 48) . The scene had man y li gh t- color ed objects, such as a whit e dog in sno w . Incr ease t he EV Compensati on (se e pag e 4 2) . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 103 Th e T V do e s not displa y images when I co nnec t m y camera t o it . A u di o an d vi deo cables ar e s w itc hed T ry sw it chin g the audi o a nd vi deo cables on the b ack of the T V (the r e d and ye llo w connector s on the cable f r o m the cam er a or dock to th e T V) . Th e c a m er a is set to the w r ong TV f o r m a t . Chang e the TV C o n f i g u r at i o n se tting to the opposite o f what it is cu rren t ly s et ( p a g e 8 9 ) . T V is no t s et t o cor r e ct input mode . Check the TV user âs manual to set the T V to accept vid eo or in put mode . Th e w r on g date and/ or time is show n . T h e da t e an d/ or time w as set incor r ectly o r th e t i me z on e ha s changed . R es et the date and time b y u sing th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p men u ( pa g e 8 7). Th e c am era re s p o n d s v e r y sluggishly when tryin g to review images. A slo w memor y car d or too man y images on a ca r d can affect ac ti ons lik e scr olling th roug h images , magnifyin g , deleting , etc . z R un th e camer a s elf -di agn osti c test ( pag e 1 1 3 ) to tes t t he s pe e d of y our me mory c ard . z See t he sec ti on a b ou t St or ag e car d s on page 13 7 fo r tips abo ut m e mo r y c ar ds . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
104 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Err or Mess ag es on t he C am era M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on Batteri es depleted. Camera is shutting do wn . Batt ery po wer is too l o w t o contin ue oper ati on . Re place or r e char ge bat t e r ie s , o r u se a n optional HP A C p o w er adapter . Batteri es ar e def ectiv e One or mor e cells ar e shorted or severe ly ove rd i s c h arg e d. Pur chas e new ba tt eries. Batter ies cannot be char ged E ither a n err or o c c u rre d d u ri n g char ging , an A C po wer disru pti on o c c u rre d d u ri n g ch arg in g, t h e wro ng AC p o wer adapter is being used , batter i es ar e def ecti v e , o r no bat ter i es are install ed in th e cam er a. R etry charging the bat t er i e s a co u p l e o f tim e s . If t hat f a il s, p ur c h as e n ew batter i es and try again. UNSUP P ORTED CARD T h e c ar d in th e memory slot is not a m emor y ca r d or i s n ot a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e that th e memory c a rd i s t h e p ro p er t yp e for you r c a mera. ( S e e App endix C: Sp eci fica t ion s on page 13 5.) NO CAR D IN CAMER A T h e c ame r a do es not h ave a memory ca r d ins talled . Install a memory ca r d.
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 105 CARD I S UNF ORMA TTED Pr ess OK to fo rm a t ca r d T he memory car d needs to be f or matted. F ormat t he me mory car d (remo ve the ca r d fr om the camera if y ou do not wan t it to be f or m at ted) . CARD HA S WR ON G FO R M A T Pr ess OK to fo rm a t ca r d T he memory car d is f ormatted f or a d iffer ent de vi c e such as an MP3 pla yer . R e -f or mat t he me mory car d (r emo v e t h e car d fro m t h e c am e r a if y ou do not w ant it t o be r ef o rmatted). Una ble to F or mat Th e memory car d is c o rru pt e d. Re place the me mory c ard . CARD I S L OCKED Th e memory car d is loc k ed. S w it ch th e locking ta b on the memory car d to t he un loc k ed p ositi on. CARD FU L L There i s in s u f ficient r oo m to save m ore images o n the memory ca r d. Unload images fr om the camera t o y our comput er , then dele t e all images on the memory car d (page 6 5) . O r r epl ace the card wit h a n e w one . CARD I S UN R E AD ABL E The c am e ra i s havi ng t rouble r e ading the car d . T he memory ca r d ma y be c o rru pt e d o r a n unsupported ty p e . z T ry t u rn in g th e c a m era off and th en back on . z E n su re th at th e m e mo r y ca r d is the pr oper type fo r yo u r c a m era ( s ee page 13 7 ). If it is the pr o per type , try f orm atting it (see page 6 5 ). If it w ill n ot f or mat , it is pr o bab ly cor r u pt ed . R e place the memory car d. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
106 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual PRO C ESSIN G.. . The c am e ra i s pr ocess ing data , such as sav ing the last p ictur e y ou t ook . W a i t a f e w s e co n d s f or t he camera t o f inish pr o cessing befo r e t aking another p i ctur e o r pr essing another butto n . CHAR GING FLA SH The c am e ra i s re c h a rg i n g t h e fla s h . It take s lo nger to char ge th e f la sh w h en t he batter ie s ar e lo w and in dark scenes. If you see this m ess age a lot , y ou ma y need to r e place or recha r ge th e ba t teries. FO C US T O O F A R and blinking The focus distance is bey on d where th e c a m e ra c a n fo cus in MA CR O mode . z Set the camer a t o NOR MA L focus. z Move cl oser to the su b j ect ( w ithin t he r ang e of MA CRO focus - see pag e 3 6 ) . FO C US T O O CL O SE The focus distance is clo ser th an th e ca m e ra can f oc u s in MA CRO mode. M ov e f u rth er away fr o m th e s u b jec t ( w it hin th e ra ng e of MA CRO fo cus - see pag e 3 6 ) . Blinking The focus distance is clo ser th an th e ca m e ra can f oc us w ithout bein g in MA CRO mode. Set the ca mera to MA CR O fo cu s o r m o v e f arthe r a wa y . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 10 7 UNAB LE T O FO C US The c am e ra cannot f ind foc us in MA CR O mode , possibly due low contr ast . z Use F ocus Lo ck (page 2 5). P oint at a par t of the scene that is br ighte r . z M a ke su re th e c a m era i s wi th i n th e ran ge of MA CR O fo cus (page 3 6). LOW L I G H T - UNAB LE T O FO C US T h e s cen e i s t oo dar k and the camer a cannot fo cus . z Add an e xt er nal li gh t source . z Use F ocus Lo ck (page 2 5). P oint at a par t of the scene that is br ighte r . z Mak e sur e the F oc u s Ass ist light i s set to Auto (page 8 5). (cam er a shake wa rn in g ) The lig ht is low and the image is likely t o b e bl u rr y d u e to th e lon g ex po su re re q u i re d. Use the flash (page 3 2) , or use a tri po d . ERROR S A VIN G IM A GE Me m o ry c a r d was h al f- l ocke d or was rem oved bef or e the cam er a f inished w r iting t o t he car d . z C he ck to se e i f th e tab o n th e ed g e o f th e me m ory car d is full y in the unloc k ed po si ti on . z Al ways wai t u n t i l th e P o w er/ Mem ory li g h t r etu rn s to gr een bef or e re m o vi n g t h e c a rd f ro m the ca mer a. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
108 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual F -n u mbe r an d shutte r spee d turn re d i n Li ve V i ew The c am e ra i s out of r a n ge for the selected ap e rt u r e o r shutte r s peed. z Selec t a diff er ent ape r t ur e w he n us i ng t h e Ap ertu re Pri ority Av e xpos ur e m ode . z Selec t a diff e r e nt s h utt er spe ed when usin g Shutter Pr i or ity T v ex p o s u re mod e . Ca nnot disp la y image P ossibly a p i ctur e taken wi t h anothe r camer a or a c orrupt image f il e ca us ed b y t h e camer a not shutting do wn pr operl y . z T he i ma g e ma y sti l l be OK - dow nload th e image to y our compu te r and try opening it w ith the HP softwar e . z Do not r emo v e the memory car d when t he cam er a i s t ur ned on . Ca mera has e xper ienced an e rror T he camer a ma y have a f irmw a r e pr oblem. T urn the cam er a off and then on again . If that does not f ix the pr oblem , tr y r esetting t he cam er a (see pag e 9 3). I f th e p r o bl em p ers is ts , n ot e t h e e rror code and then call HP Support (s ee p age 114) . Unkno wn U SB de v ice The c am e ra i s connected t o a USB de vice that it does not re c o g n ize . M ake s u re th at th e c a m e ra is connected t o a support ed p r inter or computer . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 109 Una ble to commun i cate w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inter . z Chec k that th e pr in t er is tur ned on . z Ma k e s ure the cable i s con nect ed be t ween the pr inter and th e camer a or the optional H P 8881 camer a doc k . If th at does not wo r k , turn of f the camer a and disconnec t it . T ur n the pr in te r off and t hen on again . Re- co nne c t th e ca me r a an d tur n it on . Unsupported pr inter T he p r in ter is an unsupported de v i ce . Connec t the ca mer a to a supported pr inter , such as a n H P P hot osm ar t printer or anot her HP pr int e r wit h a f r on t panel USB port . Or connect t he camer a t o a computer and prin t f r om th e r e ins t ea d . Photo tr a y is engaged T h e s ele ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used w ith the pr inter phot o tr a y . Dis e ng ag e th e pr i n te r photo tr ay , or c hange th e pa pe r s i z e . Pr in ter top co v er is open T he p r in ter is open. Cl os e th e top c ove r of the pr in te r . Inc orr ec t o r missing print cartri d ge The print e r cartri dge is the incor r ect model or is missing. Install a ne w pr int er c a r t ridg e, t u rn t h e pri nt er off , then turn it back on . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
110 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Pr in ter has a paper jam or The pr int ca r r i age ha s stalled Th er e is a paper jam o r th e pr inter carr iage has st al le d. T ur n off the pr inter . Clear the paper j am, and then tu rn o n th e printer . Pr in ter is out of paper T he pr inter is o ut of paper . Load paper int o the pr in te r , and t hen pr ess the OK or Con ti n ue button on the pr inter . Selected pr int si z e is lar ger than selected pap er si z e. Pr in t si z e is too large for th e paper s i ze . Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Set u p scr een and select pr in t si z e that mat c hes paper si ze . Se l e ct e d pa per si z e is too bi g f o r pr inter . Se l e c t e d pa pe r si z e is larger th an th e max imum si z e supported in the pr inter . Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Set u p scr een and select a paper size tha t fits th e print er . Bor der less pr in ting is onl y supported on photo paper . Y ou tr i ed to pr int a bor derless pictu r e o n p la in paper . P u t phot o paper in the pr in te r , o r pr ess OK on the camera t o r eturn to the Pr int Setup scr een and select a sma ller pr in t si z e. Bor der less pr in ting is not supported on this pr inter . The print e r do es not support bor d er le ss pr inting. Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Se tup scr een and select a smaller pr in t si z e . Pr in ting ca ncelled T he pr in t job has been c ancele d. Pr ess the OK button on the camer a . Compl ete the pr in t r e quest again . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 111 Err or Mess a g es on th e Com p u ter M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on Connec ti on be tw een t he imaging d e v i ce and computer fa i le d The ca mera might be connecte d to a compute r through a USB hub. Try conne cting the camera directly to the comp uter, or disconne ct other dev ices a ttache d to the USB hu b. Th e s of t wa re cannot r e tr ie v e the Shar e Menu i n fo rma t io n fro m you r c a mera The c omp u ter n eeds t o w r ite f iles to the memory ca r d dur ing HP Inst ant Shar e setup , but the memory car d is e ither missing , f ull , or loc k e d . E ith er ins tall a memory ca rd , m ake r oom on the memo r y car d , o r unl oc k it b y sw itching the loc king tab on the car d to the un loc k ed p ositi on. Compu ter cannot fi nd t h e connected camera The c am e ra i s tur ned off . T u rn on th e c a m era. The c am e ra i s not workin g cor r ectly . T ry connecting the c a m e ra d ire ct ly t o a n HP Phot osmart pr in ter or an H P pr inter w ith a f r on t pan e l U SB po rt , an d pr in t an ima ge . T his will v er ify that the image , memo ry ca r d , USB co nn ec t i on , an d t h e US B ca b l e ar e f un c t i o ni ng c o rre ct ly . The c abl e is no t connected cor r ectly . M ak e su r e that the cable is f ir mly connect ed to t he computer and ca mer a.
112 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Compu ter cannot fi nd t h e connected camera (con tinu ed) The ca mera is set to the Digital Cam er a setting in the USB Co n figu rat ion sub-menu of the Setu p m en u , b ut the com puter cannot re cog niz e th e cam era as a digital ca mera. Chang e t he US B Co n fig u ratio n set ting to Disk Dri v e in the Se t u p m enu . (page 8 8.) This al lo w s t h e ca me r a t o appear as another disk dr iv e on the c omputer so that y ou ca n ea sily cop y the image f iles fr om the ca me ra to th e h a rd d ri ve of y our comput er . The c am e ra i s connected to t he comput er th roug h a US B h u b , an d yo ur USB hub is no t compatible w ith th e c a m e ra . Connec t t he camer a dir ec tl y t o a U S B po r t on the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g t he HP 88 81 cam er a dock and f or got t o pr ess the Sa v e/ Pr in t bu tton . Pr ess t he Sa ve/P r i n t button on the camer a dock . T he memory car d is loc k ed. S w it ch th e locking ta b on the memory car d to t he un loc k ed p ositi on. The USB connection fa ile d. Reb oot the compute r. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 113 Ca mera Self-dia gnos tic T es ts If you think your cam er a ma y be d e fecti v e or ma l f unctio ning in some wa y , there is a diagnostic pr ogra m (a set of ele v en diff e r ent t ests ) t ha t y o u can r u n on t he came r a to try to de t e r mi n e t he p r ob l em . T h e f o ll o w ing t hin g s ar e te s t ed o n t h e ca mer a; F la sh , LEDs (l i gh ts), Bu tt ons , L i ve V ie w , L CD C ol o r , M i c r odis pl a y , Au di o P la yba c k , R eco r d Au di o , Mem o ry Car d , and S D R AM . NO TE Th e t est is in English o nl y . 1 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 2 Hold i n the Fl a s h butt on on the ba c k o f the c a m era . 3 T ur n o n th e came r a w hi l e co n t in ui n g t o pr ess on the Fl as h button . Y ou should see a bl ue scr een ti tl ed CAMERA SELF - DIA GNO S TIC S ap pea r o n the Im ag e Disp la y . 4 F ol low the si mple in struct ions on the Ima ge Di sp lay to per form the s et of test s. S om e t est s will tel l you i f the c a me r a passe d or fail ed, whi le oth er t ests wi ll m ake the c am er a do somethi ng, and y ou mu st che ck to se e if the c a mer a did it cor r ectl y . If an y o f th e t e s ts f ail , no t e wh i c h o ne (s), so t ha t y o u can pr o v ide t his inf or m ati on w hen y o u con t act H P Su ppo rt . The entir e set o f tes ts tak es onl y a f e w minute s t o com ple te . 5 T o e x it the d iag nostic pr og r am at a n y point , si mply turn of f the c a m era . MF
114 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Get tin g A ssistan ce T his s ect io n cont ains su pport inf o r ma ti o n fo r y o ur di git al camer a , inc lu ding sup po rt w eb sit e in f o r mati on , an e xplan at i on of the support pr oces s , and support phone n umb ers . HP Acces sib ilit y W e bsite C u s tom er s w ith disab ilities can ge t h elp b y v isi ting w w w .hp .com/hpinf o/community /accessibil ity /pr o dserv . HP Photos ma r t W ebsite Vi s i t w w w . photosmar t .hp .c om or www . h p . c o m / p h o t o sm a r t fo r the f ollo win g infor m ati on: z Ti ps o n u s i n g yo ur c a m e ra m ore ef fe ct ive ly a nd cre at ive l y z HP di gi tal came r a d r iv er u p da t es a nd s o ftw ar e z Reg is t er you r pro d uc t z Subscribe to n e wslet ters, dri ver an d sof t war e updat es, and suppor t al ert s Su ppor t Process T h e H P su p po rt p r oces s w or ks mo s t e ff ecti v el y if y ou pe rf o rm th e f o llo w ing st e ps in t he or der s pec if ied: 1 R e v ie w the tr oubleshooting se ction of this User âs Manual , w hi ch star ts o n pag e 9 4. 2 A cces s t he H P Cons umer Ca r e Center website for s upport . If y ou h ave a c c ess to th e I nte rne t , yo u c an o bt ai n a wide r ange of information about y our dig ita l ca mera . V isi t the HP w ebsi te f or pr oduct he lp , dr i ver s, and soft war e updates at www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt .
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 115 Consumer Ca r e is av ailable in the f ollo w ing languages : Du t c h , En g lish , F r enc h , Ge r m an , It al i an , P or tu gue s e , Spanis h , S w edi sh, T r adi tional Chines e , Simplified Chinese , Ja pan es e , K o r ean . (Danish , F innish , an d No rwe gi a n suppor t i nfor mat ion is available in Eng lis h on ly .) 3 A cc ess HP e-su pp or t . If y ou ha ve a cces s to t he In t e r ne t , con ne ct w ith HP v i a e-mail b y g o in g t o: www .h p .c o m / su p por t . Y ou w i ll r ece i ve a per son al r ep l y f r o m an HP Consumer Ca r e techni c ian . E -ma il support is av ailable in the l ang uages l i sted at t hat website. 4 Contact y our local HP de al er . If your dig i tal c a mer a has a ha r dw ar e fa ilu r e , t ak e it t o y o ur lo cal HP d e al er f o r a solution. S er v ice is fr ee du r ing your digi tal ca mera âs l imi ted w arr ant y per iod. 5 Cont act the HP Consumer Care Cent er f or support b y phone . P lease cons ul t the follo w ing w ebsi te to check the de t ails an d co n diti on s o f ph o ne s up po rt in y ou r co un try/ re g io n : www .h p .c o m / su pp o r t . As a part of HPâs continuing e ff orts t o im p r o v e ph on e su p por t i nf o r mati on serv i ce s , w e adv is e y ou to check the HP website on a r eg ula r bas is for ne w i nformation r egarding ser vice feat ur es an d delivery . If y ou cannot solve the pr oblem using the abov e options, call HP whi le you are in fr ont of your c o mputer a nd dig ita l cam era . F o r faster se r vi ce, ple ase be prepar ed to p r o v ide the f ollo win g infor m ati on: ⢠The digit al ca mera âs m odel num ber (loc ated on th e fr ont of the camera) ⢠T he di gital came r a â s ser ial nu mber (locat ed on t he bottom o f t he camera) ⢠The computerâs op er ating sy s tem ⢠T he v e rs i on of the di gital came r a s oftw ar e (locat ed on t he camera âs CD lab el) ⢠Message s displ ay e d at the time the situati o n occur r ed
116 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual The applicable c ondi tion s f or HP phone s uppor t a r e subj ect to ch ang e w it hou t no ti ce . T elepho ne supp ort i s f r ee fr om the date of pur c hase f or the per iod sp eci f ied un less oth er wise noted. Phone Su ppor t in th e United Sta tes Su pp o rt is a va ila bl e bo th d ur ing an d afte r t he w ar r an ty pe r io d . W ithi n the p er iod of yo ur war r anty , telephone support is pr ovi ded fr ee of cha r ge. Call ( 8 00) 4 7 4 -68 36. US phone s upport is av ailabl e i n both Eng li sh and Spani s h 2 4 h our s a da y , 7 da y s a w ee k (da y s an d h ou r s of su pp o rt m a y ch ang e w it hou t no ti ce). A ft e r t h e w ar r anty per i od , call (80 0) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 . Ch ar g es ar e $2 5 . 0 0 pe r is su e , and ar e c ha r g e d t o y our c r edit car d . If y o u thin k y our HP pr oduct needs se r vi ce , cal l the HP Cons um er Car e Cente r , which can help determi ne if ser vice is r equired . Lo cat ions Fr e e P h o n e Suppor t P eriod Af r ica 30 da ys Asi a P ac if i c 1 y e ar Can ada 1 year E ur ope 1 y e ar Lat i n Am er i ca 1 year Midd le E ast 30 day s Uni ted States 1 yea r
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 117 Phone Su p por t in Europe, th e Middle East, an d A fr ic a HP Cons um er Supp ort ph one num bers and pol i cies ma y c han ge . V isi t th e f o ll o w ing w e bsit e to c he c k the d et ails an d conditi ons of phone sup port in y our coun try /r e gion: www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt . Alger ia 21 3 (0) 61 56 4 5 43 Aus t ria 4 3 (0) 8 2 0 8 7 441 7 Bahr ain 9 7 3 80 0 7 2 8 Belgium 0 7 0 300 005 (Dutch) 0 7 0 30 0 004 ( F r ench) Cz ech Republic 4 2 (0) 2 6 130 7 310 Denm ar k 45 7 020 2845 Egy p t 2 0 02 53 2 5 222 Fi n l a n d 35 8 (0) 203 66 7 6 7 Fr a n c e 3 3 ( 0) 89 2 6 9 60 2 2 ( E ur o 0 . 34/minute) German y 49 (0) 180 56 5 2 180 (Eur o 0. 12/mi nut e) Gr eec e 30 10 60 7 3 603 Hu ngar y 3 6 (0) 1 38 2 1111 Ir eland 1 89 0 9239 02 Israel 9 7 2 (0) 9 8 30 4848 Italy 848 800 8 71 Luxem bo u rg 900 40 00 6 (F r ench) 9 00 40 00 7 (Ge r man ) Mor occo 212 2 2 4 04 7 4 7
118 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Net her l ands 0 900 2020 16 5 (E ur o 0.10/minute) Norw a y 4 7 815 6 2 0 7 0 Po l a n d 48 2 2 8 6 5 98 00 Po r t u g a l 808 201 4 9 2 Ro m a n i a 40 1 315 4 4 4 2 Ru s s ia n F e d e ra t i o n 7 09 5 7 9 7 3 5 20 (M osco w ) 7 812 346 7 99 7 (St P eter sburg ) Sa udi Ar a b i a 9 6 6 800 8 9 7 14 4 40 Slov a kia 4 21 2 6 8 20 8080 Sou th A f r ica 08 6 000 1030 (inside RS A ) 2 7 -11 2 5 8 9 301 (ou tsi de R S A ) S pain 90 2 0 10 05 9 S w eden 46 ( 0) 77 120 4 7 6 5 Swi t ze rl a n d 0848 6 7 2 6 7 2 (German , F r ench , Italianâ P eak time 0. 08 CH F/O uts i de p eak 0 . 04 CH F) Tu n i s i a 216 1 891 2 2 2 Tu r k e y 90 2 16 5 7 9 71 71 Ukr aine 7 (380 44) 4 90 -3 5 2 0 Unit ed Ar a b Emir a tes 800 4910 Un i te d Ki n gd o m 4 4 (0) 8 7 0 010 4 3 20
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 119 O t h er Ph on e Sup p or t W orl dwide HP Cons um er Supp ort ph one num bers and pol i cies ma y c han ge . V isi t th e f o ll o w ing w e bsit e to c he c k the d et ails an d conditi ons of phone sup port in y our coun try /r e gion: www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt . Ar genti na 54 0 810 5 55 5 5 20 Aus t ral ia 61 (3) 88 77 8 000 (or loca l ( 03) 88 77 8 000 ) Br a zil 5 5 (1 1) 3 7 4 7 77 99 ( Gr an d e Sã o P aul o ) 5 5 0800 15 77 5 1 ( outside Gr ande São P a ulo) Canada 1 905 206 466 3 (during t he w ar r a nty per i od) 1 8 77 6 21 4 7 2 2 (aft e r the w ar r an ty pe r i od) Ce n tr al A mer i ca a nd the C ar ibbean 1 800 711 2 884 Chile 5 6 800 2 2 5 54 7 (P o s t-sal es Bu sin ess C om pu t ing 56 800 3 60 9 99 (P ost-s ales Home Computin g) China 86 (21) 3881 4518 Colombia 5 7 9 800 114 7 2 6 Gu at em al a 5 02 1 800 99 9 5105 Hong K ong S AR 85 2 2 80 2 409 8 India 1 600 11 2 2 6 7 or 91 11 68 2 603 5 (Hindi & English) Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3 408 Japan 05 7 0 000 511 (i nside Japan) 81 3 33 35 9 800 (outsi de Japa n) K or ea , Re pu bl i c of 82 ( 2 ) 3270 0 7 0 0 ( S e o u l ) 0 80-99 9 -0 7 00 (o utsi de S eou l) Mala ys i a 60 1 800 805 405
120 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Me x i co 5 2 5 8 99 22 (M e x i co C it y ) 5 2 01 800 4 7 2 66 84 ( outside M e x ico C ity ) Ne w Ze al and 64 (9) 3 5 6 6640 Pe r u 51 0 800 101 11 Philippine s 63 ( 2) 86 7 35 51 Pu e r t o Ri c o 1 8 77 2 3 20 58 9 Singapor e 6 5 6 272 53 0 0 Ta i w a n 886 0 800 01005 5 Tha i l an d 66 (2) 661 4000 U nit ed S t at es 1 (800) 4 7 4 -68 36 Ve n e z u e l a 5 8 0 800 4 7 46 83 6 8 Vie tn a m 8 4 (0 ) 8 8 2 3 45 3 0
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 121 Appe ndi x A: Bat ter ie s a nd C amer a A cce ssories Managi ng B at te rie s Y o u r c a me ra u s e s f o u r A A b a t t e ri es . F o r b e s t re s u l t s , u s e photo - li thi u m or rechargeable NiM H batt er ies. If you m ust use alkali ne ba t ter ies, use high- g r ade â ultr a â or â premiu m â v ar i eti e s inst ea d o f or dinary alk aline batte r ie s. T h e f o l lo wi ng t ab le sh o w s ho w diff e r en t ty pe s o f batt er i es pe rf o rm in dif f e r ent ty pe of u s e s ce na r i os: Ty p e o f u s e Alk al ine Photo- Li t h i u m NiMH M ost economi cal ( mor e t han 30 pict u res p er mo nt h ) Po o r Fa i r Good M ost economi cal (less than 30 pict u res p er mo nt h ) Fa i r Go od Fa i r H e av y us e o f fl ash, frequ e nt p ict u r es Po o r Good Good Hea vy u s e o f v id eo Po o r Good Good Hea vy u s e o f Li ve View Po o r Good Good Longest o v er all battery life Po o r Good Fa i r Lo w temper atur e/Winter use Po o r Good Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u s e ( w it hou t do c k) Fa i r Go od Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u se (w it h do c k) Fa i r Go od Good Wa n t t o re c h a r g e b a t t e ri e s No No Ye s
12 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual NO TE If you do no t i n ten d to use you r c am e r a for e x tend e d per iods o f time (mor e than a month) , we s tr ongl y re c o m m e n d t h a t yo u re m ove t h e b a t t e ri e s. When replacing bat ter ies, alw a ys r eplace th em togeth er as a set . N e v er mi x dif fer en t ba tter y t ypes or ba tter ies of dif fer en t c ha r g e le v e ls . B a tte ry leak a ge an d d am age to t he cam er a ma y re s u l t . B at ter y G au ge T h e f o l lo wi ng batte ry le v els m a y be dis p la ye d on the st atu s scr een , in Liv e V iew , in Playback , an d w h en the came r a is con n ecte d to a c omput er or pr inter . Icon Des c r ipti on Batter i es ha v e 6 5- 100 per cent battery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e 3 5-6 5 per cen t bat tery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e 10 -3 5 per cent b attery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e less than 10 per c ent battery lif e re m a i n in g. C a m e ra wi l l p owe r do wn so on. Li ve View is disabled . Bli nk i ng Batter i es are deplet ed . Cam er a will pr oce ed to po w er do wn. Camer a is ope r atin g on A C po w e r ( w ith f ull o r no n- r ec har geable bat ter i es). Ani ma te d ba tt ery f illing up Camer a is oper ating on A C p ow e r and is char ging th e b a t teries .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 12 3 NO TE T he batt ery g a ug e is mo s t a cc ur ate aft er a f e w min ut e s o f u s e . W he n t he cam er a is tu r ned o ff , the ba tt e r ies r eco v er and th e initi al ga uge r ead ing m a y not be as accurate as that obta in e d du ring act ual use. Y ou mi gh t n o ti ce th at occa si o nal ly the ba tte ry le ve l i con s w ill f lu ctua t e w it h t h e sam e s et o f b att er ies . T h is o cc ur s b ecau s e some operating modes like Liv e Vi ew and v i de o r ecor ding con sum e much more po w er tha n oth er modes, and wil l cause the bat tery lev el icon s to ind ica te your ba t teries a r e lo w , bec ause bat ter y oper ati ng tim e in those modes is short. W hen y ou s witch to a mod e that r equ ir es les s pow er , l ike Pl a yb a ck , t he ba ttery le v el i co n ma y go ba c k up , in di catin g th er e is mor e time le ft in the ba tte r i e s if y o u s t a y in t ha t m ode . NO TE When y ou r emo v e the batt er ies f r om t he cam er a , the date a nd tim e set tings are pr eser v ed f or appr o x imately 10 minu te s . If the came r a is w it ho u t batte r ies f or l onge r tha n 10 mi nut es, th e clo ck i s set to th e last da te a nd t i me at which the cam era w as u sed. Y ou ma y be prom pted to updat e the date an d tim e . Extending B a t ter y Life z Min im i z e the use of Live View on the Im age Dis pl a y an d v ideo , es p ec i al l y w he n u sing al k a line ba tte r i e s . z Use the v ie wfinder mic r odisp lay to f r am e pictur es ins tead of t he Im a ge D i sp la y . L ea v e th e I ma ge Di sp la y o ff w he ne ve r possi b le . z Mak e sur e the Eye Star t sens or is set t o On ( pag e 84) . z Use z oom o n l y when ne cess ar y . z Use t h e AU TO F L A S H set ting rather tha n FL AS H O N (pag e 3 2) .
12 4 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual z Do n o t se t Aut o P owe r Of f in the Se t u p menu to Never (pag e 8 6) . z M i n i m ize p o we r c yc l i n g. I f y o u ex p e c t t o a v e ra g e m o re t h a n one p ictur e ev er y fi v e minutes , leave the camera on r ather th an tur ning it o f f af te r ea c h sho t . T his mi nimi z e s t he n umbe r of time s the lens ha s to e x te nd and r etr ac t . z Use an opt ional HP A C p ow e r a dapter or H P 8881 camer a doc k w hen the cam er a w ill be on f o r e x te nded per i ods of time, o r when unload ing pi ctur es to y our com pu ter o r pr i nting . R e cha r geabl e Ba tte r ie s Ni c k e l Met al H y d r id e (N iMH) ba tte r ie s can be r ec h ar ged b y u sing a batte ry c har ge r . N iMH ba tte r i e s can als o be r ec har ged in th e came r a whe n t he came r a is connec ted to a n op tio nal HP A C po we r adapter or HP 8881 cam er a dock. When the batteri es ar e r e char gi ng , the P o w er/M emor y light on t he ba c k o f t h e ca me r a b lin ks g r een . Ba tte r i es ar e f ull y r echa r ged v ia t he HP AC pow e r ad apter or ca mera dock i n 15 hou rs . Some t hi ngs to keep i n m ind when usin g NiM H bat t er ies are: z T h e f irs t time t h at y ou u se a se t of N iMH b att e r ies , b e sur e that y ou fully cha r ge t hem b ef or e using t hem in the c a mer a . z Y ou ma y noti ce th at the f irst se v er al time s y ou u se N iMH bat ter ies, the bat ter y li fe seems shorter tha n what y ou e xpect . P erf or man ce w ill imp r ov e an d becom e op timal a ft e r t he b att er ie s ha v e bee n c har ged a nd t he n dis c h ar ged (u sed) com ple t el y f our o r f iv e times . Y o u can u se the cam er a norma l l y to di s ch arge th e ba t te r ies du rin g thi s â c onditionin gâ per iod .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 1 2 5 z Al w a y s r ec har ge all f our N iMH ba tte ri e s at t he sa me time . One low-cha r ged ba t tery w ill reduce t he ba tter y l i fe for the other batter ies in the camer a . z NiMH bat ter ies dis char ge when not in use , whether the y are in stal le d i n a c amera or not . If th e y hav e not be en used f or mo r e t han tw o w ee ks, r ech ar ge t h em be f o r e u sin g t h em ag ain . Ev en if yo u ar e not us ing y our batte r i e s , it is a good idea to char ge them e very s i x months to a y ea r to pr ol ong the ir useful l ife . Sleep Time -out for P o w er Co ns erv at io n T o conse rve batte ry po we r , the ac ti v e disp l a y tur n s o ff au t oma tica ll y if th er e is no b utt on a cti v ity f or 60 second s . Wh en t he came r a is in t his â s leep â st a te , pr ess ing an y butt o n w i ll w ak e th e c ame r a u p a g ain . If n o b utt ons ar e p r esse d dur ing t h e sl ee p st a t e , t h e ca me r a w i ll tur n o ff aft e r t h e t ime th at is set in the Au to P o we r O f f men u ( pa ge 8 6 ), unle ss it is co nn ec te d to a co mputer , pr inter , o r T V .
12 6 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual P urc h a sin g Ca m era Access ories Y ou can pur chas e the se acce sso r ies f o r y o ur camer a fr om y ou r loca l r et ailer or onl ine at www .h p sh o p p in g .c o m : z HP Photos mart 88 81 ca mera dock (C8881A , o ption #A 2L in the United States and Ca nada , option #0 02 for re st of the world) inclu des : ⢠Cam e ra d ock ⢠F our r ec har gea ble N iMH batter i es ⢠A udi o/v i deo ca ble ⢠U SB c abl e fo r connecting to compu ter or pr inter ⢠6 .6V A C po we r adapt er z HP Phot osma rt D igita l Camera Delux e Starter Kit (C888 9A #A2 L f or United St ates and Canada, C8884B #UUS f or continental Eur ope , C8884B #A BU f or the United K ingdom , C 888 9A #ABG f or A ustr a lia , and C888 9A #AB1 for K ore a) i n c l u d e s : ⢠Quic k battery char ger (w ith 6.6V A C pow er adap ter and car adap ter ) - c har ge s batte r i es in 2 - 4 ho ur s ⢠Four re chargeable NiMH batteries ⢠32 MB SD memory card ⢠Expand able pa dded came r a cas e z HP Phot osma rt D igita l Camera St art er K it (Y17 8 9B, option #A2L fo r United States and Canada , #UUS for c o nt i ne nt a l Euro p e, # AB U for th e Un i te d Kin gd o m, #ABG f or A u s tr alia , and #AB1 for K o r ea) includes: ⢠Quic k batter y ch ar ger (w it h 6 .6V A C po w e r adap ter ) - char ge s batt er i es in 2 - 4 hour s ⢠Four re chargeable NiMH batteries ⢠Expand able pa dded came r a cas e
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 12 7 z HP Photosma rt 6.6V A C pow er adapter (C88 7 5A, option #001 for the Unit ed States and Cana da, #0 0 2 f or E ur ope , A u s tr ali a , Ne w Z e al an d , and K o r ea) HP s upports only H P A C pow er adapter s and other acce ss or ie s e x pr essl y a ppr ov ed b y HP . z HP Photos mart SD Memor y ca rds (for more info rmatio n ab out s uppo rted m emo ry card s, see Stor ag e on pag e 13 7 ) ⢠3 2 MB S D c ard (C889 5A) ⢠64 M B SD ca r d (C 889 6A) ⢠128 MB S D card ( C88 9 7A) A t th e time of t his pr inting , HP w as in the p r ocess o f r eleasing 25 6 MB a nd 512 M B c ar ds to the mark et . The y sh ou ld be av aila ble in t h e s ame r et ail pl a ce s w he r e y o u f in d the ca rds l iste d ab ov e . z SD to CF ca r d adapt er ( C888 5A - only av ailable i n the U .S . on w ww . h psh oppin g.com ) z HP Phot osma rt p add ed c amera case ( C8906A ) z H P audio /video a c cess or y c able to c on ne ct to a te lev is ion (T V) . NO TE Yo u c a n a l s o u s e a n y Y- adapter aud io cable with dua l R C A p lu g s on o n e e n d a nd a 1/ 8 in c h ( 3 .17 5 mm) mini-ster e o jac k on the ot her end . Y ou will also need an adapter plug th at ac cept s the 1/8 i nch (3.17 5 mm ) jack and fit s i nto the 3 /3 2 i n ch (2 . 38 m m) jack on your camer a.
12 8 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 129 Appe ndi x B : Ca me r a D ock Ge tt in g S ta rt ed w i th th e D ock T h e o pti ona l HP Ph o to smart 8 881 cam er a d oc k all o ws y ou t o easi ly unloa d i mages to y ou r co mputer , print ima ges di r ectly to a pr inter , an d di spl ay images and v ideo cl i ps on a te lev i s ion (TV) . In a d ditio n , if y ou ha v e r echa r g e abl e ba tte ri e s in t he c a m e ra ( p rov i d e d i n t h e b ox wi t h t h e c a m e ra d o c k ) , t h ey w i l l be r ech ar ged an ytime the came r a is in the came r a d oc k . 1 F oll o w th e instr u cti ons o n the Se tu p po s te r tha t w a s pack aged with the cam er a dock. T hes e steps i nclud e: ⢠A t t a c h i ng t h e d o c k i n s e rt t h a t wa s i n yo u r c a m e ra b o x to t h e t o p of th e c am era d o ck. ⢠Inst alling r echar geable N iMH batter ies in y our came r a . ⢠Connecting the A C po we r sour ce t o the dock . ⢠Conn ecting th e doc k to a com put er , pr in t er , and/or te le visi on . NO TE T he f ir s t time that y ou us e the r e c har geab le ba tter ie s , be s ur e t ha t y ou f ul l y c har ge the m in t h e c ame r a be f o r e u sing th e came r a . It ma y tak e up t o 15 hou r s to fu ll y charge the bat ter ies.
130 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual The ca m era dock has four co nn e ctors on th e ba ck: A slid i ng do or ov e r the pr inter and computer co nne ctors pr e v e n ts y ou f r om u sing bo th conne ct or s a t th e same time ( th e c a me ra d o ck i s not a US B hub) . NO TE Th e HP came r a doc k does not w or k w ith o ut A C pow er . Be sur e to use ONL Y the HP A C ad apter and the c ables that ca m e with the c a me r a d o ck. 2 B e fore p l a ci n g t h e c a m e ra i nt o t h e d o c k re m ove t h e ru b b er p l u g fro m t h e dock connector on the bot tom of the ca mer a , a s w ell a s an y ca bl e s tha t may be at ta ched to the ca m era . 3 P l ace the camer a in the doc k w it h t he back of the cam er a fac ing th e fr on t of the d ock. Ico n Desc r ipti o n Connects to an HP A C po wer adapt er . Co n n e ct s to th e te levi s io n . Connects dire ctl y to USB-enabled HP D eskJet and Ph ot os m a rt prin ters . Connects t o y our com put er. 6V MF
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 1 31 D ock L ight s a nd Bu t to ns T h e camer a d ock ha s a li gh t nea r the to p f r ont th at p r o v i d es batt ery char ging st a tu s . Wh en that li gh t is: ⢠On - t he camer a is in the doc k , the doc k ha s po w e r , and t he batt er i es ar e f ull y c har ged (or ar e not r e ch ar gea ble). ⢠Bli nk in g - the camer a is in the doc k , and the doc k is ch ar gin g the camera batter ies . ⢠Off - the d ock has no pow er or ther e is no ca mer a i n the dock. T wo buttons on the f r ont of the dock ac ti v ate co nnecti o ns to t he de v i ces in di cate d b y the ir i co ns: z The Sa ve/Pr int bu tt on ac ti va t e s the c o nn ec t ion to th e c ompu ter o r th e pr inter , dep en ding on which of those de v i ces is connec ted t o t he do c k . If th e lig ht is blinkin g , the n ther e is an ac tiv e connection betw een the came r a an d t he com pu t er or pr in te r . z The TV butt on acti va t es the T V connecti o n , w hi c h s t arts a sli d e sho w o f ima g es f r om y our came r a . If t he l i gh t in th is bu tto n is o n , th e do c k is co nnect ed to t he T V . If the l i gh t is bli nki ng, then an audio/ v ideo sig n al is being sent to the TV .
13 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Unlo ad in g Im a g es to a Comp uter Usi ng t he Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do ck i n se r t th at ca m e in yo u r c a m era b ox i s at ta ch ed to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he USB cabl e is connec ted between t he camer a dock and y our com pute r , and the po w er cabl e is plugged int o the doc k (see t he camer a dock Setu p pos t er ) ⢠T he HP Pho to & Imaging s oftwar e is install ed on yo ur compu ter (see Inst alling t he S o ft w ar e on page 2 0). ⢠If you are using a Ma cinto sh computer , th e ca mera âs USB C o n figu rat ion is s et to Dis k Dr i v e in t he Setu p me n u ( s e e USB C o n figu rat ion on page 88.) 2 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 3 Pr ess the Sav e/P r int button on the do ck . The HP I m a g e U n l o a d sof t ware wi l l l au n ch o n you r c omp ute r . I f yo u ha v e se t the s o ftwar e to a ut o mati c all y unl oad t he im age s in th e cam er a , th e ima ge s w ill a u tom ati ca ll y u nloa d t o t he com pu te r . Otherw is e , in t he We l c o m e screen , click St ar t Un l oa d . The im age s ar e un lo ade d to the c omputer , and then if th er e ar e an y still image s tha t w e r e pr e v i ou sl y s ele cted f or pr intin g (p age 60 ) or sel ected for HP Ins t an t Sha r e desti nat ion s (pa ge 6 9) , t hose a ction s are s tar ted. 4 When the un loa d scr e en on the computer say s Fi n i s h e d , y our imag es ha v e been sa ved and sha r ed . Y ou can tak e the ca m era out of the do ck, or le a ve it the r e to r ech arge the came r a ba tter ie s (if the batt e r ies ar e r echar gea bl e).
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 133 Printin g Im a ges Using t he Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do c k i n s er t th at ca m e in yo ur c a m era b ox i s at ta ch e d to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he USB cabl e is connec ted between t he camer a dock and y our pr inte r , an d the po w e r cable is plugged int o the dock (see the camer a dock Setu p pos t er ) ⢠T he pr inter is tur ned on and pape r is loade d in t he pr inter . 2 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 3 Pr e s s th e Sa v e/P r in t bu t to n on t he doc k , an d the Pr int Se tup me n u d is p la y s on t he ca me r a . If y ou alr ead y se l ect ed imag e s to pr int u sing the came r a Pr int button, the number of i mages se lec ted is sho wn in the Pr int Setup men u . Oth e rw is e , Images: AL L i s displ ay ed. T o sele ct or change the sel ect i on s of imag es to pr i n t , pr ess the Pr int but ton, scr oll through th e im ages usi ng the button s , th en u se the bu ttons t o adj u s t t he n umbe r of cop ies f o r each im age , an d when sati s fied with y our sele ct ion s, press the Prin t but ton a gai n to r etu rn to th e Pr int Setup menu . 4 If al l th e sett i ngs i n the P r in t Setu p me n u l oo k c or r ect , p r es s OK on the camer a to beg in pr intin g . Or , yo u can chan ge se ttings in the Pr in t Se tup me nu us ing the ar r o w k e y s on the cam er a , then follo w in structions on the scr een to be gin pr inti ng. NO TE Th er e is a p r in t pr ev i e w in t he l o w er r i gh t-han d co r n er of t h e P r in t Setu p scr een s how ing the page la yo ut that w il l be used for pr in ti ng i mage s. Thi s pr int pr e vie w upda tes as y ou ch a ng e th e set t i ng s for th e Pr in t Si ze an d P aper S i z e .
134 HP Ph otosmar t 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Dis p la ying Im a g es on a T V Usi n g t h e Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do ck i n se r t th at ca m e in yo u r c a m era b ox i s at ta ch ed to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he au di o/v i deo cabl e is connect ed betwee n the camer a dock and y our T V , and the po w e r cable is plugged in to the doc k (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . 2 Y our cam er a w ill se n d e ith er an N T S C o r P AL v i d eo si g nal to a T V . The NTS C f ormat is used pr imarily in Nort h Am e r ica an d Jap an , while the P AL fo r m at is used pr imar ily in E u r o pe . T his se tting is m ade f or y ou w he n y ou set t he lan gu age o f t he came r a . T o c hec k the c ur r en t s e tting or change th e video sig n al format , go to th e T V Con figu ration se tting in the Setup men u (pag e 89 ) 3 Y our cam er a w ill be t he s ou r ce f or the T V si g n al (j u st li k e a V CR or ca mc or der ) , so you must set th e T V to ta k e video in pu t f r om an e xte r n al v id eo so ur ce (y o ur cam e r a) inst ea d of th e a nte n na or T V c able. Ref er to the T V userâ s ma nua l f or dir ecti ons on ho w to do this. 4 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 5 Pr ess the TV b utt o n on th e do c k . T he camer a st arts a slidesho w of each image , play i ng an y attached audio clip or v id eo c lip , an d t hen s w it c hing to t he ne xt image . Y o u can also ma nua lly scr oll th r ough the i mages by pr essi ng th e buttons on the c amera . T o end th e slidesho w , pr ess th e TV but ton agai n . NO TE The Image Disp lay on t he ca mer a tu r ns off when the camer a is connect e d to a TV , b ut y ou ca n still use the Pl ay b ac k an d Sh ar e me n u s, beca us e th e me n u s w ill dis pla y on the T V scr een .
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 135 Appe ndi x C : Spe c ifi c a tions Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on Res o l ut i o n St il l pictu r es: ⢠5 .2 6 M P (2 668 by 19 7 0) total pi x el count ⢠5 . 08 M P (2 608 by 19 5 2) effecti v e pi x el count Vide o cl i ps : ⢠2 88 b y 20 8 to tal pi x el count Sensor Diagonal 9 . 04 m m (1/1 .8 -inch , 4:3 for mat) CC D Color depth 3 6 -b it (12 b i ts b y 3 co l or s) Lens F ocal length: ⢠Wide â 7 . 6 mm ⢠T el eph ot oâ61 mm ⢠3 5 mm equi v ale nt a ppr o x imatel y 3 7 mm - 300 m m F- N u m b e r : ⢠Wi deâ f/2 .8 to f/ 11 .3 ⢠T el eph ot oâf/3 .1 t o f/12 .4 Lens thr eads 5 5 m m diameter for optional lenses a nd fil ter s (separat e lens ad apt er r equir ed - r ef er to T iffen ca ta lo g th a t was in cl u d ed in you r ca m era b ox) View f i nde r Zooming 1/4 V G A color sequenti al micr odispla y view fin d e r wi t h di o p t er co n t rol Eyesta r t s en so r fo r vi ew fin de r z Minimum acti v ation dist ance: 3 0 mm z Maxim um ac ti v ati o n distanc e: 5 5 mm z Maxim um dea cti v a ti on dist anc e: 7 0 mm
13 6 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Zoom 8x opti c al , 7x di gital z oom Fo cu s z TTL a u t o f oc u s z Wi deâ0.1 m (3.9 in ) to in fi nit y . z T el eph ot oâ0.9 m (3 5 .4 in) to inf inity . z F ocu s setti ngs: NORM AL (de f aul t), MA CRO , INFI NITY , MANU AL F OCU S Shutt er s peed 1/200 0 t o 16 secon ds Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Built-in f la sh Built-in f l ash a ssembly , 3 second r e char ge . Fl as h wo r k i n g dis ta nc e Z oom Po s i t i o n ISO 100 IS O 200 I S O 400 Wi de 2 .4 m 3 .4 m 4.8 m 7 .9 ft 11 . 2 f t 1 5 .7 ft T elep ho t o 2 .2 m 3 .0 m 4. 4 m 7 .2 ft 9 .8 f t 14 .4 f t Ex ter nal flash No Fl as h s e t t i n g s Fl a s h O f f , Auto F lash , Auto with Red-ey e Red uct io n , Fl a s h O n , Fl as h O n w i t h Re d - ey e Red uct io n , Ni ght , Ni ght w ith R ed- e y e R eduction Image Displa y 2 -inch colo r LED backl it , pol y sili c on TFT L CD w ith 130, 3 38 p i x e ls (5 5 7 b y 2 3 4) Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 1 3 7 Storag e z Slot for m e mor y c a r d z One 3 2 M B SD mem ory card inclu ded. z T his camer a su pport s both Sec ure Digit al (SD) and s ome MultiM edi aCar d TM (MMC ) mem ory car ds. O nly MMC card s th at h av e b een veri f ied compliant to the MultiM edi aCar d TM specification as of January 2000 are su p ported. Compliant MMC mem ory c a rds hav e th e Mu ltiM ediaCar d TM logo on the card or package. z SD c ar ds ar e r ecommended , as t he y ar e f a ste r t han MMC car ds at r eading an d wr iting dat a . z T his camer a ma y su pport memory car ds up to 2 GB, though HP has only tested up to 51 2 M B, as 1 GB an d 2 GB c ar ds ar e n ot a v ailable y et . Car ds lar ger than 2 GB w ill no t w or k. A hi gh capacity ca r d itself doe s not affect cam er a perf or mance , bu t a lar g e n umber o f fil es ( ov er 300) does a ffect t he time it tak es fo r the camer a to t u rn o n. z T he n umber of ima ges that c an be sav ed in memo ry d epends on t he i mage q ual ity se ttings (see Memory Car d Capa c ity on page 141). Image c aptur e options z St il l (d efault) z Self - Timer âstill pictur e or v ideo clip tak en after 10 se co nd delay z Self - Time r - 2 sh ots â st i l l pict u re ta ken a f te r 10 se cond d elay , then a se cond pictur e ta k e n abou t 3 seconds late r z Burst âc a mer a tak es pic tu r es until the buffer is fu l l (t ypic a l ly 4 - 6 p ic tu r es ) z Vid e o â15 fr ames per secon d (inc ludes au dio), max imum length up to 1 minute Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
138 HP Ph otosmar t 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Audio captur e Wi th st i ll pict u r es: ⢠EX IF 2 .2 at a minimum samp ling r at e o f 22.0 5 K H z . ⢠M axi mum of 6 0 se co nd s of au dio ca n b e ca ptur e d at the time a pi ctur e is tak en b y hold in g down th e Shu tte r but t on a f ter ta k i ng a pic t ure ( n ot ava il ab le i n Bur s t or Self - T imer mod es ). ⢠A udi o c lip an nota ti on (max imum 6 0 seconds ) can be added t o image in the P l a y bac k men u . Wit h v ideo cl ips: ⢠A udi o is captur ed aut omati call y w it h v i deo . ⢠MP EG1 le v el-1 minimum sampl ing r ate o f 22.0 5 K H z ⢠B i- li ne ar u p s am p l ed t o 44.1 KHz Expos ur e M ode settings Au to (de f a u lt), Act ion , Landscape, Po r t r a i t , Apertu r e P r ior ity , Shu tt er Pr io r ity , Vi deo Expos ur e Comp e ns ation Can be set ma nuall y fr om -3. 0 to 3. 0 EV (Exp o sur e V alue) in 1/3 EV inc re me nts . Whi te Ba la nce settings A uto ( def ault) , Sun , Shade , T ungst en, F luor es cent , Manual AE Met e r i ng settings A v er a ge , Center - W eighted (def ault) , Spot I S O Sp eed settings A ut o (d ef ault),100, 200, 400 Di gital F lash Off (def ault) , Low , High Colo r settings F ull Col or (de f a ult), Black & White , Sep i a Res o l ut i o n settings z 5 MP - 2 6 08 x 19 5 2 (default) z 1MP - 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 139 Compr ession settings â Best â Better (default) â G ood Satur ati on settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High Sh ar pnes s settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High Con tr ast settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High P la yback ma g ni fica t ion Magnifi es a still image to 150x on the Image Dis pla y Pr int opti ons Pr in t button allo ws yo u to selec t images in th e ca m e ra to be pr int e d au to m at ic a l ly (up to 99 copi es of the im age) when the ca mera is connected to a c omputer or certain H P pr int er s . Compr ession fo rm a t z JPE G (EXIF ) f or still images z MPEG1 for vi de o clip s In te r f ac es z USB M ini-AB r ece ptacle; allow s USB ( A to Min i- B) to a c o mp ute r or US B ( M i n i -A to B ) to c e rta i n printers ( any H P P h otos m a rt p r int e rs or a ny othe r HP pr in t er w ith a f r on t panel USB port) z A/V (2 .5mm male s ter eo ja ck) ou t to TV z DC input 5 .9 to 6.6Vdc @ 20 00 mA z HP P hotosmart 888 1 camer a dock O rienta t io n Sensor Ye s Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
140 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Standar ds z PTP t r an sfer (1 5 7 4 0) z MSDC tr ans fer z NT S C/ P A L z JPE G z MPEG1 z DPOF 1.1 z EXIF 2 .2 z DCF 1.0 Po w e r Cam er a has a maxim um steady state powe r consu mpti o n o f 8 W at ts (1300 mA @ 6. 2 Vdc) . P o w er s our ces in clude: z 4 AA batt er ie s ( 4 non-r echar geab l e AA batt er ies inc luded) or opti onal HP A C po w er ada pt er . Acceptable batteri es include phot o -lith ium, â ultr a â or â pr emium â gr ade alk a line , or r echar ge ab le NiMH. NiMH batte r i es can be r echar ge d in t he camer a us ing the opti on al HP A C pow er adap ter or HP camer a dock . z Opti onal HP A C po we r adapt e r (see Pu rc h a s i n g Cam era Ac ce s sories on page 12 6 f or part numb ers for di ffer en t r eg ions) : ⢠Input: 10 0 to 2 40V ac ⢠Output: 5.9 to 6.6Vd c @ 200 0mA z Optional HP P hotos mar t 8881 cam era dock (see P urch as i n g C a m e ra A c c ess o rie s on page 12 6 fo r pa rt num bers f or di ffer ent regions) R ec har ging in camer a w ith the op ti onal HP A C po w er adapte r or HP camer a dock ( 100% in 15 hou rs) . A ut omatic ad v anced pow er management . Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 14 1 Memo ry Car d Cap a c ity The follow in g table l ist s the appro ximate n umb er of st il l i mag es t ha t can be s to r ed o n a 3 2 M B Sec ur e Di g it al (SD) m e mo ry car d when the cam er a is set t o the d iffer ent Re s o l u t ion an d Compr ession settin gs a va ila bl e in th e Captu re m enu (s ee pag e 51) . NO TE T he actu al f il e si z e s a nd n umbe r o f s till ima g es th at can be stor ed on the memor y ca r d w ill var y , dep endi ng on the con ten t o f ea c h s ti ll i mag e . Ext er n al bod y dimensions 115 mm (L) by 85 mm (W) b y 8 5 mm (H) (measure ments with cam er a off and f lash do wn) We i g h t 300 gr a ms (9 .6 ounces) w it ho ut batter ies Te m p e r a t u re ra n ge Oper ational: 5 t o 4 5° C ( 41 t o 113° F ) at 15 t o 85% r el ati v e humid ity Storage : -30 t o 6 5° C (- 2 2 t o 14 9° F ) a t 15 t o 90% r el ati ve h umidity W a rra nt y HP 1 year ex c hange war ranty 5MP - 2 608 x 195 2 Re so l ut ion 1 M P - 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 Re so lu t ion - Bes t Compr ession 11 images (2 .6 M B each ) 23 i m a g es (1.2 5 MB eac h) - Bette r Compr ession 23 i m a g e s (1 .25 M B eac h) 48 images (600 KB each) - Good Compr ession 48 images (600 KB each) 96 i m a g e s (300 KB each) Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
14 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual
In d e x 143 Index A AA batteries 121 AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 14 HP part number 140 purchasing 127 accessories for camera 126 Action setting 38 2-second release priority 39 active display, using 23 AE Me ter ing, s etting 4 5 alkaline batteries 121 Aper ture Prior ity ( Av), s etting 39 aperture, setting 3 9 arrow buttons on Con troll er 11 audio clips delete 65 play 64 reco rd 28 , 64 audio/video (TV) cable 127 conne ctor 81 Auto Power Off s etting 86 automatic exp osure, ove rride 38 Av Aperture Priority, setting 39 B batteries door on camera 15 ext end lif e of 12 3 gauge 122 install 16 rechargeable 124 types to use 1 21 Best Compr ession set ting 52 Better Compression setting 52 blinking lights on camera 11, 14 bo nus so f twa r e 20 , 21 brackets in Live View s creen 25 brightening an i mage 42 Bu rs t button 10 using 35 buttons on camera 10 on ca me ra do ck 1 31 C calibrating color of images 44 came ra rese t 9 3 self-diagnosti c test 1 13 specifications 1 35 turn on/ off 17 came ra acce ss orie s 12 6 came ra d ock buttons 131 conne ct to 129 conne ctor on camera 15 description 9 display to TV 134 dock in ser t 9, 12 9 printing from 133 purchasing 126 unload images 1 32 Came ra S ounds , s etting 8 4 Capture menu Help for menu options 41
14 4 Index using 40 Colo r of imag es, s e tting 50 comp r essio n f orm at 1 39 Compression, sett ing 5 2 compute r conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 conn ec t cam era to 77 conne ctions as a USB Mass Stor age Device Class (MSDC) 88 to cam era d ock 1 29 to comp uter 77 to TV 8 1 conne ctors audio/video (TV) 81 came ra d ock 130 descriptions 14 conne ctors, des cript ions 15 Contra st, se tt ing 55 Con trol ler wi th arrow butto ns, description 11 customer support 114 D darkeni ng an i mage 42 Date & T ime, settin g 19 , 87 delete audio only 65 during Instant Review 27 images and video clips from memory card 65 diagnostic te st 113 Digital Flash, setting 48 digital zoom 31 dio pt e r co nt ro l 12, 19 direct print printing images from camera to printer or comp uter 79 printing images using camera dock 133 selecting image s 60 disk drive, camera as 8 8 display images and video clips on TV 82 displays, using microdisplay or Ima ge Di s pl ay 2 3 E en lar g e ima ge 6 6 erro r mes s ag es on camera 104 on computer 111 EV Com pensa tion, setting 42 Exposur e Mode sel ec to r 1 3 setting 38 Eye St art sensor location 12 setting 84 F files delete from memory card 65 effe ct of Compression sett ing on size 52 effect of digital zoom on size 31 effect of Resolution s etting on size 5 1 Resolution setting 51 flas h button 10 pop-up description 1 3 set ti ng s 3 2 using 32 working dist ance 1 36
14 5 Index Flas h Off 33 F- number, sett ing 39 Foc us brackets, using 25 Infinity setting 36 lock 26 Ma cro setting 36 Ma nu a l Foc us se t ti ng 3 6 , 37 Norm al setting 36 search priority 37 set ti ng s 3 6 focu s button 10 came ra sha ke 30 rang e 13 6 Foc us A ss ist l ig h t 1 4 setting 85 form a t mem o ry c ard 65 G gauge, battery 1 22 Good Compression se tti ng 5 2 H Help for Capture menu options 41 help from cust omer support 114 HP AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 14 purchasing 127 HP Instant Share customizing the Share menu 70 description 9, 69 selecti ng images for HP Instant Share de stinati ons 74 Share button 1 1, 70 turn on/ off 70 usi ng the Sha re m enu 7 3 HP web sit e s 114 I Ima ge Di s pl ay changing bright ness 8 5 description 12 Live View button 1 2 stat u s scr ee n 18 using 23 Imag e Inf o, u s ing 6 7 images AE Meter ing settin g 45 brightening 42 Color setting 50 colo r tint 44 Compression se tting 52 Contr ast se tti ng 55 darkeni ng 42 delete 65 Digital Flash setting 4 8 Exposure Mode settin g 38 Image Info in Playback 67 ISO Speed setting 47 magnify 66 number remaining 24, 59 number saved on memory ca rd 5 1, 52, 14 1 reco rd au dio clip s 2 8 Resolution setting 51 Saturation s etting 53 Shar p nes s se tti ng 54 too dark/light 42 unload using camera dock 132 unloading c amera to compute r 77 White Ba lance set ting 43
146 Index Infinity focus setting 3 6 install batteries 1 6 lens cap teth er 1 5 memory card 17 neck s trap 1 6 sof twa re 20 , 21 Instant Rev iew setting 86 ISO Spe ed, settin g 47 L La ndsca pe set ti ng 38 Lan gu a ge change setting 90 choose at first startup 18 LCD Br ightness setting 85 LEDs (l ights ) o n came ra Foc us A ss ist l ig ht 1 4, 85 Powe r /Me mory 11 Self- Timer 14 lens cap teth er attaching 1 5 Liv e Vie w button 12 description 24 lo ng ex po sur es , n oi se r ed uc t io n 39 M Macintosh compute r bo nus so ftw ar e 21 conn ect to 7 7, 13 2 install sof tware 21 USB s etting on camer a 88 Ma cro focus settin g 3 6 magnify image 66 Ma nua l Focus setting 36 , 37 Manual Whit e B alance, sett ing 44 mem ory c a rd Compression se tti ng, effe ct of 52 delete images, audio only, or vid e o c lip s 6 5 door 11 image capaci ty 51, 5 2, 141 install 17 pictures remaining 24, 59 purchasing 127 Resolution s etting, eff ect of 5 1 supported types and sizes 137 memory light 11 menus Capture 40 Playback 61 Setup 8 3 Share 7 3 message s on camera 104 on computer 111 microdisplay i n viewfinder dio pt e r co nt rol 19 location 12 using 23 microphone, description 14 Mo de se lec to r 13 N neck st rap attaching to c amera 1 6 mount on camera 13 NiMH batte ries 1 21 noise r eduction, long exposure s 39 Norm al focus setting 3 6
14 7 In de x number of images on memory car d 51 , 52, 141 num ber of p ictur es r ema ini ng on mem or y ca rd 24 , 5 9 O OK button, descripti on 11 online He lp for Capture me nu options 41 optical zoom 30 orientation sensor 59 over-exposing an image 42 override automatic exposure 38 P photo-lithium batteries 121 pictures reco rd au dio clip s 2 8 sha r e 69 take self-timer 34 take stills 27 play audio or video clips 6 4 Playback Playback button 11 using 57 Playback button, description 11 Playback menu, using 61 pop-up flash description 13 using 32 Portra it se tting 38 power Auto Power Off s etting 86 battery level icons 122 light 1 1 specifications 140 turn on/ off 17 power adapter, HP AC conne ctor on camera 14 purchasing 127 Power ON/OFF switch, description 11 Powe r/ Me mory li ght , description 11 Print button description 11 using 60 print images selecting images for direct print 60 using camera dock 133 using HP Instant Sh are 69 printer conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 problems, troubleshooting 93 product support 1 14 R rang e Exposur e Compensa tion 13 8 flas h 13 6 F- num b er 13 5 focu s 1 36 foc us set ti ngs 36 rechargeable batteri es 124 reco rd audio clips 28, 64 vid e o c lip s 2 9 red-eye reduction, description 33 remaining pictur es count 24, 59 Remembered Settings 90 rese t cam era 93 Reset S ettings 91 Resolution, setting 5 1 reviewing images 57
148 Index S Saturation, s etting 53 se l e c t in g im a g e s for dire ct pri nt 60 for HP Instant Share destinations 74 Self- Timer button 10 light 1 4 using 34 settings Re mem ber ed 9 0 Reset 91 Setu p menu, using 83 Share button 1 1, 70 Share menu customizing 70 description 73 selecti ng images for HP Instant Share de stinati ons 74 set up 70 using 73 share pictures 69 Sharpness , setting 54 Shutter button description 13 lock exposure and focus 25 Shutter Priority (T v), setting 39 shutter s peed r ange 136 slid e show , d is pla y o n T V 82 sof twa re, in stal l 2 0, 21 soun ds of came ra 84 space r emaining on memory car d 24 , 59 spe ak er , de sc ri pti on 1 3 specifications 135 stat us scr ee n 18 still pict ures, take 2 7 su ppo rt f or u ser s 11 4 T te chn i cal s uppo r t 11 4 tether to l ens cap, attachin g 15 Time & D ate, se tting 19 , 8 7 tripod m ount, desc ription 14 troubleshoot problems 93 turn on/ off came ra so und s 84 HP Instant Share 70 Ima ge Di s pl ay 2 3 microdisplay i n viewfinder 23 Playback 57 power 17 TV ( tel evi sion ) button on camera dock 131 cable to co nne ct c amer a 1 27 configuration s etting 89 conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 , 134 conn ect cam era to 8 1 conne ctor on camera 14 Tv Sh utter Prior ity, setting 3 9 U under-exposing an image 42 unload images came ra to comp uter 77 using camera dock 132 USB configuration s etting 88 conne ctor on camera 14 co nne ct or o n cam er a d ock 130
149 Inde x V vid e o c lip s delete 65 play 64 reco rd 29 Video setting 3 8 viewfinder microdisplay dio pt e r co nt ro l 19 using 23 viewfinde r, description 12 viewing images 57 W web si te s for HP 114 Wh ite Ba la nc e, se t ting 43 Windows computer bo nus so ftw ar e 20 conn ect to 7 7, 13 2 install sof tware 20 working dist ance of flash 136 Z zoom digital 3 1 optical 30 specifications 136 Zoom lever, description 11 Zoom Out and Zoom In c ontrols 11
150 Index
T rad emark a nd Cop yr ight Information © 2003 Cop yr i gh t He wl e tt-P ac kar d Dev e lopme nt C ompan y , LP Reprodu c tion, a d aptat io n, or tran s la t ion wi th ou t prior w r it t en per missi on is pr oh ib ited , e x cept as allo wed under the cop y ri ght la w s . T he inf or mat ion c ont ained in this doc umen t is sub j ect t o change w ith ou t noti ce . Hew let t-P ac k ar d shall not be li a bl e f or e r r ors cont aine d her e in or f or con seq ue nti al dam ages in conn ecti o n w ith t he f urni shin g , perf or mance , or u s e o f this m ate r ial . Mi cr os oft® and W indo ws® ar e U .S . r egiste r e d tr ade mar ks of Microsoft Co rporatio n. Appl e®, Mac int o sh®, and M ac® ar e r egis ter ed tr ad emar ks o f App le Comp u ter , In c. Mult i Med i aC ar d TM is a tr ade mar k o f Inf in eon T ec hnologi e s A G . SD logo is a tr ade mar k .
Ta b l e o f C o n t e n t s Chapt er 1: Getting St ar ted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cam er a Pa rt s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Attac hing th e Le ns C ap Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Attac hing th e Ne ck S trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 In stallin g the Ba tteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 In stallin g the M emor y Ca rd . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Tu rnin g on Powe r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 7 Unde rs tand ing the Sta tus Sc reen . . . . . . . . 18 Ch oosin g t he La ngu age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Sett ing th e Date an d T ime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Adju sting th e Dio pte r Co nt rol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9 In stallin g the So ftwa re . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Windo ws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Mac int osh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 Chapt er 2: T aking Pictures and Recording V ideo Clip s . . . 23 Using th e Displ ays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 Using th e Fo cus Br acke ts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Using Fo cu s Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 6 Tak ing S til l Pic tu res . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Rec ord ing Aud io w ith St ill P ict ures . . . . . . . . . . 28 Rec ord ing Vid eo Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 9 Using Z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 0 Op tical Zo om . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Digi tal Z oom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Using th e P op- up Fl ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using S elf-Time r Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using B urst Mo de . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 5 Using the Fo cus Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Focu s Sear ch P rior ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Hi nts o n U sing Manu al Foc us . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Sett ing the Expo sur e M ode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 2-se con d r elease p rior ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Noise Re duct ion for Lon g E xposu res . . . . . . . . .39 Using th e Cap tur e Men u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Help f or the Me nu Op tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 EV Co mpen satio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 White Bal anc e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Man ual Wh ite B alan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 AE Meter in g . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 IS O Sp eed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Digi tal Fl ash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Col or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Reso lu tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Com pres sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Satu ratio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Sh arpne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Con trast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 Chapt er 3: Review ing Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 7 Using P layb ack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Tot al Ima ge s Summ ar y S cre en . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 9 Orien ta tion Se nsor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Sel ectin g Im ag es for Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Using th e P layba ck M enu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Pl ay/R eco rd Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Pl ay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Rec ord Au dio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dele te . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Magn ify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Ima ge Inf o . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Setu p . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Chapt er 4: Using HP Ins t ant S hare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Sett ing Up the S har e Me nu o n th e Ca me ra . . . . . . . . 70 Using th e Sha re Men u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 3 Sele cting I mages f or HP Ins tant S hare Des tina tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 How HP Insta nt S hare E-m ails I mage s . . . . . . . . 75 Chapt er 5: Unloading, Printing, and Display ing Image s . . 7 7 Unlo ad ing I mage s to a Co mp uter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Prin ting Ima ges Dir e ctly fr om the C am era . . . . . . . . . 79 Displa yin g I ma ges o n a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1 Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Me nu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 3 Cam er a So und s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Eye S tart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Focu s Assis t Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 LCD B righ tne ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 In stant Revi ew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6 Auto Po wer O ff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Date & T im e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 USB Con figu rat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 TV C o nfigur ation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Lan guage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 Rem em bere d Sett ing s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 0 Rese t Settin gs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapt er 7: T roubleshooting and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 3 Rese tting th e Ca me ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Prob le ms and Solu tio ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Err or M essa ge s o n the Ca me ra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Err or M essa ge s on the Co mpute r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Cam era Self -diag nostic T ests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Gettin g Ass istan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 14
HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l HP Acce ssib ility Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 HP Photo sm art We bsite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Su ppor t P roce ss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14 Pho ne S uppo rt in the U nited Stat es . . . . . . . . . .1 16 Pho ne Su pport in Euro pe, the Middl e Ea st, and Afr ica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Oth er P hone Supp or t Wor ldw ide . . . . . . . . . . .119 Appendix A: Batter ies and Camera A cces sori es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Man aging Batte r ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 21 Ba ttery Ga uge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Ex tendin g B attery L ife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Rec har geabl e Batter ie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 24 Sle ep Time-o ut for Po wer Co n serv ation . . . . . .125 Pu rcha sing Cam era Acce sso rie s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 26 Appendix B: Camera D ock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 9 Getting S tarted with th e Do ck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 29 Dock Ligh ts an d Button s . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Unlo ad ing I mage s to a Co mp uter Usin g th e D ock . .132 Prin ting I mage s Usin g th e Doc k . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 33 Displa ying I mages o n a TV U sing the Do ck . . . . . . . 134 Appendix C: S peci fications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 5 Mem ory Ca rd Capa ci ty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 41
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 9 C hapte r 1 : Get ti ng St arted Co n gr a tula ti on s o n y o ur p ur cha s e o f this di gita l ca mer a! T his camera has many f eatur es t o enhance y our p ictur e-taki ng e x per ience , includ ing HP I nst an t S har e TM , di r ect pr in ti ng capabi lit y , manua l and automatic controls, on-c a mer a Hel p , and an opt ional cam era dock. Wi t h HP Inst an t S har e , y ou can e a sil y s e lec t ima ges in y our cam er a to b e auto mat ica lly se nt to y our favor ite dest i nat ion s (such as e - mai l a ddr esses and onlin e album s ) t he ne xt ti me y ou connect t he camer a t o y our co mput e r . Y our fr ie nds an d f a mil y ca n ea si l y r ece i v e and v i e w y ou r p i c tur es in e-m ail w ith o ut bein g bur den ed b y large f ile at ta chment s. And with the di r ect pr inting capa b ility , y ou can e asil y sel ect im age s in y o ur cam e r a to be auto mat ica lly pr i nte d the next ti m e y ou c on ne ct the camera to y our computer or dir ectly to an y HP P hotosmart pr inter or other se lect HP pr inter s without ev er co nnect ing to y our computer . T o f urther enhance yo ur e xper i ence , y ou ma y pu r c ha se an HP Photosmart 8881 camer a d ock . The ca mer a dock a l lo w s y ou t o ea s il y do wnl oa d im ag es t o a co m pu t er , se nd im age s t o a p r int er or t el e v i si o n , an d r echar ge th e came r a ba tte r i e s . It also pr o v ides a co n venient home fo r your ca mer a . NO TE A do c k inse rt is inc lu ded in y our came r a bo x . P leas e d o no t disc ar d it , bec ause it en ables your cam er a to us e the optional HP 8881 camer a dock. Se e pa ge 129 f or in struct ions on h o w t o u s e the ca me r a doc k .
10 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Camer a P arts NO TE Ref er to the pag e s in p ar enth eses af ter the pa r t n am es f or mo r e in f o r m ati o n abou t tho se par ts . # Name Des c r ipti on 1 Fl a s h bu tton (p ag e 3 2) Allows y ou t o sel ect the di ffer en t flash settings ( this bu tton only wo r k s when th e f lash a ssembl y is up) . 2 Tim e r / B urs t button (pages 34, 3 5) Allo ws you to select between NOR MA L , SELF - TI MER , SELF - T IMER - 2 SHO T S , and BU RS T mode . 3 Fo c u s button (p ag e 36) Allo ws you to select between NOR MA L , MA CRO , INFINI TY , and MANU AL fo cu s settings . MF 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 1 13 12 14 15 16 17 MF
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 11 4 Z oom le v e r wi t h Zo om O u t and Zo o m I n (pag e 30) Z ooms out the lens to the w ide angle position , and in to t he tel ephot o positio n. 5P o w e r / M e m o r y li ght ( page 17) z Sol id green â camer a is on. z Soli d amber âcamer a is wr itin g to t he memo ry car d. z Blin k in g g r een âcamer a is o ff and is c har ging th e batter i es . z Blin k in g r ed âbatter i e s d eple t ed an d camer a is s hutting d o wn . z Off âcamer a is o ff . 6M e m o r y c a r d door (page 17) Allo ws y ou access to insert or r emov e the memory ca r d. 7 Contr oller w ith and buttons Allo ws you to mo v e thr ough menus and images on the I mage Displa y . 8 OK bu t ton (pag es 40, 61) Allo ws you to displa y the Capture and Pl a yb a c k menu s and to select m enu opti ons on the Image Displa y . 9 ON/OFF s w it c h ( page 17) T ur ns th e camera pow e r on and off . 10 HP Inst ant Shar e button (p ag e 6 9) Tu r n s t h e Shar e menu on a nd off on the Image Displa y . 11 Pr in t bu tton (p ag e 60) Allo ws you to select images f or pr in ting . 12 Playb a ck button (page 5 7) Tu r n s Pla y back on an d off on th e Ima g e Displa y . # Name Des c r ipti on
12 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l 13 Liv e V i e w button (page 2 3 ) Tu r n s Live View on a n d of f on th e Im a g e Displa y . 14 Image Displa y (p ag e 2 3) Allo ws y ou to f r ame pictur es and vi deo clips u sing Live View and r e v ie w t he m afterwar d in P lay back , and to vie w a l l th e m e nus. 15 Ey e Sta rt s en so r (pag es 2 3, 84) T ur ns on t he mic r odisplay in the vi e wfinder when it detects t hat y ou ar e lookin g into the vi e w f inder . 16 View fin d e r wi th mic r odisplay (p ag e 2 3) A ll o ws y ou t o f r a me t he s u b j ect of y o ur pi ctur e or vi deo clip . 17 Di opt er contr ol (pag e 19) A dj u s t s th e f oc u s in th e mi c r o di s pl ay . (I t does NO T a ff ect the foc u s of the image or v i deo c lip that y ou ca ptur e). # Name Des c r ipti on
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 13 # Name Desc r ip tio n 1 Shu tt e r button (pages 2 7, 2 8 , 29) T ake s a pictur e and r e cor ds audio , or starts and stop s r ecor ding a v ideo clip 2 Mode selecto r (p ages 29, 38) Allows y ou to sele c t b et we en vi de o m od e and a number of diff er ent e x posur e modes f or still p i c tur es 3 N e ck str ap mount (page 1 6) Allo ws y ou to attach a neck s tr ap ( a mount is on each side of t he camer a) 4 S peaker P la y s camer a sounds and audio clips 5 Po p - u p f l a s h re l e as e (page 3 2) P o p s u p t h e fl as h as s e m b ly . T he fl as h wi l l be set to FL AS H O FF until yo u pop up the flash 6 P op-up fl ash assembly (page 3 2) Pr ov ides additi onal ligh t to im pr o ve pict u re -t a k i n g OFF Av Tv AUTO 4 5 3 6 1 2
14 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l # Na me Desc r ipti on 1M i c r o p h o n e (p ag e 28) R ecor ds a udi o clips 2 Self-Timer/ F oc u s Assist ligh t (p ag es 34, 85) z Blin k in g r ed â Se lf- T im er is ac tivate d z Sol id red â on f or shor t per i ods in lo w light co nd it io ns to i mp r o ve au to fo cus 3 USB connec to r (p ages 77, 7 9) Allo ws y ou to connec t a USB ca ble f r om the cam er a to a USB-enabled computer or pr inte r 4 T V connecto r (pag e 81) Allo ws y ou t o conne ct an opti onal Audi o/ V i deo cable f r om th e camera to a t ele vision 5P o w e r a d a p t e r connector (p ag e 126) Al lo w s y ou t o conne ct an opti onal HP A C po w er adapter t o the cam er a to e ither op e rate th e ca m e ra wi th o ut b a t teries, or r ec ha r ge th e batte r ies in th e cam er a 6 T r ipod mount Allo ws you t o mount the ca mer a to a tripod 6 7 8 1 4 5 2 3
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 15 Setu p At ta c hin g t he Lens C a p T et h er 1 W ith the f r on t o f t he cam er a f ac ing y ou , inser t the sm al l lo op of the len s cap te the r thr ou gh the neck str ap mo un t o n t he r igh t si d e of t he camer a. 2 Ins ert the long lo op of th e tether t hr oug h th e sma ll loo p an d p ull t o tig hte n th e kn o t . 3 Ins ert the long lo op of th e tether through th e len s c ap te ther mou nt . 4 P u ll the lon g lo op o v er the sides of the lens c ap and then un der the len s cap , as s hown . P ul l to tig hten the knot . 7 Cam er a dock connector (p ag e 126) All ows yo u to c o n n e ct th e c a mera to t h e op ti onal HP 8 881 camer a dock 8 B atte r y door (pag e 16) Allo ws ac cess to insert and r emo ve th e b a t te ries # Na me Desc r i pti on
16 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l At ta c hin g t h e Nec k Strap In se rt on e en d of t h e n ec k s t r ap t hr o ugh a neck strap mount . T hen th r ead the neck st ra p th r ough th e plastic tab to se c ur e it . Repeat to at tach the oth er end of the ne ck s tra p to the o t her n e ck st r ap mount . Insta llin g t he B a t teries 1 W ith the f r on t o f t he cam er a f ac ing y ou , op en the batt ery door on the bot to m of the ca me r a b y s lid i ng th e latch to th e â u nl ockâ ( ) pos i tion an d pull ing th e do o r to wa r d y ou . 2 Inse r t the batte ri es a s indi cated ins ide the door . 3 Close the bat ter y door by pu shi ng the do o r t o w ar d th e bac k o f th e camer a an d s lid ing th e la tch t o th e â lo ckâ ( ) posi tion . NO TE Digi tal cam era s use bat ter ies at a m u c h f a s t e r r ate t han f ilm cam er as . Bat ter y life in digi ta l ca mer as ca n be measu red in m i nutes a nd hours of use r a t he r than the y e ar s m or e t y p i cal o f f il m camer a s . Battery life may v a r y dramatically fr om one user t o another , de pend ing o n w ha t mo de s t he cam er a is be ing u se d in mo st f r equ en tl y . Ba tte ry lif e w ill al s o v ar y dr amat i cal l y de pen din g up on the t yp e of ba tte r ie s inst alle d in the camera . F or hints on optim i z in g bat ter y perf ormance , see Managi ng Batte r ies on p age 121.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 17 NO TE If y ou hav e r echargeabl e bat ter ies, y ou ca n use the optional HP Photosmart 8881 cam er a dock or the optional HP A C po wer adapter to r ech arge the bat ter ies w hile th e y ar e in th e camer a . F or mor e inf or m ati on a bou t these opt ional acce ssor ies, see P u r c hasing Ca mer a Ac ce s s ori e s on p age 12 6. Insta llin g t he Memor y C ard 1 W ith the camer a tur ned of f and the ba ck o f th e c am er a facing you, open the memor y car d door by s lid i ng the do or to th e right . 2 Insert t he memor y ca r d , maki ng sur e tha t it c li c ks int o p lace . 3 Close the memor y c ar d door . T o r emo v e the memor y c ard , turn the cam er a off and open the m emory car d do or , th en pu sh the m em ory car d in an d it w ill s p r in g out war d fr om th e s lot . Tu r n i n g o n Po w e r T urn the camer a on b y sli ding the ON/OFF sw itch to th e right a nd th en r eleas ing it . T h e l e ns e xt e nds , th e Im a g e Disp la y tur n s on , an d t h e P o w e r /Me mo ry li gh t tu r ns o n so li d gr een . NO TE If the P ow er/M emor y l ight i s bli nki ng r ed , the b at teries ar e v ery l o w , and th e c ame r a w ill sh ut do w n s o o n . Replace or r echarge the bat ter ies, or use the optional HP A C ad apter to p o wer the c am era .
18 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Understanding th e S tatus Sc reen When y ou turn on the camera , the HP log o scr een and then the status screen appe a r brie fly on the Image Di s play . T h e main part o f the st at u s sc r een show s the numb er of pictur es r emainin g , batte ry le v el , an d th e cu rren t s e t t i n g s fo r Fl a s h , Re s o l ut i o n , and Co mp r essi on . A n y non-d ef a ult Captur e m enu set t in gs ar e sh ow n as ico ns acr oss the to p of th e sta t us scr een (default set ti ngs for Capture menu items do not hav e ico ns ) . The stat us screen al so appe a rs f or a fe w se c onds a ny time you pr ess the Fl as h button , Ti me r / Burst butto n , Foc us b u tto n , o r open /close the p op-up flash asse mbly . Choo s ing the La ngu age T h e f irs t time y ou tur n t he came r a on , the f ollo wing s c r een appea rs and pr ompts y ou to choose a la nguage. 1 Scr ol l to th e la ng u ag e th at y ou wan t by us in g th e bu t to n s on the Contr o ller . 2 Pr ess the OK bu tton to s ele ct the high lighted l ang uage. NO TE If y ou nee d to go ba ck and chan ge th e la ng ua ge la te r , you ca n do th is i n the Setup menu . See Chap te r 6 : Usi n g th e Se tup M e nu on page 83.
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 19 Set tin g t he D a te and Time The ca mera has a clock th at recor ds th e date an d t i me at which y o u tak e eac h pi ctur e . T his info r mati on do es not a ppear in the ima ge itse lf , bu t is r ecor d ed in th e ima ge p r oper ties , w h i c h y o u can see when v ie wing the i mage i n the Im a ge I nf o scr een (pa ge 6 7) , in the Pl ay b a ck me nu scr een (p age 61) , or on your com pu te r . T he f ir s t time y ou tur n t h e cam er a on , th e f ol lo wing scr een appears af ter y ou choose th e la ngua ge . 1 Adjust th e val ue of th e h ighl ig hte d se lec ti on u sing the bu tto ns . 2 Pr e s s th e bu tto ns t o mo v e to the other selections. 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 unt il the corr ect dat e , ti m e , and date/t i m e f o r mat ar e se t . NO TE mm =mont h , dd =day , a nd yy yy =y ea r 4 Pr e s s th e OK butto n when the p rope r valu es ar e enter e d . Th e Ima ge Di spl a y then turns off . NO TE If y ou need to go back and c hang e this setting late r , y o u can do this in t he Se t u p men u . See Chapter 6 : Usi ng the Set up M e nu on page 83. Adjus tin g th e Diopter Co ntrol Th e rubber e y e piece on the v ie w f inder is a diopter c ontr ol that al low s you to a djust the focus i n the microd ispl ay . Pu t your e ye u p to the v i e wf inder , and the n tur n the di opt e r con tr o l until the inf or mation o ver l ay s (such a s the number of p ic tur es r e maining , Com p r essio n s e tting , an d Res o l ut io n setting) ar e in foc u s on the micr od isplay . The diopter c ontr ol has N O ef fe ct on t he ac t ua l p ic tur e y ou t ak e o r v i d eo c lip y o u r eco r d .
20 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Insta llin g t he Sof t w are NO TE A copy of this Userâs M anual (in sever al dif fer en t languag es) is located on the HP Photo & Imagi ng s o ftw ar e CD . L oo k in t he \docs\Readme f ile on t he CD t o see wher e the manual is lo c ated. T h e ca mer a s o f t w ar e allo w s y ou t o unl oad im age s f r om th e ca mer a , vi e w th em , pr int th em , and e- m ail th em . It also all o ws y ou to con f igur e the Sha r e m e nu on t he cam e r a. Win dow s NO TE Fo r t h e HP I n stant Sha r e component of the HP Photo & Imagin g soft war e to f unction pr op er l y on yo ur Windo ws com pu ter , yo u m u s t ha v e instal le d at le a st In te r net Explo r e r 5 . 01 on W indow s 2000 or X P , or I nter net Ex plor er 5. 01 Ser vice P ack 2 on Wi ndo ws 98 , 98 S E , or M e . 1 Cl o se all p r ogr am s and tem po r ar ily dis a ble an y v iru s pr ot ection soft war e r unni ng on y our c ompute r . 2 In se rt t he HP Pho t o & Ima ging so f t w ar e CD i nt o th e CD dr i v e of y o ur co mp ut e r . T h e ins t all ati o n w ind o w sho uld automatic al ly appea r . NO TE If the in stal l ati on win do w doe s no t app ear , cli c k St ar t , cl ick Ru n , t ype X: \Setup . e x e , wher e X is the le tter o f y our CD dri v e , then c lick OK . 3 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e . Y our W indo w s CD ma y also include b onu s soft war e f r om other manufacturer s. T o instal l an y bonus soft w ar e : 1 Click St ar t , c lic k Ru n , t y pe X:\B onu s\S etu p .e x e ,wher e X is t he le tt e r o f y our CD dr i v e , t h en c li ck OK . 2 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e .
Chapt er 1: Getting S tarted 21 Mac i ntosh 1 Cl o se all p r ogr am s and tem po r ar ily dis a ble an y v iru s pr ot ection soft war e r unni ng on y our c ompute r . 2 In ser t th e HP Ph ot o & Ima ging so f t w ar e CD in t o t he CD dri v e of y our computer . 3 Doub le -cl i ck the C D ico n o n th e com puter des k to p . 4 Double - click the i nst aller icon, a nd th en f ollow th e on -scr een in struct ions to i nst al l the soft w are . NO TE Befor e y ou can unlo ad images fr om the camera t o a Mac intosh comp uter , y ou mu st f i rs t change the USB Con figu r atio n setting to Disk Dr i v e in t he Setup men u on t he c am er a . See Chapt er 6: Usi ng the Set up Menu on page 83, a nd then s ee US B Con figu ration on page 88. Y our M acint osh C D may a lso include bonus soft w a r e fr om other man ufactur ers. T o inst all a ny bonus soft war e: 1 Do ub l e-cli ck t he Bonu s fo l d e r ic on. 2 Double - click the i ns taller icon for the bonus soft w ar e . 3 F ol low the on- scr een instructions to ins tall the soft w ar e .
2 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 3 C hapte r 2 : Ta k i n g P i c t u r e s a n d Reco rdin g Vi d eo C lips Usi n g t h e Dis pl ay s Y our cam e r a has two d isp la y s - the Micr o dis play and t he Image D is pla y . Whi che v er d ispla y is cu r r entl y o n w il l be called t he â ac t i v e displ a yâ t hr ou g ho ut thi s ma n ual: NO TE Using t he Ima ge Dis p la y cons umes a lo t o f ba ttery pow er . T o preserve bat teri es, use the micr odi splay in stead. NO TE If the mic r odispla y does not tur n on au to mati cally w hen y ou look thro ugh the vie w finder , you ma y need to cha nge the Eye St ar t setting in th e Setu p m en u . See Eye St ar t on page 8 4. Mic r odisplay ( vi e w f inde r ) Imag e Dis pl a y Al lows you to fr am e pict u re s and v ideo clips using Li ve Vie w , and to v i e w t he Captur e an d Setup me nus . Acti v ate Live View by looking thr ough the v ie w finder . T he Ey e St art sensor belo w the v ie wf inder detects y o ur e y e and aut omati call y turns on the mic r odispla y . Use t he diopt er contr ol to adj u st th e foc u s in the mic r odispla y (see pa ge 19) . Al lows you to fr am e pict u re s an d v i deo c li p s u s i ng Liv e Vie w , r e v ie w images and vi deo clips in P lay bac k , and t o vi ew all the menu s . Acti v ate Live View by pres s i n g the Live View button .
2 4 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l The follo wing tabl e describes the i nformation th a t is disp lay ed in th e Live V iew sc r een of the act i ve display when t he ca mer a sett ings ar e at thei r default values. If y ou cha n ge ot he r c ame r a settin gs, ico ns for tho se settin gs wil l a lso b e displ ayed . # Icon Desc r ip ti on 1 12 or 1:18 R emaining p i ctur es coun t or r emaining v i d eo c lip r e cor ding time (actual number s depend on ho w muc h space r emains on the memory ca r d ) . 2 Compressio n se tting (default is , or Be tter ). 3 5 MP Resolution se tting (defa ult is 5 MP ). 4 A shaking hand icon w ill appear when you pr ess the Shutter butt on half- wa y do wn while taking a s till pi ctur e if the camer a detects t hat the pi c tur e is lik ely t o be bl urry due to the lo ng exposur e that will b e r equi r ed . T h er e f or e , y ou ma y wa n t t o u se t he f l ash (s ee Us i n g th e P o p - u p Flas h on page 3 2) or a tr ip od. 5 1/2 F12 .4 The sh utter s pee d and F - number . T h is appears when y ou pr ess the Sh utter button half - w a y down while taking a s till p i ctur e. 6 or z Battery level whe n using b atteries (see B attery G auge on page 122 ). z A C pow er when us ing th e opti onal HP A C adapte r or Cam e ra Do c k. 1 2 4 5 3 6 7 8
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 5 Using t h e F ocus Brac k ets The t wo br ack ets in the midd le of the act i ve di spl ay scr een sh o w t h e f o c u s r egi on f o r t he p i ctur e y ou a r e ta kin g or t he vi d eo c l i p y o u a re re c o rd i n g. Wh en y o u p re s s t h e Shutter bu tt on hal fw a y do wn , th e c ame r a u se s th is r egi o n t o mea sur e and the n loc k the fo cu s. NO TE In l o w li g ht con diti ons , t he r e d f oc u s as sis t l i gh t on t he f r ont o f the came r a (s ee pag e 14) ma y tu r n on b r i e fl y to he l p t he c a me r a f o c u s. If y ou ar e in a si tu a ti o n w he r e y o u do not w ant the f o c u s a ssis t l igh t t o tur n on , yo u can tur n it o ff in th e Setup menu (see F oc us As sis t L igh t on page 85) . T h e fo c us br ac k e ts tur n gr een w hen th e r egi on in th e b r a c k ets is in f o c us an d t h e cam e r a can l oc k t he f o c u s, bu t tur n r ed wh en the ca me r a i s u nabl e to focus. z If the f oc u s br ac k ets tur n r ed , r e le a se th e S hutte r b u tt on , r e - fr am e t he subject for y our pictur e or vi deo cli p , and then pr ess the Shutter b ut to n h a l f way d own a g a i n . I f th e fo cus br ack ets c onti nue to t urn r ed af ter sev er a l tr ies, there ma y n ot be e no u gh co n tr as t in t he f o c u s r e gi on . T ry u sin g a techni que called F ocus Lock to f ocu s on an object about the same d i stan ce awa y but i n a hig her -con trast r egion, th en po in t the camer a at the ob j ect y o u w er e or i gina ll y try ing to photogr a ph (s ee Us i n g Focus Lo ck on p age 2 6 ) . 7 or z FL AS H OF F when the pop-up flash assembly is down. z AU TO F L A S H ( defaul t flas h se t t i ng wh e n th e p o p- up fl ash assem bly is up) . 8 F oc u s br ac k ets (see t he ne xt sec tion belo w) . # Icon Desc r ip ti on A
2 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l z If the f o c u s br ac k ets turn r e d an d the MA CR O ico n b lin ks on t he a cti v e disp la y , one o f the f ollo w ing is tr ue: ⢠The ca m era is set to th e NORMAL foc us r an ge but dete ct s the fo cus i s close r t ha n th e n orma l r a ng e . ⢠T h e camer a is set to the MA CR O ( c lo se-up) f oc u s r ange bu t de t ects the f ocu s is f a rthe r a w ay than t he ma c r o r a nge . In this case , th e camer a w ill no t t ak e a p i ctur e if it canno t f ind f oc u s . NO TE No focu s br ack ets appe ar if the c amera is set to MA NU AL F OCU S (se e U sing the F ocu s Settings on page 36) . Us ing F ocus Lock Fo c u s L o c k allo w s y o u t o f o c u s on a su bj ec t th at is n ot in t h e center of the picture , or to c apture action shots mor e quickly b y pr e-f oc u sin g i n t h e ar e a w h e r e the a ct i on w ill occ ur . Y o u can also use Focus Lo ck to help achiev e f ocu s i n lo w lig ht or lo w con tr ast situ ati ons . 1 F r ame the s ubject f or y our pic tu r e w ithin the focu s br ack ets. 2 Pr ess t he S h utter button h alf w ay do wn to lo c k the fo c us and ex p o s u re . 3 Cont i nue to h old th e Shutter but ton hal f wa y dow n wh ile you r e-fr ame or adjust your s ubj ect fo r pr oper posi tionin g . 4 Pr e s s th e Shutter but ton a l l t h e wa y d o wn to ta k e th e pictu re .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 7 T a kin g Sti ll P ic tures You can ta ke a picture almo st any time the camer a is o n, re gar dle s s o f wh at i s be i ng s how n on the ac ti v e dis p lay . 1 Rota te the Mode se lector to AU TO or anoth er of th e exp osu r e mode s (see Set ting the Expo sure M ode on pag e 3 8 ). 2 Po p up the f la sh as sembl y (see pag e 32) . 3 Fra me the su bject fo r you r pic tu re in the active displa y. 4 Hold t he cam era steady ( especially if usin g z o om ) a nd press the Shu tter but ton ha l fwa y d o wn . The c amera m easures an d t he n l oc ks the f o c u s and e x pos ur e (t he f oc us b r ac k ets w ill tu r n gr een i f t he c a mer a is a b le t o f oc u s , se e p ag e 25 ) . If an i con o f a sh akin g h and ( ) ap pe ar s in th e a c ti v e dis pl a y , y o u m a y w a n t to e ith e r us e t he p op-u p f l a sh o r set th e cam er a on a tr ipod or stable su rface , otherwise the pi cture might be blu r ry . 5 Pr ess t he Shutte r b ut ton a l l th e wa y down to ta ke t he pict ure. Y ou w il l hear a sh utt er cli c k w he n the cam er a tak es th e pic t u r e. After a pi ct ure is ta k en, the ima ge app ea rs f or sever al se co nd s in th e a cti ve disp l a y . T h is is cal led Ins t an t R e vi e w . Y ou can delete th e image du ring Instant R e v i e w b y pr essing the OK button. If y ou pr ef er , y ou can tu r n off Ins tant R e v ie w in the Setup me nu (see Instan t R e v ie w on page 86 ) . T o r e v ie w the pi ctu r es y ou hav e tak en , press the Pl ay b ac k button (se e Us i n g Playb ack on p age 5 7) . O FF Av Tv AUTO AUTO 1 2
2 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l NO TE If you r ele ase t he Shu tter button only hal f wa y after t aki ng a p i c tur e , th e f oc us an d e xpo su r e me asu r eme n ts fr om the pr e v iou s pi ctu r e ar e r etained. Y ou can t hen pr ess the Shutte r button al l the wa y do wn ag ain and ta k e anothe r picture w it h th e sam e focu s a nd e xp os ur e as the pr e v ious pictur e . Y ou ca n c onti nue to do th i s to captu r e a seq uen ce o f p i c tu r es u sin g t h e same f oc u s and e x po sur e. T his is h elp f ul w hen r ap i dl y t ak ing p i c tur es an d f or cap tur ing imag es f o r panor amic stitc hing . Recordin g Audi o wit h Still Pic tures Ther e are t wo w a ys to atta ch an audio cli p to a sti l l picture: ⢠R e co r d t he a u di o w h il e y o u a r e t a king t h e p ic tur e (e x pl ained in t his sec ti on). ⢠Add a n audio an no tation to the pi ct ure later (or r e - r ecor d the audio that was captu r ed when the pi ctu r e w as ta k en) . F or de ta ils o n how to do th is, se e Play/ R ec ord Au d i o on pa ge 6 4. NO TE Th e met ho d desc r ibed in this secti o n is no t av ailabl e in Self- T imer or Bu rst mod es. 1 Pr e s s th e Shutter but ton a l l t h e wa y d o wn to ta k e th e pictu re . 2 Co nti nu e to hol d the S hu tter button down to r ec ord the au dio c lip . A mi cr op ho ne i con ( ) an d a udio co un te r appea r on the ac tive display du r ing r eco r d i ng. 3 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g , re l e a s e t h e Shutter button, ot her w is e the au di o w il l contin ue r e cor ding fo r u p to 6 0 seco nds or un til t he me m o ry ca r d f ill s up , w h i c he v er co me s fi r s t . T o play back, dele te , or r ec or d new audio cli ps, use th e Re c o rd Au d i o se ct ion i n th e Pl ay b a ck men u (s ee U sing th e P la y bac k Men u on page 61 ) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 2 9 Record in g Vi de o C lips 1 R ota te th e Mode selec tor to Vid e o mo de. 2 F r ame th e s u b jec t f or y o u r v i de o i n t he active displ ay . 3 Pr ess t he Shutt er butt o n ha lfw a y dow n to meas ur e an d lock foc us (e x posur e is co n tin ually m ea sur e d an d adj u sted du r in g r ecor ding). 4 T o s t a r t re c o rd i n g , p res s t h e Shutter bu t ton al l the w a y dow n and r el ease it. A cou nter a n d RE C appe ar in t he act iv e dis play . 5 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g, p re s s t h e Sh u tt er b u tt on al l t he w ay do wn ag ain . Othe rw ise , th e camer a w ill a u tom ati ca ll y s top r ecor din g w hen the ma x imum vi deo clip length of appr o x ima tely 1 mi nu te i s r eache d , or the memor y ca r d is f ull , whic he v er comes f irs t (note that ma x imum clip length can v ary dependi ng on scene c ontent) . After r ec ordin g h as sto ppe d, the first frame of the video cl ip and PROC E SSIN G.. . appe ar on the active disp lay . Whi le it is pr o c ess in g, y ou can delete the v ideo cl i p b y pr essi ng the OK button. Y ou c an use Pl ay b a ck to revie w t he vide o cl i ps you ha v e ta k en. Se e Pl ay on pa ge 64. NO TE If you use the z oom , motor no i se fr o m optica l z oomin g will be recor ded i n the audio p or tion of a video cl ip. Thu s, for best audio qualit y , do not use the z oom whi le re c o rd i n g vi d eo. Av Tv AUT O Av Tv AUTO AUTO
30 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Usi n g Z oo m NO TE The mor e you z oom in on the subj ect of y our p i ctur e , the more th at ev en sma l l mov em ents of the c amera are ma gnif ie d ( this is cal l ed â came r a shak e â ) . S o , es pe c i a ll y at ful l tele photo z oom ( 8x) , y ou r e al ly nee d to hold the cam era steady in or der to take a p icture that is not blurr y . If an i co n o f a s hakin g h an d ( ) ap pe ar s in th e a c ti v e disp l a y , y o u ma y w ant t o se t th e camer a o n a tr ipod o r stable s u rfac e , other wise th e pictur e will likely be bl urr y . O pti cal Z oom Op ti ca l z oom w o r ks lik e th e z o om on a tr aditi o na l f ilm c ame r a , w ith p h ysi cal le ns elements mo ving ins ide the c am er a to make the subject of y ou r pictur e appe ar clos er . Pr e s s Zo o m O u t and Z oom In on the Zoom le v e r t o mo v e the le ns be tw e en w ide an gle (1 x) an d teleph oto (8 x) p osi tions. Whene v er the z oom le v er is pr essed , a z o om met er appe ars at the b ot tom of the active disp lay . A white ba r i n the m iddle of the z o om met er separates optical and digi tal z oom . T his z oom me te r is n ot s ho w n when v i d eo c lips ar e b ein g r ecor d ed . NO TE If the cam er a is set to MA CR O f ocu s, you can on ly z oom to 3 . 5x. The z oom meter will conse quently look di f fer ent in Macro mode , with a wider whi te ba r in the middl e of th e meter . MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 31 Dig ital Z oom Unli ke optical z oom, digita l z oom uses no mov ing lens pa rts. T h e c ame r a es s en t i al l y c r op s t he i ma ge t o gi v e an a p pear a nc e of the subject of the pic tu r e being an addi tional 1.2 x to 7x larger . NO TE Y ou ca nnot us e dig ital z oom while r ecor ding v ideo cl i ps. 1 Pr e s s th e Z oom In contr ol to opt ically z oom in to th e max imum lev el , then r elease the but ton . 2 Pr e s s Zoom I n ag ain and h o ld it until you r ea ch the desir ed si z e in t he ac ti ve dis pl a y . A y ell o w f r ame sur r oun ds t he ar ea o f the im ag e that w il l b e c aptured . The Re so l ut ion n u mb e r o n t h e le f t si de of the screen al so be c omes sm aller as y o u di git all y z oom . F or e x am pl e , 2. 9 appe ars in pla ce of 5 MP , indi ca ting that t he imag e is be ing r e duced to a si z e of 2. 9 M e g a p i x e l s . 3 W he n th e y e ll o w f r ame is at th e desir ed si z e , pr es s th e Shutter but to n to ta ke the pictu r e . T o turn d igital z oom off and r etu r n to opt ical zoom , pr ess Zoom Out until dig ita l z oomi ng stops. R elease the z oom contr ol , and th en pr ess i t ag ai n. NO TE D ig i t al zo o m re d u c e s th e re s o l u t i o n o f a n i ma g e, so y our pictu r e will ten d to be more p i xilated th a n th e sa me im ag e t aken wi th o ptic al zoom. I f you just in ten d to e - ma i l an ima ge o r post it t o a w e b site , this lo ss of r eso luti on w ill n ot be n oti cea ble , bu t in situati ons w he r e t he highe s t qu ality co unts ( suc h a s pr inting), limit the u s e o f di gi tal zo o m.
3 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Usi n g t h e P op-u p Fl a s h NO TE Th e fl a s h wi l l n ot work wh i l e re c o rd i n g vi d e o c l i p s . T h e f la sh is t ur ned o ff and w ill no t f ir e un til y o u man ual ly po p it u p b y sliding the pop-u p f la sh re l e a s e o n t o p o f the c amera . When the flash is po pp ed-u p , it be gins t o c har ge a nd is autom at ical ly set to the AU TO F L A S H se tting . T o change the flash set ti ng , pr ess the Fl a s h butt on on the ba c k of th e ca mer a until the desi red set t ing app ea rs on the activ e disp lay . The follo wing table de sc r ibes the diff er e nt fl as h setting s . NO TE If y ou chan ge the flash s et ti ng, the ca mer a w ill r emain in t ha t s etting until y ou change it or turn off the camer a . Icon Setting Desc r i pti on AU TO F L A S H The ca me ra m easur es l ight and use s the flash if necessary. AU TO W I T H RED -EYE RED UCTION Th e camera measur es li ght and uses the f lash w it h r ed-e ye r educti on if necessary (see Not e bel o w f o r f urt he r des c r ipti on of re d - ey e re d u c t i o n ) . FLASH ON The ca mera a lwa ys flashe s. I f the light is behind your subje ct, you can use this setting to increase the light on the front of your sub ject. T his is called â fill-flash.â OFF Av Tv AUTO MF A A
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 33 T o turn t he flash off , pr ess the p op-up flash assemb ly down un ti l it sna ps sh u t . Whe n the f la sh is off , the FLASH OFF ico n appe ars at the top of the Live View sc r e en . NO TE The r ed-e ye phenomenon is cau sed b y light f r om t he fl ash re flecting off the s ub jects â e y es, which someti mes makes a humanâs or ani m alâ s e yes appe ar r ed i n th e capt ur ed i mag e . When you us e a flash sett in g with Re d - e ye Re d uc ti o n , the camer a flashes t wice , mini m i z ing t he r ed-e y e in t h e ca p tu r ed ima ge s o f h uma ns o r ani mal s . It wil l ta ke l ong er to ta ke a pict u re usi ng Red - eye Re d u c t i o n , bec ause the shut ter is del ay ed for th e ad diti o nal f l a sh . In tu r n , ma k e sur e y o ur su b j ec ts w ait f o r the s e co nd f lash. FLASH ON WI TH RED -EYE RED UCTION The c a m e ra wi l l a l ways fi re t h e fl a s h wi th r e d-e y e r eductio n , no matter the lighting conditi ons (see Not e belo w for f u rther d e s c ri pt io n o f red - eye red uc t io n) . NI GH T Th e c a m e ra fire s th e fl a s h i f n e c e s sa r y to illuminate obj ects in the f o r egr ound. It then contin ues to expose a s if the flash had not f ir ed to gather the back gr ound. NI GH T WI TH RED -EYE RED UCTION Th e c a m e ra fire s th e fl a s h i f n e c e s sa r y (u s i n g red - eye red u c t i o n ) t o i l l u m i n a te obj ects in the f or egr ound . It then contin ues to ex po s e as i f th e flas h h ad no t f ired to gather the back gr ound ( see Note belo w f or f urther desc r ipti on of r ed-e ye r e duction). Icon Setting Desc r ip ti on
34 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Us ing Sel f- T imer Mode 1 Secure the ca mera to a tripod or set it on a stable surface . 2 Pr ess t he Tim er/ B u rs t ( ) b utton until SELF - TI MER or SELF - TIM ER â 2 SHO T S appear s in the active d ispl ay. 3 Frame the subject in the active d isplay. 4 The n ex t s te ps depe n d o n wh at yo u ar e ca ptu r in g: Sti l l pict u re 1 Pr ess t he Shutter butt on halfwa y do wn f or Fo c u s L o c k (ca mer a me asures , then locks the focu s and e xposure). The camera w ill hold these settings until it tak es the pi ctur e . 2 Pr ess t he Shutter butt on al l the wa y down . A 10 - second count do wn a ppear s on the ac ti v e displ a y and the Self - T imer ligh t on t he fr ont o f the camer a blinks f o r 10 se conds b ef or e the c amera tak es the pictur e . If you set SELF - TIM ER â 2 SHO T S , the Self - Timer l igh t blink s for a f e w mor e seconds until the second pictu re is taken. NOTE If you imm ed iate ly pre ss the Shutter button all th e way do wn wi tho ut u sin g F ocus Lo ck , th e cam er a will lock focus and exposu re just before the end of the 10-sec ond coun tdown. This is useful when one or more sub jects will be e ntering the p icture during the 10- second cou ntdow n perio d. Y ou cannot recor d audi o when using the Se lf - T imer , but you can add a n audio clip lat er (see page 6 4). Vide o cl i p 1 R otat e the Mode selecto r to Vide o mode . 2 T o start re cor ding , pr ess the Shutter button an d then r el ea s e i t . A 10 -s e con d cou n t do w n a p pe ar s in th e acti v e displa y , and then th e v ideo w ill st art r e cor d ing. 3 T o st op r ecor ding the v ideo c lip , pr ess the Shutte r button again . o r let it time out b y itself (see page 2 9) MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 35 Usi n g B u r s t M ode Burst al low s you to tak e mult iple st il l pic tu res in a r o w as quickly as the c a mer a p oss ibly c a n . Thi s feat ur e i s not av ail able for video c lips. 1 Pr e s s th e Tim e r /B u rst but ton until BU RS T a ppe ars i n t he ac ti ve disp la y . 2 F rame the s ubject an d pr ess th e Sh utt er bu tt on all the w a y do w n an d h o ld it . 3 The ca m er a takes pictu r es as quickly as p oss i ble and as man y as the m emory bu ffer c an hold (t y p ically b et ween 4 and 6 ) or un ti l the Shutte r button i s r e le ased (w h iche ver ha ppens fir st). T h e Im ag e Dis p la y r emain s o ff dur ing the b ur st ca p tur e , an d then after the burst pi ctur es hav e been tak en , each imag e appea rs one at a t im e on th e Ima ge D is play . I f you hav e Inst ant Review t ur n ed o ff ( pa ge 8 6), t he Ima g e Dis pl a y w ill s t a y o ff f o r a fe w second s while the ca mer a pr ocesses the ima ges, then it re t u r n s t o Li ve Vi e w . NO TE Y ou can use the f lash w ith Bur st mode, but it w il l s lo w do w n t h e r at e at w h i c h t h e pi ctu r es a r e ta k en . F or t he fastest bu rst r a te, turn of f the flash, but be awar e of c a m e r a s h a ke i f t h e s c e n e i s d a r k ( y o u m i g h t w a n t t o u s e a tr ipo d t o st ab iliz e the camer a) .
3 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l U sing the F ocus Se ttings The Fo cu s butto n le ts y o u t oggl e be t w een f o ur f oc u s setting s on the camer a. The follo wing tabl e describes each of the fo cu s ra n g e s e t t i n gs o n th e c a m e ra. Icon Set ting Des cr ipt i on Non e NOR MA L Use when tak ing pi ctur es of subj ects greate r t han 0. 8 m (3 1. 5 in) a w a y . Au t o f oc u s is li mited to a r ange of 0.8 m (31. 5 in) to inf init y . T his is t he def a ult f oc u s se tting. MA CR O Use wh en t akin g clos e -up pi c tu r es o f sub j ects le ss than 0.8 m (31. 5 in) aw a y . In this mode , the cam er a will not tak e a pic tur e if it cannot f ind f ocu s (the foc u s brac k ets tur n r ed in the acti v e displ ay an d an er r o r message a p pe ar s). Au to f oc u s h a s a di s t a nc e r ang e o f 0.1 to 0.8 m (3 .9 to 31.5 in). Z oom positi on is li mit ed to a r ange of wide to 3. 5x. INFINI TY Use when taking pictur es of distant obj ects and landscapes. F oc u s r ange is limited to a small r egio n near inf inity . MF MANU AL FOC US All ows you to ste p m a nual ly th roug h t he fu ll f o c u s r ange . U se t h e b u tt ons t o adju s t the foc u s. Y ou ca n deter mine the foc u s b y obse rving the image in the acti v e displa y and b y a meter that appears on the r ight si de of the acti v e di spla y . F or mor e infor mati on , se e Hi nt s on U s in g M a nu a l F ocus on page 3 7. MF MF
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 3 7 F o cus Se ar ch P r i o ri ty When the c am e r a is set to NORM AL or MA CR O fo cu s, i t b e g i n s se arch i n g fo r fo c us from th e l a s t fo cus p os it i o n. H owever , you can u se the butt ons to c ha ng e t his b eh av i or . T his featur e is usef ul when t her e ar e multi ple object s at d iffer ent di stan ces in t he f oc us r egi o n . z Ho l din g t h e bu tt o n w hil e p r es sin g t he S h utter hal f w ay do w n cau se s th e came r a to begin se ar ching f or f oc us f r om th e farth e st po sitio n (inf inity in NORM AL mode a nd 0. 8 m i n MA CRO mode ) , thu s mak ing t he c amera mor e li kel y to f ocu s on an object in the ba c kgr ound. z Hol ding th e button w hile p r essing th e Sh utt er halfwa y do w n cau se s th e came r a to begin se ar ching f or f oc us f r om the ne arest p os it ion ( 0. 8 m i n NORMAL mode and 0.1 m i n MA CRO mode ) , thu s mak ing t he c amera mor e li kel y to f ocu s on an object in the fo r egr ound . Hint s o n U sing Manua l F ocus z Ma k e sure to ad ju st the diop ter control pr oper l y befo r e u sing m anu al f o c u s w ith the m i cr odisp la y ( see page 19) . z T o f ind t he b est fo cu s p osit ion , a djust th e focus so tha t th e ima ge lo oks lik e it is in f oc u s o n the a c ti v e displ a y . F r o m t his posi tion, pr es s the button u nti l the i ma ge begi ns to blu r , then press the button un ti l the image be gi n s to blur . T h en set the fo c u s pos iti on half w ay betw een th e locati on s w her e the i mage be ga n to blur . z T o loc k f oc us f o r a s et o f p i c tur e s , l et the cam er a f ind t he be st f o c u s u sing the NOR MA L s etting , t he n s w itch t o MAN U AL FO C US . T he f o c u s w ill then be loc k ed a t that dis t ance until y o u adj u st it man uall y o r sw it c h to ano the r fo c u s setting .
3 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Set ting t he Exposur e Mod e The Mode se lector lets y ou ch oose be t w e e n si x e xp o sur e mo des f or still pic t u r es. (A seven t h s e t t i ng, Vid e o mo de , is e xp lain ed o n p a ge 2 9 .) The exposu r e mode set ting det er mi nes h o w the camer a sele cts se tting s suc h as aper ture (F -number ) and shutt er spee d for th e giv en scen e br ig htness. T o c ha ng e t he e x po sur e m ode , tur n t he Mo de sel ec tor to th e se t tin g y ou w a nt . The f oll o win g ta b l e des c r ibe s eac h o f th e e xposu r e mode se tting s on the ca me r a . Ico n Setting Des cr ipt i on AU T O Th e c amer a aut omaticall y selects an ape rtur e and shutter speed . AC T I O N Th e c am era bi a s e s towa rd fas t er sh u t t er speeds and higher IS O spe eds to stop acti on . When the ca mer a is set to this opti on , the ISO Sp ee d menu option is gr a y ed-out in the Capture menu . This mode al so has a â2 -se cond re lease priori t yâ fe a t u r e ( s ee p a ge 39 ) . LAN D S C A P E Th e cam er a bi a ses to w ar d smaller apertur es and lo w er ISO spee ds for bet ter d epth of f oc us and quality . When the camer a is set t o this opti on, the IS O S pe ed me n u o pt i o n i s gr a y ed-out in the Capture menu . PORT R A IT Th e cam er a bi a ses to w ar d w i der apertures t o blur t he back gr ound . VIDE O Camer a r ecords v i deo c lips (see Re co rdi n g Vid e o C l i p s on p age 29) O FF Av Tv AUTO AUTO
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 39 2 -s eco nd r ele as e pri o ri t y W he n t he e xpos ur e mo de is se t t o AC T I O N , y ou ca n ta ke m ultiple p ictur es in r ap i d succe ssi o n w ith ou t h av ing to w ait f or the ca m era to me asu r e f ocus and exp os ure f or e ach pict u r e . R e lea se an d the n r e-pr es s t he Shu tter bu t ton a ll the wa y dow n w it hin 2 se con ds afte r taking a pi c tur e , and the came r a t ak e s t he ne xt p ictu r e u si ng th e s am e f oc us a n d e xpo sur e measu r emen ts as the pre vious pictur e . Nois e Reduc ti on for Lon g Expo sures A t long e r shu tte r spee ds the camer a w ill a ut o ma ti call y tak e a seco n d e x po sur e w it h t he sh utter c l o se d in o r der to m ea sur e and r e duce the n o ise (gr ain y loo k) in t he ima ge . In t hese ca se s, t he e xp o sur e w i ll s ee m t o ta k e tw i ce a s l on g as e xpec t ed . F o r e x am pl e , in a 1-s econ d e x po sur e , the a cti ve di spl a y w ill s ta y dar k f o r 2 seco nd s un til t h e no ise r educ t i on f r ame is e xpose d . This mea ns that at longer shutt er sp ee ds, y ou ma y not be able to ta k e qui te as many shot s ba ck -to - b ack. Tv SHUTTE R PRI O R IT Y Le ts you sel ect the shutte r speed in Live View usi n g t h e b utt ons , w h il e th e c a me r a se lects the appr opr i ate a pertur e setting. This allo ws y ou to cr eate special eff ects using the shutt er s pee d (such as blur r ing the mo v ing w at er in a s tr e am) . Av AP ER TURE PRI O R IT Y Le ts y ou sel ect t he apertur e setting (F -num b e r) i n Live View us i n g th e buttons , w hile the camer a selects the appr opr i ate shu tter speed. T his allo ws y ou to contr ol the depth o f f i eld (fo r e x a mple to blur the bac k gr ound) . Ico n Setting Des cr ipt i on
40 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Usin g t he C a pture Me nu The Capture menu a llow s you to a djust vari ous cam era sett in gs t ha t aff ect t he q ual iti e s o f t he imag e s and v i deo cl ip s y ou cap tu r e w ith y our cam er a , suc h a s t he ir e xposu r e , col o r , an d re s o l u t io n. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Capt ure menu , press the Live View button , an d then pr ess OK . If t he I m age Dis p la y is alr ead y off , you can just si mply pr ess OK . 2 U se the bu ttons t o scr oll thr o u gh th e Captu re menu options. 3 E ither pr ess the OK bu tt on t o s el ec t a hi ghli g h ted o pti o n an d dis pl a y its su b-men u , o r u se th e b utto ns to change the se tting for the highlig hted op tion withou t going to its sub- me nu . 4 W it hin a sub -menu , use the bu t tons an d then the OK but ton to ch a ng e th e set t i ng for the Capture me n u option . 5 To e x i t t h e Captu r e menu , h ighl ight t he EXIT CA PT URE ME NU option and pr es s the OK button. NO TE Some of the setting s in the Capture menu ar e gra yed ou t w he n the came r a is se t to VID E O mode , meanin g that y o u can n ot u se tho s e setting s whe n r ecor ding v i deo c lips . Scr e en one Scr een t wo
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 41 Help for th e Menu Optio ns Hel p ... is the last opt ion in eac h of the Captu re su b-me n u s . T h e Help ... option pr o vi des information ab out that Capture menu op tion a nd it s sett in gs. F o r e x a mple, if you pr ess OK when Hel p ... is hig hli ght ed in the AE M e ter i ng sub -m enu , the AE M eteri ng Hel p scr een i s d ispl ay ed , as show n. U se the bu ttons t o sc r oll thr ou gh th e Help sc r eens . T o e x it th e H elp an d r eturn to the pa rt icul a r Capture sub -me n u , pr ess the OK but ton .
4 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l EV Com pens a tion In difficul t lighting conditions, you can u se EV (Ex p os ur e Valu e) Compe nsa tion to o verride the automa tic exposure setting that the camera makes. EV C om pensa ti on is usef ul in s cenes that contai n many light ob jects (l ik e a w hit e ho u se in t he sno w) o r ma n y dar k ob jec ts (lik e a bl a c k ca t o n a da r k ba c k gr oun d). Sce ne s con tainin g man y light objects or man y dar k objects c ould turn out gra y w ithout the use of EV Compensat ion . F or a scene with man y li gh t o b j ec ts , inc r ea se t he EV C om p ensa ti o n t o a po s iti v e number to pr o duc e a bri ghter r esult . F o r a sc ene with man y dark obj ects, decr ease the EV Compens ation to dark en t he scene to be cl oser to b lack. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t EV C ompe nsa tio n . 2 In the EV C ompensatio n menu, use the b utto ns to change the EV settin g in 0.33 steps f rom -3.0 to 3.0. The new setting is appl ied to the Live View scr ee n behind the me nu, so you should be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pictu re. 3 Pr e s s OK to save th e set ti ng an d retu rn to th e Capt ur e menu . If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f 0 (z er o) , the number value will app ea r in the Liv e View screen ne xt to the ico n . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til t he came r a is tur ned o ff (u nles s EV C om pensa ti on is check ed i n the Rememb er ed Set t ings me nu - see page 90) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 43 White Bal ance Differ ent kinds of lighti ng condit ions cast dif fer ent colors. F or e xam pl e , sunli ght is mo r e blue , wh ile indo or tungs ten li ght is mo r e y ell o w . S cen es do mina t ed b y a s in gle co l o r m a y r eq uir e an ad j u s tmen t of the whit e bal an ce se tting t o h elp the camer a r epr o d uce colors mor e accurately and ens u r e th at wh ites appe ar white i n th e f inal pictur e. Y ou c an als o ad ju st the whi te bala nce to pr oduce cr eativ e effects. Usi ng t he Sun or Tu n g s t e n sett in gs ca n produce a warmer look to the pictur e , and the Shade set ting c an make a suns et picture look mor e or ange. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Whi t e B ala n ce . 2 In the White Balance me nu , use the butt ons to high li gh t a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View screen be hind the menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ur e. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting an d r e tur n t o the Captur e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : Ico n Setting Descr iption Non e A u t o The camer a automa tically identifie s and corrects for scene illuminanc e. This is the def ault setting. Sun The cam er a ba lanc es color assumi ng i t is outdoor s under su nn y or br i ght c lo udy conditions . Shade The cam er a ba lanc es color assumi ng i t is outdoor s in shade , in dar k cl ou d y conditions, or at dusk .
44 HP P ho t osma rt 9 45 U se r âs Man u al If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f Aut o , the icon for the se tt in g ( in the table ab o ve) will appe a r i n th e Live Vi e w sc r een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til the came r a is tur ned o ff (unle ss Whit e B a la nc e is c h ec k ed in th e Rem em b e re d S e t t i ng s menu - see page 90) . Manual White B alance If you se lect the Man ua l option , the Man ual W hite Ba la nce scr een dis play s . The Live View port ion of th e scr een sho ws the c olor ti nt fr om the pr e v ious Man u al W hi t e B a l a n c e se tting that w a s ma de . NO TE To r e s t o r e t h e p r ev i o u s Man ual W hite Ba la nce s ettin g , sim pl y pr es s t he OK button i n th e M an ual Whi te B ala n ce sc r een wi t hou t pr essi ng th e Shutte r button. Tu n g s t e n The ca mer a b alanc es c olor based on incandescen t or halogen lighti ng (typ i call y fo u nd i n ho m e s ) . F l uor escen t T he ca mer a b alanc es c olo r based on f luor escent ligh ting . Manual The camer a calc ulates a c ust om White Balance based on your target image ( see the fo l lowi n g su bs e ctio n ) . Ico n Setting Descr iption
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 45 To c h a n g e t h e Man ual Whit e Balance set ti ng: 1 P oint th e cam er a at a whi te or g r ay target (s uch as a piece o f p ape r ), ma king sur e th at the r egi on insi de t he f oc us br ack ets enc ompass es the whi te or gr a y tar get . 2 Pr ess t he S h utter b utton (t he ca mer a w ill not t ake a pic tur e ) . T h e camer a t he n cal c ul ate s a c u sto m White Balance set t ing based on the r eg ion in s i de th e f ocus br ack ets. Du ring th e calc ulatio n , PROC ESSIN G... is disp lay ed on t he s cr e en. When the ca lcul atio n i s c omple te , th e c olo r t i nt i n Live V iew chan ges to match the new Manu al Whi te B ala nc e setting , and WHITE B AL ANCE SE T is disp l a y e d . 3 If nee de d , r epe at s tep s 1 an d 2 un til y o u ge t th e des ir ed Man ual W hite Ba la nce s etting . 4 W he n y ou ar e sa tisf i e d w ith t h e Ma n ua l set t ing you ha v e made, pr es s the OK but ton to e xit th e Manu al W hite Balance s c re e n a n d re t u r n to th e Ca p t ure men u . AE Meterin g T his s etting al lo w s y o u t o s pec ify w hi ch r egio n o f a s cene the came r a w ill u se t o cal c u la t e th e e xpos ur e . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct AE Mete r in g . 2 In the AE Me t er i ng me nu , use the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu .
46 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Center - W eight ed , the icon for th e set t i ng ( i n the tab le ab ove) w il l appea r in the Live View scr e en. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til the ca mer a is tu r ned o ff (unles s AE Me ter ing is ch ec k ed in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) . Ic on Setting Desc r ip tio n Ave ra g e The camer a u ses the en tir e scene r egi on to mea sur e an d cal cu l a t e e x po sur e . U se t h is s et t i n g wh e n you wa nt ever y t h i ng in the pict u re to be u sed equally wh en calculating e xposure . None Ce nter - We i g h t e d T he c ame r a u ses a l ar ge ar ea i n t h e ce n t e r o f the scene re gion to measur e and ca lcul ate e xposur e. This setting is good to use when the subj ect is in the center of the f r ame . Expos ur e w ill be b ased mor e on the sub ject th an on its surr oundings . T his is t he def a ult setting . Sp ot The camer a u ses a small ar e a in th e center o f the scene re gion to measur e and ca lcul ate e xposur e . This c an be usef ul in backlit scenes or w h en th e su bj ect is v ery da r k o r l i gh t compar ed to the re st of the scene . When using this setting , put the sub ject of the pi ctur e in the center of t he vi e wfinder , then pr ess t he Sh utter button halfwa y do wn to l o ck t he exposur e and f ocu s on the spot in the c ent er , and then r e compose the scene as desir ed .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 4 7 I S O Speed T his se tting adj usts th e sensiti vity o f th e came r a to l igh t . Wh en IS O S pee d is s et t o Aut o , the ca mera select s the best ISO spee d for the sc ene. NO TE If the came r a is in AC T I O N , LA N D S C AP E , or VIDE O mode, th e IS O S pee d wi l l a lway s b e s e t to Au to and the IS O option in the Capt ur e me n u w ill be gr a y ed ou t . Lo w er IS O spe ed s al low slow er shutter sp ee ds, and will c apture t he bes t q u ality p ic tur es w ith the lea s t am o unt o f gr ain (or n ois e) . If ta king a p ict ur e in lo w l i gh t cond itio ns w itho ut a fl a sh at IS O 100 , y o u m a y w ant t o u se a tr ipod . In c on tr a s t , hi g he r IS O n umb e r s allo w hi g he r sh u tte r sp eeds , an d ca n be u s ed w he n ta king p ictur es in dar k ar eas w ith o ut a f la sh , or pi c tu r es of fa st mo ving obj ects. Higher IS O sp eeds produce pic tu r es w i t h m or e gr ai n o r n o is e and , t h us , can be o f lo w er q u ality . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct IS O Speed . 2 In the ISO Spe ed menu, u se the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . If the se tting is an ything o the r tha n the d ef ault se t ting o f Aut o , the n u mber v alu e for the set t ing w ill appe a r in the Live V iew scr een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t un til it is c ha nged aga in o r un til t he came r a is tur n ed o ff (unle s s IS O S peed is c he c k e d in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) .
4 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Dig ital Flas h T his s ettin g bal an ce s the r el a ti on ship be tw een br igh t an d da r k ar eas i n a pictur e , pr eservin g ge ntle contrasts but compr essi ng ha r sh co nt r as ts . So me ar ea s in t he p ic tur e ar e lig h te n ed , wh il e ot h er s ar e le f t al on e . Her e is an e x am ple o f ho w Digi t al F l as h can enhanc e an i mage : Di gital F la sh is u sef ul in situ ati o ns lik e the s e: z outdoor scenes with a mi xt ur e of sun and shade z cloud y da y s when ther e is a lot of â gla r e â f r om the s ky z indoor scenes that use flash photogr aph y (to soften or e v en ou t t he e ff ect o f the f l ash) z backl it scenes wher e the subject is to o far aw a y f or the re g u l a r f l as h t o re a c h NO TE Yo u c a n u s e Di git al F la sh wit h o r wi t h ou t r eg ul a r fl a s h , but i t is no t recomm ende d as a r eplac ement for r eg ula r fla s h . Un l i ke reg ul a r fl as h, Dig ita l F lash does not af fect e xposu r e settin gs , so br i gh t en ed ar eas m a y a pp ea r â no is y â or gr ain y , an d in d oor o r nig ht im age s ma y be blurr y if taken w ithout a regula r flash or a t r ip od. With out Dig ital Fl a s h Wi t h Digit al Fl as h
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 4 9 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Digit al F la sh . 2 In the Digit al F la sh menu, us e t he bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Off , th e i co n f o r th e se ttin g (in the ta b l e a bo v e) w i ll ap pe ar in the Live View s cr e en. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t un til it is c ha nged aga in o r un til t he came r a is tur ne d o ff (unl ess Digita l Flash is che c k ed in the R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) . Icon Setting Desc r ip tio n Non e Of f Cam er a will pr ocess the image as nor ma l . This is the def ault setting . Low Usef ul for mos t t ypes of scenes containing a mi xtur e of sun and shade , or f or images captur ed wi t h re g u la r fl as h . High Usef ul f or c onditions of extr eme backlighting , or w he n y o u w an t a dr ama ti c e f f ec t . Th i s se t ti ng is v ery str on g, and you ma y not w ant t o pr int photos muc h lar ger t han 5â x 7â because t he dark ar e as of the phot o w ill be gr ain y .
5 0 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Colo r Th is s etting all o w s yo u t o con tr ol the col or in w hic h y our ima ge s w ill be ca p tu r ed . F or e x am ple , w he n y o u set Color to Sepia , y our im ages will be captu r ed i n br o w n colors to ma k e them lo ok ag ed or old- fashioned. NO TE Once yo u ha v e tak e n a pi c tur e using e ither t he Blac k & Whi t e or Sepi a s etting , the imag e canno t be a dj u sted back to F u ll Co lo r la t e r . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Color . 2 In the Color menu, us e th e bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . T h e ne w setting is app lie d to t h e Live Vi ew s c re e n b e h ind th e me nu , s o y ou sh o ul d be a b le t o see the effect the set t ing w ill hav e on the pi ctur e . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting and r etur n to th e Capture menu . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ect un til it is c han ged a gain or un til t he came r a is tur ned o ff . T he Color setting r ese ts to t he defa ult ( F u ll C ol o r ) wh en y o u t ur n th e cam e r a off (un l es s Color is c hec k ed in t he R e me mb e r ed Set tin g s menu - see pa ge 90) .
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 51 Res o l u t i o n This setting al lo ws y ou to set t h e r esol uti o n (n umbe r o f p i x els) a t w h i ch your imag es will b e c aptured. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Re s o l ut i o n . 2 In the Resolution menu, us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : The Pi c t u r e s re m a i n i n g count a t th e botto m o f th e s c r e en u pda tes w he n y ou hi ghlig h t eac h s e tting . See Me m o ry C ar d Capacit y o n p a g e 1 41 fo r mo re in forma t i on ab out h ow th e Re so l ut ion se tting aff ects the numbe r of ima ges th at can be sav ed on y o ur memor y ca r d . T h e i co n f o r t he n e w se ttin g (i n th e ta ble abo v e ) w il l a pp ea r in the Live View scr een. T he ne w setting r emains in eff ect (e ven if y ou tur n t he ca mer a o ff) un til it is ch anged ag ain . NO TE When y ou use digital z oom , the r esolution changes as yo u z o o m i n . S e e Digital Z oom on p age 31. Ic on Setting Desc r ip tio n 5MP 2 6 08 x 19 5 2 T he captur ed image will be f ull siz e ( 2 608 x 19 5 2 p i x els). This is the de f a ult setting , and is the best choi ce if you int end to p rin t pict u res. 1MP 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 The cap tu r e d image will be 1/4 si z e (12 9 6 x 9 7 6 pi xels). This se tting is use f u l if y ou j ust in ten d t o e- mail images or post th em to th e i n tern et.
52 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Compr ess i o n This setting de ter mines ho w m uc h JP E G com p r e ss io n y ou r ima ges w ill ha v e . 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Compression . 2 In the Compr ession me nu, us e t he bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu r e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : The Pi c t u r e s re m a i n i n g count a t th e botto m o f th e s c r e en u pda tes w he n y ou hi ghli gh t ea c h se tting . See Me m ory Ca r d Capacit y o n p a g e 1 41 fo r mo re in forma t io n ab o ut how t h e Compr ession set t ing affects the numb er of images that c an be s av ed on y o ur me m o ry c ar d . The icon f or the n ew set t ing ( in th e tab le abov e) will ap pe ar in the Live View sc r een . T h e ne w setting r e mains in e ff ec t (e ve n if y ou tur n the ca me r a o ff ) un til it is c h ang ed a g ain . Icon Setting De scr iptio n Best Produ ces the hig hest- qual ity im ages, bu t uses the mo st m emory. This is recom me nded if you plan to enlarge imag es, or print imag es to a size larg er than 18 by 24 cm (or 8 by 10 in). Better Produces high-qua lity ima ges an d r equire s les s memory than the Bes t settin g. This is the de fault setting, and is recommende d for printing images up to 18 by 24 cm (or 8 by 10 in). Good T he most memory-e ff ici ent set ti ng, for ima ges that you w ant to e- mail or post to the Interne t.
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 5 3 Satura tion T his s etting al lo w s y o u to de ter mine ho w s atur ated t he co lo r s w il l be in your pi ctur es. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Satur a tio n . 2 In the Sat ur ati on menu , us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View screen be hind the menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ur e. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting an d r e tur n t o the Captur e me nu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View sc r een . T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is c hanged again . Ic on Setting Descr ipti on Low Mute s color s t o gi v e a so fter , mor e â natur alâ loo k to the subje ct . None M edium C o l o rs wi ll b e n o rm a ll y s at u rat ed . T h i s i s t h e def a ult setting . High Emphasi z es mor e vi v id col or s in a scene . Outdoor landscape photogr aph y ca n use high satur ation t o cr e ate skies t hat ar e mor e blue , or sunsets that a r e mor e or ange . -
54 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Sh arpnes s This sett i ng a llow s you to set ho w sh arp the edg es wil l b e in y our pictur es. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sel ec t Sha rp ness . 2 In the Sha r pne s s menu, us e the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . The new setting is ap plied to the Liv e View sc re en beh in d th e menu , s o yo u sh oul d be a ble to see the effect the setting will have on the pict ure. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa ve the se tting and r etur n to th e Capture menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View screen. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is chan ge d again . Ico n Setting De s cr ipti on Low Th e e dges in your imag es will b e softer , w ith less gr ain . Y ou ca n use this setting for tak in g p o rt rai t pic tu res wi th sof t er , m ore nat u r a l ed ge s. Non e Medi u m T h e ed g e s i n y o u r im a ge s wi ll h av e n or mal shar pness. High T h e ed ge s in y o u r i ma ge s w ill be mo r e p r on ounced . T his setting ma y be help f ul f or out door landscapes , but the images w ill co n t ain m o r e gr ain . -
Cha pt er 2: T aking P i ctur es and R ecor ding V i deo Clip s 5 5 Con t r ast This sett in g allows y ou to contr ol how muc h contra st ther e will be b et w een th e dark a nd lig ht c o lor s in your c aptu red ima ges, incl uding th e am ount o f d eta il th er e w ill be in t he hi ghli gh ts and s had o w s with i n t he im ages. 1 In the Capt ur e men u (pag e 40), sele ct Contra st . 2 In the Cont r ast m enu , use the bu tt ons t o hi ghli g ht a se tting . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Captu re menu . The follo w ing tabl e h elps explai n t he set ti ngs in more detail : If the ne w setting is an ything othe r tha n th e de f a ult se t ting o f Medium , t he i co n f o r t he se tti ng (in the t a bl e a bo v e ) w ill appea r in the Live View screen. T h e ne w s etting r emains in e ff ec t (e ven if y ou tur n the camer a o ff) un til it is c hanged again . Ic on Setting Desc r ip ti on Low Y our images w ill ha v e less contr ast: dark and li ght color s in the image w ill be less distinct , and ther e will be mor e details in the highlights and shado ws . None M e dium Y our images will ha v e nor mal contr a st . T h is is the def ault setting . High Y our images will hav e mor e c ontr ast: dark and li ght color s in the image w ill be mor e distinct , and ther e will be less detail s in the highli ghts and shado ws . -
5 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Setup If y ou p ress OK when the Setu p optio n is highlighted in the Captu re me nu, t he Setup menu di sp lays . See Chapter 6 : Using the Set up M e nu on page 83.
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 5 7 C hapte r 3 : R e v i e w ing I mag e s Yo u c a n u s e t h e Pl ayb a ck f eature to r e view the i mages and v ideo c li ps in your camera . In addit ion, the Pl ayba ck men u all o w s y o u t o ad d , ch ang e , or del e te a u di o c lip s , del e t e imag e s or v id eo c lips , ma gnify still imag es , an d v ie w all t he se ttings that wer e used when that im ag e or v ideo cli p w as captu red . NO TE Wh en r e v i e wing imag es in Pl ay b a ck , y ou can u se the Pr int but ton to sele ct im ag es th a t you want to hav e pr inte d a ut o ma ticall y the ne xt time y o u conne ct t he camer a. See Se lecting I mages f or Pr in ting on page 6 0. Usi n g P l ay bac k 1 Pr e s s th e Playb ack butt on to a cti v ate P la ybac k . The most r ecently tak en or re vie w ed image or v ideo cli p appea rs on t he Im a g e Disp l a y . 2 U se the butto ns to scr oll thr o u gh y ou r image s and v ide o c lips . Pr e ss an d ho l d t he or butt o n to sc r ol l f a s ter . NO TE Y ou only see the f i r st fr ame of e ach vi deo cl ip , whic h is in di cate d b y th e Vi d e o i con . Y ou c an then u se the Play option in the Pl ayb a c k menu to play v ideo or audio cl ips. See Us i n g t h e Playba ck M e nu on pa ge 6 1. 3 T o tu r n t he Im a ge D i sp l a y o ff aft e r r e v ie w ing y our ima g es and v ideo cl i ps , pr ess the P l a y bac k but ton agai n .
5 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Dur ing Pl ay b a ck , som e i nformation about each image or video c lip is also d isp la ye d . T he f o llo win g t a bl e des c r ibes th e inf or ma tio n . # Ic on Des cr ipt i on 1 or z Battery level (actual icon shown depends on the state of your came ra batteries). z A C pow er when us ing t he opti onal HP A C pow er adap te r or H P c a m e r a d o ck. 2 D i sp l a ys for th e fi rs t few se co n ds wh e n y ou ent e r Pla y b a ck to i n dic a te th a t you ca n s croll t h r ou g h al l the images or v ideo c lips. 3 1 Indicat es this image has bee n selected to be sent to 1 des tinati on using HP I n st ant Sh ar e (se e Chapter 4 : Using HP Instan t Shar e on page 6 9) . 4 2 In dicate s this image has been selected f o r pr in ting 2 copi es (see page 60) . 5 5 of 14 Sho w s the cur r ent image number a nd the total number of images /vi deo clips on the me mor y c ard . 6 or z In dica tes this ima ge has an audi o c lip . z In dica tes this is a vi deo c lip . 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 59 T otal Im a ges Summ ar y Screen When y ou pr ess the but ton while v ie w ing the la s t ima ge , a sc r een appea rs sh o w ing the num ber of imag es capt ur ed, number of i mag es r e maining , and counte r s indi cat ing the total number of images sel ected for HP Ins t ant Sh a r e and printi ng. Y ou ca n al so v ie w this s c r een f r om an yw he r e in Play b a ck by pr essing either of t he button s. O rienta tion Sensor An electr o -m echan ical dev i ce in the ca mera deter m ines whether the camer a is being hel d hor i z ont all y or ve rti call y when the p i ctur e is tak en . T he ca mera uses the data f r om this sensor to aut omati cally r otate the image to its pr oper or i ent ation w hen sav ing the f ile .
60 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Sel ec ting Im a g es f or Pr inti ng The Pr in t b u t t o n o n t h e b a c k o f t h e c a m e ra a l l o w s y o u t o s e t ho w m an y co pies of a sti l l ima ge you w a nt to have pr inte d autom atic al ly th e next ti m e you c on ne ct the ca mera to your com pu ter o r dir ectl y t o certa in HP p r in te r s. NO TE Yo u c a n u s e t h e Pr in t bu tto n an y time t hat y ou s ee a sti l l i mage d isp lay ed on t he Imag e Di s play , s uch as d uring Pl ay b ac k , or w hen y ou a ccess t he main Pla yb a c k me n u o r the Sha r e me n u . T o sel ec t a still image f or dir e ct pr int: 1 Pr ess the Pr int bu tto n . 2 U se the butto ns t o set the number of copies y ou w ant to pr int . T he max imum numb er of cop i e s is 99 . Th e pr int e r i co n w ith the numb er of copies th at you set appe a rs in the low er r ight- hand corner of the image . T h e n e xt time y ou c onn ect t he ca me r a t o y o ur co m p u te r o r pr inte r , the ima ges y o u ha v e se lec ted w il l pr int a utoma tica ll y (se e P ri n t i n g I m a g es D i re ct ly fro m th e Ca m e ra on p age 7 9.)
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 6 1 Usi n g t h e P l a y bac k M e nu The Pl a yb a c k me n u al lo w s y ou to pl a y or r ecor d aud i o c lip s , play v ideo cli ps, delete im ages, aud io cli ps, or video cl ips or for ma t the memor y c a r d , mag nif y an image on the Ima ge Disp l a y , o r v i e w all o f the se ttin g s th at w e r e u s ed wh en cap tur ing an im ag e . F r om this me n u , y o u can al so acces s t he Setup me nu to set a numb er of pr efer ences on the c amera . 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Pl ay b a ck menu , pr ess the OK button while yo u a re i n Pl a yb a c k . If yo u ar e not c ur r en tl y in Pl ay b ac k , pr ess th e Pl ay b ac k but ton first , then press the OK but ton . 2 U se the bu ttons to mo v e t o th e im ag e o r v i d eo c lip y ou wan t t o us e. 3 U se t he bu tto ns to hi ghlig ht t he me nu o pti on s on th e le f t o f t he Im a g e D isp l a y . 4 Se lec t a h i ghli gh ted o p ti on b y pr es sing the OK button. Each of th e Pl ayb a ck menu op ti o ns ar e e x pla ined l at er in t his se ction. NO TE Whi l e a P la y bac k menu opti on is hi ghl i ghted , yo u can use th e button s to scr ol l to other im a ges an d video clip s . T h is is us ef ul f or perf or ming the same a cti on o n sev eral im ages or video clips, such as de leti ng mu lti pl e ima ges or v ideo c lips . 5 To e x i t t h e P l a ybac k me nu and r etur n t o v i e w ing image s in Pl ay b ac k , hi g hli gh t t he EX I T P L A YB A CK ME NU option and pr ess the OK but ton .
62 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Th e follow ing table s umm ar i z es each of the Pl ayb a c k menu options and des cr ibes the information in th e bott om r ight cor ner of ea ch image while the Playb ack men u is dis pl a y ed . # Ico n Desc r ip tio n 1 Exits the Pl a yb a c k me n u . 2 o r o r z P la y s the audi o clip that is att ach ed to this image (se e Pl a y on page 64 ). z Re cor d s an audi o clip to a ttac h to this image (se e Rec ord A u d io on page 64) . z P la ys this v i deo clip (see Pl ay on page 64). 3 Pre sents a su b-me nu wher e y ou can delete this image or vi deo clip , d ele te only the audio clip attached to this still image , dele te al l images and v ideo clip s, or f or mat the memory car d (see Delete on page 6 5) . 4 M agnif ie s this image on the Image Disp la y (not av ailable f or v ideo clips -see Ma gnify on pag e 6 6). 5 Allo w s y ou to v i e w all of t he setting s that w e r e used w hen captur in g this image (see Image Info on page 6 7) . 6D i s p l a y s t h e Setup men u , w hi c h all o w s y ou to set a num ber of pr efer en c es on the ca mera (se e Chapter 6: Using the S etup M enu on page 83). 1 2 6 3 5 12 10 9 11 8 4 7 S till image Vi deo clip 13
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 63 7 5 MP Sho w s the Re so l u t io n (su ch a s 5MP ) and Compr e ssio n (suc h as the 2 star s f or Bette r ) for this image , or blank if it is a v i deo c lip (s ee Res o l ut i o n on pag e 5 1 an d Compr ess ion on pag e 5 2). 8 0:2 5 Visible if this image has an audi o c lip attached t o it , w it h the len gth of th e audi o clip displ ay ed t o th e l e f t o f t he i c o n . 9 5 o f 14 Sh o ws the cur r ent image numb er an d the total number of images/v ideo clips on the memor y card . 10 date Sho ws the date that this image was captur e d. 11 2 Indicate s this image has b een selected f or pr inting 2 copies (see Selec t ing Ima ge s f or Pr inting on page 6 0) . 12 1 Indicate s this image has b een selected to b e sen t t o 1 destinati on u sing HP Ins t ant Sh ar e ( se e Chapter 4: Using HP Instant Shar e on page 6 9) . 13 0:2 8 Visible if this is a v i deo cl ip , wit h t he lengt h of t he v ideo clip display e d to the l eft of the i con. # Ico n Desc r ip ti on
64 HP P ho t osma rt 9 45 U se r âs Man u al P la y /R ecor d Audi o In the Pl ayb ac k men u (pa ge 61) , the f ir s t men u o pti o n is e ithe r Pl ay or Re c ord Au d io dep e ndin g on t h e s till im ag e o r v i d eo clip t hat is c ur r en tl y dis p la yed . Pl ay Thi s Pl ayb a ck me nu option a ppe a rs if on e of t he f ollo w ing is c ur r en tl y dis play ed: z a sti l l ima ge w ith an audio cli p atta c hed t o it z a video clip Hig hl igh t Pl ay , an d the n p r es s OK to play the aud io cli p or v ide o c l ip . Y ou can ad j u s t t h e a u di o v olu me b y p r essin g t h e bu ttons w h ile the au di o c lip o r v i deo clip is p la y ing . T o st o p th e c lip wh ile it is pl a y ing , p r ess t h e OK but ton. Reco rd A ud io Thi s Pl ayb a ck me nu option a ppe a rs if a stil l imag e wit h no a u di o c lip atta c hed is cu r r entl y displ a y ed . T o re c o rd a n a ud i o c l i p f o r th e i m a g e : 1 Hig hl igh t Re c o rd Au d io, and t he n pr ess OK . A udi o r ecor ding s t arts imm e d iately af ter you select thi s menu option . A mic r ophone icon and audi o cou nte r are disp l a y e d dur ing r ecor d ing . 2 T o s t o p re c o rd i n g , p re ss OK agai n , otherwise the a udio will con tinue r e cor d ing f or up to 60 seconds or until the memo ry ca r d f ills u p , w hi c he v e r co me s f ir s t .
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 65 Delete 1 In the Playba ck men u (pa ge 61), hig hligh t Dele te an d the n p r es s OK . 2 In the Dele t e sub-m enu , use the bu tto ns t o hi ghli ght the option y ou w ant , and then pr es s OK. T hese options include : ⢠Cance l âRet urn s to th e Pl ay b ac k me n u w itho ut del eting an ything . ⢠Thi s I m a ge âDeletes t he c urr ently di sp lay e d i mage or vi d e o cl i p. ⢠Au d i o O n l y â Deletes only the audio clip att ached to the c ur r e n tl y dis pla y ed im age an d k eep s th e c ur r en t imag e . ⢠All I m ages âDel etes al l of the ima ges and vi deo cl ips on the m emor y c ard . ⢠Fo r m a t C a r d âDel etes a l l of the i mages, video cl ips, a nd f iles on the memor y c ar d , and then f ormats the me mory car d. NO TE P er i odi c f o r matting o f t he me m ory ca r d w il l k eep it c lea n of f i le r emn an ts tha t m a y ca u s e the cam e r a t o l oc k u p , sa v e im age s sl o w l y , or co r r u p t ima ges .
66 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Magni fy NO TE If t he im age th at is c u r r en tly dis pla y ed is a v ide o c lip , the Ma g n i fy menu option is gr a y ed out . Yo u c a n u s e Magn ify to see a close- up of the cur r entl y disp l a y e d ima ge . Th is opti o n is o nl y fo r v ie w ing a ma gnif i ed imag e on the I mage Di splay ; it does not permanently alter the ima ge . 1 In the Playba ck men u (pa ge 61), sele ct Magnify an d the n p r ess OK . T h e c ur r en tl y disp la y ed ima ge is aut om ati cal l y magnif ied on t he Im a ge Disp l a y , w ith t he cen t e r po rt i on of t he im age vi s i b l e. 2 Y ou ca n pa n ar o un d t he ma gnif i ed im ag e b y pr essing th e an d bu tt on s . 3 Pr e s s Zo o m O u t to decrease magn ifi c ation a nd pr ess Zo o m I n to inc r ea se magn if ica ti on u p t o 150x. A meter app ea rs br ief ly in the to p r ight corn er of th e I m age Di sp lay ea ch ti m e you pr ess one of the Zoom contr ols. 4 Pr ess the OK but ton to e xit the mag ni fied image an d r eturn to th e Pl ay b ac k men u .
Ch apte r 3 : Rev iewing I m age s 6 7 Im a g e Info Thi s option a llow s you to see al l of the set t i ngs th at wer e u se d when capt u r ing th e cur r en tly di splayed image. 1 In the Pl ay b ac k menu (pag e 61) , select Ima ge I nfo , a nd the n pr ess OK . 2 Use the button s to scr ol l to other im ag es an d vie w th eir inf or ma tio n . 3 T h en p r ess the OK b ut ton to r et urn to t he Pl ayb ac k me n u . NO TE Th e inf o r ma tio n in t he l as t thr ee r o ws in th e botto m r ight co rner is th e same i n for mation t hat appe ars i n the Pl ay b ac k menu (page 61) vi e w of the i mage. # Des cr ip t i on 1 S ettings f o r still pi ctur es ( this r o w is blank f or v i deo clips): z Non-def a ult e xpos ur e mode se ttings ( AC T I O N , LA N D S C AP E , PORT R A IT , SH UTTER P R I ORI TY , or AP ER TURE PRIORITY ). z An y no n-def ault Ca ptur e me nu se ttings (r est of to p r o w) . 2 S ettings f o r still pi ctur es ( this r o w is blank f or v i deo clips): z Shutter speed. z F-number ( aper t ur e) . z EV Compe ns ati on s etting (if not the def ault o f 0) . 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 4
6 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Setup If y ou p ress OK when the Setu p optio n is highlighted in the Pl ay ba ck menu, the Setup menu displ ays. S ee Chapter 6: Using the Se tup M en u on pa ge 8 3. 3 ISO Spee d setting that w as u sed ( 100 , 200 , or 400 ), o r blank if it is a vi deo clip . 4 Zoom position of lens when the pi ctur e was captur ed (blank fo r vid e o c l i p ) . 5N o n - d e f a u l t f o c u s s e t t i n g ( MA CR O , IN FI N IT Y , or MANU AL ) or blank if the it is a v i deo c lip or NO RMAL setting . 6 F la sh setting that w as used ( AU TO, F L A S H O F F , FL ASH O N , FL ASH O N W I TH RE D-EYE RE DUCTION , NIGH T , or NIG HT WITH RE D-EYE RE D UCTION ) , o r blank if it is a v i deo c lip . 7 F ile na me of the image on the memory car d . 8 F ile si z e of t he image on t he me mory car d . # Des cr ip t i on
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 69 C hapte r 4 : Usin g H P Ins tan t Sh are This camer a has an ex citin g feature cal le d HP I nst ant Sh are . T his f eatur e allo ws y o u to ea sil y se lec t im age s in y o ur came r a to be automat ical ly sent to a v ariety of dest in ation s the next time y ou co nnect the cam er a t o y our co mput er . F or ex ampl e , y ou c an sele ct im ages in your c am er a to b e automatic ally sent to e -m ail add r esses ( in cludi ng g r ou p dis t r ibution li sts ) , onl i ne albu ms, or other onl ine ser vices the ne xt tim e y ou con nect the camer a to y our co mpu ter . NO TE A v a i lable onl ine ser vices v ary b y r e g ion . Once y ou hav e tak en still pi ctur es w ith y our camer a , u sing HP I nst ant Sha r e is as e asy as 1- 2 -3! 1 Set up the Share menu on your ca mer a , as expla ined in the ne x t secti on st arting on page 7 0. 2 Use t h e Sha r e me nu t o s elect imag es in y our camer a f or par ticula r HP I nst ant Sha re desti na tion s. F i rst se e Us i n g t h e Shar e Menu on pa ge 7 3, an d th en se e Select ing I mages fo r HP In stan t Sh a r e D est in at ion s on p ag e 7 4 . 3 Connect the cam er a to y our computer and unloa d the ima ges as e x plain ed in Unlo ad in g I mag es to a Computer on p age 77. On ce t he im ag es ar e un l oad e d t o y our com pu te r , the y w ill be a u t oma ti call y sent to t h e ir r es pecti ve HP I nst ant Sha r e desti nat ion s. NO TE Vi s i t ww w . h p .c o m / g o / i ns t an ts h a r e to se e HP I nst ant Shar e in act i on .
7 0 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Set ting U p t h e Sh are Menu on the Camer a Bef o r e yo u can use HP Ins tan t Shar e , y o u m u st f ir s t s et up the Shar e me n u o n y our came r a . Th e f o l lo w in g p r oced ur e ex pl ain s how to d o th is. NO TE Y ou w ill need an In ter net connecti on to comp lete t his pr o c ed ur e on a Window s computer . Al so , mak e su re that th e memo ry car d in y our came r a is no t lo ck ed and ha s some fr ee spac e on it . 1 Mak e sur e th at t he HP Photo & Imaging Sof twar e is insta lled on y our computer (see page 2 0) . 2 T u rn on the c amera , and t hen p r es s the HP Inst ant Sh are ( Shar e ) but ton on the back of the c amera . 3 The Sha r e menu a ppe ars on the Im age Dis play . ⢠If this is y our f ir s t time ad ding d es tinati o ns t o the Shar e menu , ther e is only one menu option av ailable ( C u st o mi z e th is menu ... .) . Pr es s t h e OK butto n to se l ec t t his me n u o p ti on . ⢠If you hav e pr e v iou sly ad ded dest i nation s to the Share me nu , u se t he butto n to sc r oll to t he bo ttom of the lis t o f c ur r en t d es tinati ons in th e Sh a r e m e n u , hi gh li gh t C u st o mi z e th is menu ... , an d then pr ess th e OK button. Once y ou hav e sel ect ed C u st o mi z e th is menu ... , a messag e l ik e t hi s on e ap pe ars on t he Im a ge D ispl a y a sk in g y o u t o connect t he cam er a to y o ur com pu ter .
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 1 NO TE If your comput er is r unning Windo w s XP , wh en yo u connect the ca mer a to y our computer in the ne xt step , a di al og bo x ma y disp l a y th at r equ es ts y ou to Select the pr og r a m to lau nch for th i s act ion . Si mply click on Ca ncel t o cl o se th is di al og bo x . 4 Connect the c amer a to y our computer b y u sing the USB cable or an optional HP 8881 cam er a dock (if you u se the do c k , pr ess the Sav e/Pr int button on the do ck after pu tting th e ca mer a in th e d ock ) . T his ac ti v a t es t h e C amer a Shar e Men u Se tup W i z ar d on y ou r com pu t e r . 5 In t he f irs t w ind o w o f the W i z ar d t ha t a p pe ar s o n y our com pu ter , clic k on eithe r Re t rieve fro m C a m e ra on a Wi n dow s c om pu t e r , o r Ne xt on a Macintosh computer . 6 In the scr een call ed Modify S har e Men u : ⢠On Windo ws, check to se e th at HP Ins ta n t Shar e E- m a i l is v is ibl e abov e th e Ad d ... button, t hen c lick on the Ad d ... butt on . If t his is the f ir s t time y ou ar e add ing desti nat ion s to the Sha r e menu , yo u will be asked to sign i n t o t h e H P P a s s p o r t p r o g r a m . H P Pa s s p o r t a l l o w s y o u t o c r e a te a s ec ur e accou nt f o r th e ima ge s y ou shar e usin g HP I nst ant Sha r e serv i ce s . T h e f irs t time y ou s ee this scr een , yo u will nee d to r egi ster as a new u ser . F ollow the in struct ions on the screen to regi ster . ⢠On M aci nto sh, cl ick on th e Ad d ... bu t ton , add the e -m ai l addresses or w ebsi tes th at you w ant , an d the n sk ip to step 7 .
7 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l 7 Onc e you ar e s uc cess ful ly registered , s ign in to H P P asspor t , and t hen the HP Inst an t Sh ar e E -mail Se tup scr e en will appea r . Here y ou ca n eith er enter i ndivi du al e- mai l addresses or create g r oup dis t r ibut ion l ist s, a nd sp e cify how y ou wa nt th em to appe ar in th e c am era âs Sha r e menu . Y ou can als o e n te r a s ub jec t an d a t e x t me s s age t o go w ith all e-m ail s t ha t w ill b e se n t t o ea c h e-ma il ad dr ess o r distr ibu tio n lis t . A ft er com ple ting the f or m , c lic k Nex t . In the conf ir mati on s c r een th at a ppear s , c lic k Fi n i s h . 8 The nam es you spe cif ied for yo ur ne wly adde d e- mai l desti nation s or gr ou p dist ribution list s sh ould now appea r in the Modify Sh ar e Men u sc r een (i n the Cu rr e nt S h a re M enu sect ion) . T o add add it ional e- mail add resses or dis t r ibution lis t s to the cam e r a Shar e menu , r epeat steps 4 - 6 on W indow s, or steps 4 - 5 on Macintosh. If y ou ar e using a W indo w s computer , y ou w ill not need to sig n in to th e HP P assp ort pr ogram agai n. NO TE Y ou can conf i gur e a ma x im um o f 34 HP Inst an t Shar e desti nat ion s (such as indivi dua l e - mail add resses or gr oup dis t r ibut ion list s ) that can be l i ste d in the Sha r e menu on yo u r c a me ra. 9 Select a n y othe r HP Ins t an t Sh ar e desti nat ions that you would like to add to your c am era â s Shar e menu fr om th e Mo di f y Sh ar e M enu scr een . Complete the f orms fo r those other desti nat ions. After co mplet in g ea ch for m, click Ne xt . In the c onfirmation scr een th at app ea rs, click Fi n i s h . 10 When y ou hav e f inished adding HP I nst an t S har e desti nat ion s, click on ei ther Sav e to Camera on a Windo w s com pu ter o r Ne xt on a M acin tosh computer . T he new desti nat ion s a r e then saved to the c a mer aâs Shar e men u . When the computer conf irms the y hav e be en sa ved to y o u r camer a , disconne ct the camer a f r om the com p ut er .
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 3 Usin g t h e Sh are M en u Once y ou hav e set up t he Shar e menu on the c amera (se e page 7 0 ) , yo u can no w us e the Shar e menu . When you pr ess the Shar e button on the ca mer a , the most r ecently ta k en or v ie w ed image app ea rs on t he I mag e D isp lay . The Shar e menu also di sp lay s on the right side of the scr een. T he following table de s c r ibes ea c h o f t he Sha r e me n u opt i ons as sh o wn in the fol l o win g exa m p l e Sha r e scr een . # Icon Des cr ipt i on 1 Ch eck ma r k indicates thes e d es tinations hav e been se lected for the cur re ntl y display e d image . (Y ou ca n se lect mor e than one destinati on per image .) 2 E -ma il destinati ons t hat we r e set u p in this e xample Shar e men u . 3 A w ebsite destinati o n that w as s et u p . Other types o f destinati ons ma y hav e d iffer ent icons . 4 Cus tom i z e this m enu ... l e t s y o u a d d m o re e - m a i l a nd othe r HP Ins t an t Sh ar e destinations t o t he Shar e men u . (See Se tting Up the Shar e M enu on the Cam er a on page 7 0. ) 1 2 3 4
7 4 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l Sel e c t in g Im a g es f or HP Ins tan t Sh are D esti n a tions NO TE Y ou can selec t each still imag e fo r an y numb er of HP In stan t S har e desti nat ion s. How e v er , you ca nnot s elec t v ide o c lips f or an y HP I nsta nt Sh ar e dest in ation s. 1 T u rn on the c amera , and t hen p r es s the Sha r e button. 2 U se the bu tton s to sc r oll to a s till im age f o r w hi ch y o u wan t to s e l e ct a n HP In st an t Shar e des tina ti on . 3 Use t he butt ons to s cr o ll to the des t in ation th at you want to sele ct in the Shar e men u f or t his im age , suc h a s an e-mail destina ti on . 4 Pr ess the OK but ton to s ele ct th e d esti nat ion, a nd a appea rs ov er that des t inat ion i n th e Shar e men u . T o un- sele ct th e desti nat ion, pr ess th e OK but ton agai n. 5 R epe at steps 3 an d 4 to sele ct any other HP In st an t Sh ar e de stina ti ons f o r this im age . 6 S c r oll t o ot h er im age s b y u sing t he b u tto ns , and r epea t steps 3 thr ou gh 5 to s elect HP I nst an t S har e de s tina ti ons f or each of th e other images. Y ou c an al so use t he button s to scroll to oth er i mag e s to r e vie w th eir de sti n atio ns. 7 W he n y o u ar e f i nis hed s e le cti n g a ll of t h e HP In stan t Sh ar e desti nat ion s for y our images, pr ess the Shar e button aga in to ex it the Sh a r e menu . 8 Conne ct the ca mer a t o y our co mp u ter a nd unload th e ima ges as e x plain ed in Unlo ad in g I mag es to a Computer on p age 77. On ce t he im ag es ar e un l oad e d t o y our com pu te r , the y w ill be a u t oma ti call y sent to t h e ir r es pecti ve HP I nst ant Sha r e desti nat ion s.
Chap ter 4: Us i ng H P Inst ant Sha r e 7 5 Ho w HP I nst ant S ha re E- m a il s I m a g e s Th e wa y images are e- ma iled v ia HP I n stan t S har e wo rk s dif fer ently on Windo w s and M ac i ntosh computers . Wi nd ows Im ages a r e not e -ma iled as attachmen ts. R athe r , a message is sent to each e -mail addr ess that yo u selected in the Sha r e men u . T h e me s s age co n tai n s thumbnai l images of the pi ctur es you selected f or that addr ess , as w ell as a link t o a we b page wher e t he r ec ip ien t can vi e w the images. F rom that w eb page , the r ec ip ient can do th ings lik e r e pl y to y ou , pr int the images, sav e images t o the ir comput er , f or war d images, and mor e . This make s it eas y f or people w ho u s e di ff e r en t e- mai l pr og r a ms to be ab le t o se e y o ur images with out the diffi c ulty of dea ling with e-mail attachments . Ma c i n t o s h Images ar e e -maile d dir ectl y t o r e c ipien ts u sing the def ault e-mail pr o gr am on your compu ter . Y ou must hav e an activ e Inte rn et e -mail ac count that is accessible when e -mailing an y images that y ou selected f or HP I ns ta nt Shar e e -mail destinati ons.
7 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 77 C hapte r 5 : Unlo adi ng , P rinti ng, and Disp l a y ing I m ag es Unlo ad in g Im a g es to a Co mput er NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠T he HP Pho to & Imaging so ftwar e is install ed on yo ur com pu ter (see Inst alling t he S o ft w ar e on page 2 0). ⢠If you are usin g a Ma cinto sh computer , th e ca mera âs USB C o n figu rat ion is s e t to Dis k Dr i v e in the Setu p me nu (see USB C o nfigu rat ion on page 8 8.) 2 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 3 Y our camer a came wit h a special US B c able for connecting t he came r a to a co m p u te r . Co nn ect t he la r ge r end of th at USB cable to th e com pu ter . 4 Ope n the ru bber door on the si de o f t he came r a an d conne ct th e smal l end o f the U SB ca b l e to t he U SB connect or on t he cam er a. MF
7 8 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l NO TE If your comput er is r unning Windo w s XP , wh en yo u turn on the ca mer a in the ne xt step , a dialog box w il l dis play tha t reques t s y ou to Sele ct the progr am to launch for th i s a ct ion . Si mply click on Cance l to close th is dia l og box . 5 T u rn on the cam era . T he HP Im age Unlo ad soft war e will launch on y our comput er . If y ou ha ve set the soft war e t o aut om atical ly unload the i mages in the c ame r a , the im ages w ill a ut om ati call y u nload t o the comp u te r . Otherw ise , in the We l c o m e scr een , clic k Sta rt U n lo ad . The i ma ges a r e unload ed to the computer , and then if there ar e an y st ill imag es th at wer e pr e v iou sly selecte d for pr inti ng (p age 60 ) or selected f or HP I nst an t Sh ar e de st in ations (p age 6 9), those actions ar e started. 6 When the unlo ad scr een on the c omputer say s Fi n i s h e d , y ou can dis connect t he camer a fr om t he com put er . NO TE T o un load image s to a W indo ws Me , 20 00, or XP computer that does not hav e the HP P hoto & Imag in g soft ware instal le d on it , ch ange the US B C on f igura tio n se tting to Disk Dr i v e in the Setup me nu . (see USB Con figu r atio n on pa ge 8 8). T h is all o ws th e ca me r a t o appe ar as an other d is k d r i ve on th e computer so that yo u can eas ily cop y the ima ge f il es f r om t he camer a t o t he ha r d dr i v e o f y o ur co m pu ter . Ho w e v e r , th e HP Ins t a nt Shar e feature w ill only w or k when the H P soft war e is installe d on your comput er . NO TE Ano the r w a y to unload im age s is to use a memo ry car d reader or one of the memor y c ard slots available in HP Photos mar t printers. Se e the manual for your printer for in structions on how to do t hi s.
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 7 9 Printin g Ima ges Direc tly fr om the Camer a NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. Y ou can connect t he cam er a dir ectl y to an y H P Phot o smart pr in ter o r t o a n y ot h er HP p r inte r w ith a f r on t panel U SB po rt , then either pr int al l ima ges in the c ame r a , or just those im ages yo u h a ve s e l e c t e d us i n g t h e c am e ra Pr int b utton (see Selecting Ima ges f o r Prin ting on p ag e 60 ) . 1 Ch ec k th at the p r inter is tur ned on an d is co nnect ed t o the com pute r . T he r e sho u ld be n o b linkin g l i gh ts on th e p r inte r or err or mess ages di s play ed about th e pr inter . Load p aper in to the p r inter , if needed . 2 Y our camer a came wit h a special US B c able for connecting the camer a dir ectl y to a pr i nter . Connect the squar e end of th e USB cab le to the printe r . 3 Ope n the ru bber door on the si de o f th e came r a and co nn ec t the s mal l en d of th e USB cab le to th e US B c on n ec tor on th e camer a. MF
80 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l 4 When the c amera is connected to the printe r , a Pr int Se tup me n u di sp l a y s on t h e c am er a . If y ou already sel ecte d i mag es to pr int us i n g t h e c a m e ra Pr in t butto n , the numb er of images sele cted is sh o w n . Othe r w ise , Ima ges : A LL is dis play ed . T o selec t or c ha nge t he sele ctions of i mages to pr int , pr ess th e Pr in t b u t to n, s cro l l t h ro u g h t h e i ma ge s u s i n g the but t ons, th en use th e bu t ton s to ad just the number of copies f or each im age , and when satis fied w ith yo u r s e l e c t io n s, p re s s t h e Pr in t bu tt o n a ga i n to return to th e Pr int Setu p menu . 5 If al l the se tt i ngs i n th e P r in t Setu p me n u loo k cor r ec t , p r es s OK on the camer a to beg in pr intin g . Or , yo u can chan ge se ttings in the Pr in t Se tup me nu us ing the ar r o w k e y s on the cam er a , then follo w in structions on the scr een to be gin pr inti ng. NO TE Th er e is a p r in t pr ev i e w in t he l o w er r i gh t-han d co r n er of t h e P r in t Setup scr een sho w ing the pa ge la y out that w ill be used for pr in ti ng i mages. T h is print pr e v ie w upda tes as y ou ch a ng e th e set t i ng s for th e Pr in t Si ze an d P aper S i z e .
Cha pt er 5: Unloading , Pr inting , and Disp la ying Ima ges 8 1 Display ing Im ages on a TV Im age s in y our came r a can ea sil y be dis pl a ye d as a s li de sho w on almost an y tele v ision . NO TE Y o u c a n a l s o u se t h e o p t i o n al H P 88 8 1 c a m e r a d o c k to do this ta sk . S ee App en di x B: Cam e r a Doc k on p ag e 12 9. 1 T o connect the cam er a dir ectly to a T V , y o u need an A/V ( Audio/Video ) cable. The A /V cable i s i nclud ed i n th e HP 8881 c a mer a do ck kit, or may be pu r chased sep ar ately (se e Pu rc h a s i n g C a m e ra A c c e ss o ri e s on pa ge 12 6) . 2 Y our cam er a w ill se n d e ithe r an N T S C o r P AL v id eo si g nal to a T V . The NTS C f ormat is used pr imarily in Nort h Am e r ica an d Jap an , while the P AL fo r m at is used pr imar ily in E u r o pe . T his se tting is m ade f or y ou w he n y ou set t he lan gua ge o f t he came r a. T o c hec k t h e c u r r en t se tting or change th e video sig n al format , go to th e T V Con figu ration se tting in the Setup men u . See T V C on figuration on page 89. 3 Y our came r a w i ll be t he s o ur ce f o r the TV si gn al (j u s t li k e a V CR o r a camco r der ), so y ou m u st set th e TV t o tak e v i de o in pu t f r om an e xte r n al v i d e o sou r ce (y o ur came r a) inst ea d of the antenna or cable T V . Ref er to the T V user âs manual for direct ions on how to do th i s.
8 2 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l 4 T u rn on the c amera , then connect t he A/V ca bl e t o the A/ V i nput s on th e T V a nd to the T V co nne cto r o n your camer a. T yp i call y , th e y ello w connect or o n th e cab le should hook up to the Video in pu t on y o ur TV , and the r e d connector should hook up t o t he A u di o inpu t . T h e came r a st ar ts a sli d e sho w of eac h im ag e , pla yin g an y att ac he d a ud i o c lip o r v i deo clip , an d then sw itch i ng to th e next ima ge. Y ou can a ls o m anu al ly scr oll thr ough the i mages b y pr es sing the buttons. Wh ile v ie w ing the im ages on th e TV , y ou ca n also u se t he Pr in t bu tton t o sele ct spec if i c images th at y ou w ant to pr in t o ut later . NO TE The Image Disp lay on t he ca mer a tu r ns off when the camer a is connect ed t o a TV . Ho w e v er , y o u can s till u se the Pl ay b ac k and Shar e menu s while c onnecte d to the T V , sin ce t h e me n u s wi ll d i spl a y on t he T V sc r een . MF
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 3 C hapte r 6 : U sing th e Setup Me nu The Setup me nu all o ws y ou t o ad j u st a n umb e r o f cam er a se tting s , such as t he cam er a so un ds , dat e an d time , an d the co nfigu ration of the USB or T V c on n e ct ion. 1 To d i s p l a y t h e Setup menu , open either the Capt ur e menu (pag e 40) o r t he Playb ack m enu ( p age 6 1) a nd then select the Se tu p menu option. 2 U se the bu ttons t o scr oll thr o u gh th e Set u p menu options. 3 E ither pr ess the OK butt on t o sel ec t a hi ghli g h ted o p tio n an d dis pl a y its su b-men u , o r u se th e b utto ns to change the se tting for the highlig hted op tion withou t going to its sub- me nu . 4 W it hin a sub -menu , use the bu t tons an d then the OK but ton to ch a ng e th e set t i ng for the Se t u p menu option . 5 To e x i t t h e Setup men u an d r etur n to t he Capture menu or Pl ay b ac k menu , highl ight the EXIT SETU P ME NU opt ion and pr ess th e OK bu tto n . Sc r een o ne Scr een t wo
84 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Camer a So und s Ca me r a so u nd s ar e t he s ou nds th at the came r a m ak es w h en y ou tur n it on , pr es s a bu tto n , or tak e a pi c tu r e. C am er a so un ds ar e n ot th e audio s ou nds r e corded with i m ages or video cl ips. 1 In the Se tu p me n u (pa ge 8 3) , sel ec t Ca m era S o u n d s . 2 In the Ca mer a Sou nds su b-me n u , high light th e v olume lev el y ou w ould pref er . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . The de faul t Ca mer a Sounds set ti n g is Lo w . NO TE The volume le vel of camer a sou nds is not af fected b y t he a udi o le v e l ad j u stme n t p r o vi d e d w ith the Pl ay men u option in the Pl ayb a c k menu . Eye S t a r t B y defa ult, the microdispl ay w il l turn o n whenev er you put y our e y e up to th e vi ewf inder . I f you turn the Ey e St art se nsor Off , the micr odi splay will be on whenev er the Imag e Di spl ay is of f (use the Li ve Vi ew bu tt on t o t og gl e be tw ee n t h e tw o). 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Eye Sta r t . 2 In the Ey e St art sub-m enu , hig hligh t On (the d ef ault) or Off . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . NO TE In the int er est of cons er v ing bat ter y p o w er , H P r ec omm ends leaving Eye Sta r t on .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 5 F o c us As sis t Light Som etime s in l o w-li gh t situa ti ons , th e camer a w ill u s e th e r ed f oc u s assist li gh t on the f r ont o f the camer a to ai d in f oc u sing . T his se tting all o w s y ou to tur n of f this li gh t (f or e x amp l e w hen y ou do not w ant th e foc us assi st l ight to di st r act th e s ubject of y our pictur e) . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct F o c u s A ssist . 2 In the F o c u s Assist su b-m en u , hig hligh t Au t o or Of f . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Set u p menu . NO TE HP r e commend s lea v ing this se tting at Aut o , s ince turning it off hinder s the a bil it y of the c a m e ra t o fo cus c o rre ct ly i n l o w l ig ht. LC D B r i g h t n e s s This set t ing l ets you ad j ust th e br ightn ess of t he Imag e Dis play . B y de f a ult , the I mag e Dis pla y is optimi z e d f o r in door u se . Y ou can use th i s set t in g to in cr ease the br ight ness an d con trast f or bet ter outdoor vie w ing . NO TE If y ou u s e t h e Outdoor sett in g , the image may appea r o ve r e xpo s ed w h en v ie w ing it o n t he came r a indo or s . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct LC D B r i g h t n e s s . 2 In the LC D B ri g h t n e s s sub-m enu , sele ct Ind oor or Out door . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Set u p menu .
8 6 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Instant Re v ie w After a pictur e or v ideo cl i p is captu red , the i mag e appe a rs f or sev e r al se c onds i n th e act iv e di splay . T his set ti ng al lows y ou to se l ec t ho w l on g a n im ag e w ill be dis p la y ed a ft er a p ic tur e is tak en or v i de o cl ip r ecor ded . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct In stant Re v ie w . 2 In the Ins tan t R e v i e w sub-m enu , h ig h lig ht o n e of the fou r ch oic e s av ail able. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . Au to P o w er Of f T his se tting allo ws y ou t o dec i d e w he n (or if ) t he came r a w il l au toma ti ca ll y po w er itse lf of f a fte r a pe r io d o f ina cti vity t o cons erv e po w er . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Au t o P owe r O f f . 2 In the Aut o P ower O f f sub-m enu , h ig h lig ht o n e of the fou r ch oic e s av ail able. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . R e g ar dles s o f w hat se ttin g y ou c h oo s e , th e c ame r a w ill ha v e a â s le ep t i m eou tâ af ter 6 0 se co nd s ( b oth the micr od isp lay an d Image D ispl ay turn off) . When the camera is in the â s leepâ state , press ing any but ton will wake th e c a mer a up a gain. The time s sel ec te d in this sub -me n u inc l ude the sl eep time o ut .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 7 D ate & Time T his s ettin g allo ws y ou to se t the current date and time, as well as th e da te/ time f orma t, f or the cam era . This is usu all y do ne when you f irst set up the cam era; however, you may need to re-set the date and time when you ar e trav el lin g to d iff eren t time zones, or if the date and tim e is in correct. 1 In the Se tu p me n u (pa ge 8 3) , sel ec t Da te & Tim e . 2 In the Date & T ime su b- me n u , adju st the value of the highlighted sele ction by using the buttons. 3 Press th e b ut to ns to move to the o t her s e lec tio ns . 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 unt il the corr ect dat e , ti m e , and dat e/t im e for mat are set . 5 Pr ess OK to s av e the s e tting a nd r etur n t o the Setup menu .
88 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l USB Confi guration T his se tting determines how t he camera is re cognized when connected to a compu ter. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct US B Con f igurat ion . 2 In the US B C on figu r atio n sub-menu , highlight one of choices av ai lable : ⢠Digital Camer a âCau ses t he computer to recogn ize the camera as a digital camera using the Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) standard. T his is the default settin g on the camera. ⢠Disk Dri v e â Causes the compu ter to recognize the c amera as a disk drive using the Mass Storage Device Class (MSDC) standard. Use thi s table as a gu ide f or wh ich USB Configur ation se tting to u se w it h y our com p ut er : 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu . HP Photo & Imag ing soft war e: Win dows Maci nt osh Insta l led o n your computer Di gital C amer a Dis k Dr i v e Not install ed on yo ur com put er Disk Dr i ve Di gital C amer a (OSX sy stems)
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 8 9 T V C onfi gura tion Thi s set t in g a llows you to set the f ormat of the video s igna l for dis play i ng ca mer a i mages on a tel e v is ion ( T V) that is conne ct ed t o the came r a w ith a n o pti o nal A udi o /V i de o cabl e or HP 8881 camer a dock . The de f a ult setting de pe n ds on the lan gua ge tha t y o u sele ct ed w he n y ou po w er e d o n the ca mer a f or t he f ir s t time . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct T V C on figurat ion . 2 In the T V Co n figu r atio n sub -men u , hig hli gh t one of the se tw o cho i ce s: ⢠NT S C âF or ma t u sed pr imar ily in Nor th Amer ica and J apa n ⢠PA L âF or mat us ed pr imar ily in Eu r op e 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu . F or mo r e inf or m ati on on co nnecting the came r a t o a T V , see ei t he r Displ a y i ng Ima ge s on a TV on page 81 when usi ng the optional Audio/ V ideo cable, or Dis pl a y ing Im ag es o n a TV Us in g the D o ck on page 134 w hen u sing the HP 8 881 camer a dock.
90 HP P hotosma rt 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l La n g u a g e T his se tting allo ws y o u t o set the language used in t he ca mera interface, su ch as the text in m enus. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct La ng ua ge . 2 In the Lan g uage sub -m enu , high light the lan guage you w ant to us e . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g a nd r et u rn to th e Se t u p menu . Re m em b e red S et t i n g s This set t ing a ll o w s y ou to save som e c am er a s et ti ngs that wo uld n or m all y r es et to the ir de f a ult v a lue s whe n th e came r a is tu r ned of f . 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Re m em b ere d S e t t i n gs . 2 In the R emembe r ed Settings su b- me n u , u se t he bu tt o ns to highlight a set t i ng , then use the buttons to ch eck or uncheck a sele ction. 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s etting s an d r etur n t o th e Setup menu . NO TE Th e s ave d se t ti n g fo r Fl a s h is tem por aril y ignor ed if the camer a is in Vi deo mode or the f la sh is dow n . NO TE An y Captur e menu item tha t is not in this scr een a l re a dy rem a i n s s e t to w h at eve r yo u se l e c t e d w h e n t h e came r a is turn ed of f and then bac k on .
Chapt er 6: Using the Setup Menu 91 Re s e t S et ti n g s T his op tio n all o w s y ou to r ese t th e camer a to th e f a cto ry def a ult sett in gs. 1 In the Se tu p m e n u (pa ge 8 3) , sele ct Re se t S ettings . 2 In the Re s e t S e t t i n gs su b-me n u , hi g hli gh t o ne o f t he f o ll o win g: ⢠Cance l - exit s the m enu wi tho ut maki ng a n y changes. ⢠All Capt ur e S ett i ngs - r ese ts Fla s h , Fo c u s , Ti m er/ B u rs t , and Captu r e m e nu s e t t i ng s to fa c t o r y d e fau l t s. I f t h e fla s h is d o w n o r the came r a is in V i de o mod e , t he Fl a s h set ti ng wi l l b e AU TO F L A S H the n e xt t ime the flash is av ai lable. Setting s that w e r e ch eck ed in the Remembered Setti n gs su b- me n u w i ll st a y che c k ed . ⢠Re se t Al l S e t t i ng s - r eset s all c aptur e set ti ngs as describe d abov e, plus all set tings i n the Setup men u e x ce p t Dat e & Ti me , Lang u ag e , T V Con figu ration , an d USB Con figu r atio n . A ll s e tting s th at w er e ch ec k ed in the R ememb er ed Set t in gs su b-me n u w il l be un ch ec k ed . 3 Pr e s s OK to sa v e the s ettin g an d r etur n to the Setup menu .
9 2 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 3 C hapte r 7 : T roub l esho otin g and Suppo rt This chapter conta in s information on th e f ollowing topics: z R es e tting the camer a . z P ossi ble pr oblems, c auses, and sol utions. z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t h e c am e ra. z E rro r m e s s a g e s on t h e c om p u t e r . z Self -d i agno s tic te s ts on the camer a . z How to g et assi sta nce fr om HP . R e s e tt i n g th e Ca me r a I f yo u r c a m e ra do e s n o t re s p o n d w h en y ou p r ess an y bu t to ns , y o u can try r e setting t he camer a in the f ollo win g w a y : 1 Ope n the bat tery door on the bot tom of the cam er a and re m ov e a l l fo u r b a t te rie s . 2 Le av e the batt er ies ou t of th e came r a f or at le as t 10 min ut es . 3 Re inser t the ba tter ies a nd close the bat ter y door . 4 T u rn the c a m e ra b ack on. Y ou wil l p rob ab ly b e p rom p te d t o se t t he da t e an d tim e ag ain .
94 H P P h o t o s m a r t 94 5 U s e r â s M a n u a l Proble ms an d So lu tions Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion Th e c am era does not turn on . The batter i es ar e f unc ti oning incor r ectly , are dead , are install ed incor r ectly , or ar e missing . z T he c har ge in t he batte r ies could be lo w or comple t el y dr ained . T r y inst allin g ne w o r r ec har ge d batt er i es . z Ensur e that th e batte r i es ar e in se r t ed co r r ectl y (pa ge 16). z Do no t u se or dinar y alk alin e bat ter ies . F or best results, use pho to-lithium batter i es or r echar ge able NiMH batter ies. If y ou m us t u se alk ali ne ba tter i e s, u s e h ig h - g ra d e âu l t raâ o r â pre m i u mâ va ri e t ie s. If you ar e u s ing th e H P AC pow er ada pter , it is not connected t o th e c a m e ra , o r is not plugged int o a pow er outlet . Ensu r e t ha t the HP A C p o w e r adapter is connect ed to t he cam er a and is pl ugged into a w or king electr i cal outlet . Th e H P A C pow er adapt er is not fu n ct ion in g cor r e ctl y . Ensu r e t ha t the HP A C p o w e r adapter is not damage d or de f ec ti v e and i s pl ugge d in to a w or king electr i cal outlet . Th e c a m er a has st opped oper ating . R es et th e cam er a b y r e mo v ing t he batter i es and then r e- inserting them (page 9 3) .
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 5 Th e mi cr odi s p l a y in the view fi nd e r does not turn on when I put my eye up to it . Th e Eye Star t sens or cannot detect that y ou ar e lookin g th roug h t he view fi nd e r (sometim es occur s w hen we a ri n g glasses) Tu r n t h e Ey e Sta r t sensor to Off in th e Setup men u (p age 84). T he n , eith er the Ima ge Display or the mic r o displa y w ill al w a y s be on (toggle back and f orth bet w een them by pr essing the Live View button). Th e Eye Star t sens or has been tu r ned of f . z Pr ess the Live V i ew bu tton to manu all y tur n on the mic r odispl a y . z Tu r n t h e Eye Star t sen sor to On in t he Setup menu (page 84) Th e P o wer / Me m ory l i gh t blinks as if the bat ter i es ar e be i n g re c h arg e d, but ther e are no batter i es installed . Th e c a m er a does not re c o g n i ze t h a t ther e ar e n o bat ter ies install ed. Do not hing . T h e blinking is har mless and s hould stop af te r 5-30 minu te s . T he b attery gauge goes up and down fre q u e n tly . Di ffer en t oper ating modes o f th e cam er a r equir e differ e nt po wer lev el s. See Batte ry Gaug e on page 122 f or a f ull e xplanati on. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
9 6 HP P ho t o s ma rt 9 4 5 U se r â s Ma n ua l I re place the camera batter ies fre q u e n tly . Extend ed Image D isplay use for Li ve View or vi deo re c o r d i n g, e x cessi v e f l ash use, a nd e x cessi v e zo o m i n g consum e a lot of b a t ter y pow er . z U se the mi cr odispl a y inst ead o f the Image Display whene v er pos sible , espec i all y if using alk aline batt er ies . z Use the zoom only when ne ces sa r y . z Us e AU T O F L A S H instead o f FL AS H ON . z U se an HP A C po w er adapt e r to pow er the c a mera when you a r e us ing th e Image Displa y f o r an e x tended per iod of time . Cam er a do es no t wo rk we l l wi t h reg u la r alkalin e bat ter ies. Do not u se or dinary alk aline batter ies . F or best r e sults, us e phot o -lithium batter i es or r ec har gea b le NiMH ba tt er i e s . If y ou mu st us e a lk aline b atter ies, use hi gh-gr ade â u ltr a â or â pr emium â v ar iet i es (page 121). Th e Ni M H batter i es y ou ar e u sing w er e r e char ged incor r ectly . Wh en N iM H bat t er ies ar e b r and new or ha ve no t b e en use d in s e v e r al mon ths , th e y wi ll no t r e ach optim um capac ity until the y h a v e bee n c h ar ge d an d th e n dischar ge d (u sed) c omple tel y 4 -5 times (p age 12 4). NiMH bat ter i es ha v e dr ained on the ir o wn because the y ha v e no t been use d l ately NiMH batteri es disc har ge on their o wn when not in use and when not install ed in the camer a . So if y ou hav e not u sed them in a w eek o r mo r e , th e y ma y ben e f i t f r o m being char ged ( p age 1 2 4 ) Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 9 7 Th e c am era batter ies w ill not char ge . Re char geable bat ter ies ar e not i n ser t ed. Install N iM H batter i es . L ithium an d alk ali ne ba tt er i e s can n o t be r echa r g ed (page 121) . Batter i es ar e alr ead y ch arg e d. Battery char ging w ill no t s tart if the bat teries wer e r e ce ntly ch arg e d. T r y ch a rgi n g th e m again after the y hav e dr ained awh i le. Battery voltage is too l o w f o r ch arg in g to start . Th e camer a w ill no t attem pt to char ge batter i es that ma y be damaged or o v er -disc ha r ged . R emo v e t h e ba tte r i e s f r om th e cam er a and char ge them in an e xte rnal battery char ger , then tr y them in the cam er a agai n . If this does n ot wor k , it is li kely that one or mo r e o f the batter ies ar e bad . P ur c ha se new NiMH batter i es and tr y again. Th e wron g AC pow er adapt er is be ing use d . U s e onl y th e HP A C po w er adapter appr o ved f or u se w ith this camer a (page 12 7) . The batter i es ar e damaged or bad . NiMH batter i es degr ade ov er tim e an d can f ail . If the came r a de te ct s a pr ob le m w ith th e batter i es , it will not st art char ging or will stop char ging prematur ely . P ur cha se ne w batter i es . Batter i es ar e not i n ser t ed cor r e ctl y . Ensur e t hat the batter ies ar e inse rted corr ectly (page 1 6) . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
9 8 HP Ph o t os m art 9 4 5 U ser âs Ma n ua l Th e c am era does not re s p o n d when I pr ess a button. Th e c a m er a is tu rne d of f or has sh ut do wn . Tu r n o n t h e c a m e r a . Th e c a m er a is connected t o a comp ute r . Most of the cam er a buttons do not r espond when the ca mer a is connected t o a comput er . If the y r espond , it is only to tu r n the Image Displa y on if it is o ff , o r , in some cases, tur n the Image Displa y off if it is on. The batter i es ar e dr ained . R eplace or r echar ge the b atter i es . Th e c a m er a has st opped oper ating . R es et th e cam er a b y r e mo v ing t he batter i es and then r e- inserting them (page 9 3) . A lon g d elay occurs be tw ee n pr essing t he Shutt er button an d t he camera taking a pict u r e. Th e c a m er a needs time t o lock f ocus and exp os u r e. Use F ocus Lo ck ( page 25.) The scene i s dark and t he cam er a is ta ki n g a lo ng exp os u r e. z Use the flash. z If u sin g f l ash is not poss ible , the n us e a tri pod to k eep the camer a stea dy during the lo ng expos ure time . z Make sur e th at the F oc u s Assist li ght is set t o Au to (page 85). Th e c a m er a is using a f lash setting w ith Red -eye Red uct io n. It w ill t ak e lon ger t o tak e a p ic tur e wi t h Re d - e ye Red uct io n . The shutte r is delay e d becaus e of t he additional flash . In turn , make sur e y our subj ects wait f or the se c o n d fla s h. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 99 Th e c am era does not take a p i ctur e when I pr ess the Shutter button . Yo u d i d n o t pr ess the Shutter butt on har d en ough . Pr ess the Shutt er button all t he way d own. T he memory car d is not install ed. Inst all t he memory car d. T he memory car d is f ull . Unload images f r om the c amera to y our computer , t hen delete all images on the mem ory c ar d. Or r eplace th e card w it h a ne w o ne. T he memory car d is loc k ed . S witch th e lo ck i n g ta b on th e memory ca r d to the unlock e d position . Th e fla s h i s re c h a rg i n g . W ait until t he fl ash has r e char ge d bef or e taki ng another p ictur e. Th e c a m er a is set to MA CR O f o c u s an d can not tak e a p ictur e until it fi n d s fo cu s . z Re - focus th e c a m era (t r y usi n g F o cus L o ck , page 2 6 ). z Mak e sur e th e sub j ec t o f the pict u r e is w i th i n t h e M acro (close -up) r ang e (pa ge 36) . Th e c a m er a is still sav in g the last p i ctur e y ou t ook . W ait a f e w se co n d s f or t h e camer a to finish pr ocessing the las t image befor e tak ing another pictu r e. Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
100 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual My image is blurry . The lig ht is low and the f lash is se t to FLASH O FF . In dim ligh t , t he camer a r e quir es a longer e x posur e . Use a tr ipod to h old the camer a steady , impr o v e li ghting con ditions , or se t the pop up the fl ash and set the fla s h to FL AS H O N (p ag e 3 2) . Th e c a m er a w as set to the wr ong focu s setting f or the scene . Set th e camer a t o MA CRO , NORMAL , o r INFINI TY focu s and try taking the p i ctur e again (p ag e 36. ) . Yo u m o v e d t h e cam er a while y ou t ook th e pict u re. Hold the cam er a stead y as yo u pr ess the Shutt er bu tton or u se a tr ipod . W at c h f o r th e icon in the activ e display (this means that is almost impossible to hold steady , and you must u se a tr ipod). Th e c a m er a fo cus ed on th e wr ong thing , or w as unable t o fo cus . z Make sur e the f oc u s br ac k ets tur n gr een bef o r e taking the pi c t ur e ( page 25 ) . z Us e Fo c us Lo c k (pag e 2 5). z Us e fo cus s e arch prio rit y (page 3 7). Th e d io p ter contr ol is out of adju stment , making the image appe ar blur r y in the mic r odisplay . Ad just th e dio p te r co nt rol so tha t inf o rmati on o v erl a y s in the mic r o displa y ar e mo r e in f oc us (p age 19 ) . Thi s on ly a ffec ts t he focus o f th e m icrod isp l ay , n o t t he Image Di spla y . I t does not affect t he f oc u s of t h e ca ptu r ed im ag e . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 101 My image is to o brig ht. Th e fla s h pr ov i ded too much l ig ht. z T urn t he flas h off ( p ag e 3 2) . z Mo v e bac k f r om the sub jec t and us e t he z oom to g et t he s ame fram i n g . z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . A nat ur al or artifi c ial sour c e oth e r th a n t he fl as h p ro vide d too much lig ht. z T r y ta k i ng th e pict u re from a differ ent angl e . z A vo id po in ting the cam er a d i re c t l y t o w a rd a br i g h t l i g h t o r r ef l ec t i ve su r f ac e on a sunn y day . z Dec r ea s e t h e EV C om pen sat i o n ( page 4 2 ) . The scene had man y dark obj ects, suc h as a black dog on a blac k couc h. Decr e ase the EV Compensa tion (p ag e 4 2) . Th e I m a g e Displa y is set f o r o ut doo r displa y , making im ages a p pe ar t oo br ight . Chang e the LC D B r i g h t n e s s in the Setu p men u t o Indoor set ting for m o re a c cu ra t e b rig ht n es s o n th e Image Displa y . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
10 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual My image is too dark . There w as not enough light. z Wait for natural lighting conditions to improve. z Add indirect lighting . z Use the pop-u p flash (page 3 2) . z Adjus t t he EV C ompens ati on (page 42). z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . The f lash was on, bu t the subject w a s too fa r aw a y. z Make sure yo ur subj ect i s withi n the flash wor king distance (s ee Appe ndi x C: S pec if i c atio ns on page 13 5). If so, try using the FLA S H O F F setting (page 3 2) , whi c h will require a lo nger expo su re (use a tri pod ). z Us e Dig it a l F la sh (page 48) . A light is behind the subject. z Use the FL ASH ON setting (page 32) to brighten the sub je ct. z Incr eas e th e EV Compe nsat ion (page 42). z Us e Dig it al Fla s h (page 48) . The scene had man y li gh t- color ed objects, such as a whit e dog in sno w . Incr ease t he EV Compensati on (se e pag e 4 2) . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 103 Th e T V do e s not displa y images when I co nnec t m y camera t o it . A u di o an d vi deo cables ar e s w itc hed T ry sw it chin g the audi o a nd vi deo cables on the b ack of the T V (the r e d and ye llo w connector s on the cable f r o m the cam er a or dock to th e T V) . Th e c a m er a is set to the w r ong TV f o r m a t . Chang e the TV C o n f i g u r at i o n se tting to the opposite o f what it is cu rren t ly s et ( p a g e 8 9 ) . T V is no t s et t o cor r e ct input mode . Check the TV user âs manual to set the T V to accept vid eo or in put mode . Th e w r on g date and/ or time is show n . T h e da t e an d/ or time w as set incor r ectly o r th e t i me z on e ha s changed . R es et the date and time b y u sing th e Date & T ime option in the Setu p men u ( pa g e 8 7). Th e c am era re s p o n d s v e r y sluggishly when tryin g to review images. A slo w memor y car d or too man y images on a ca r d can affect ac ti ons lik e scr olling th roug h images , magnifyin g , deleting , etc . z R un th e camer a s elf -di agn osti c test ( pag e 1 1 3 ) to tes t t he s pe e d of y our me mory c ard . z See t he sec ti on a b ou t St or ag e car d s on page 13 7 fo r tips abo ut m e mo r y c ar ds . Pr o ble m P ossible cau se Sol u tion
104 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Err or Mess ag es on t he C am era M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on Batteri es depleted. Camera is shutting do wn . Batt ery po wer is too l o w t o contin ue oper ati on . Re place or r e char ge bat t e r ie s , o r u se a n optional HP A C p o w er adapter . Batteri es ar e def ectiv e One or mor e cells ar e shorted or severe ly ove rd i s c h arg e d. Pur chas e new ba tt eries. Batter ies cannot be char ged E ither a n err or o c c u rre d d u ri n g char ging , an A C po wer disru pti on o c c u rre d d u ri n g ch arg in g, t h e wro ng AC p o wer adapter is being used , batter i es ar e def ecti v e , o r no bat ter i es are install ed in th e cam er a. R etry charging the bat t er i e s a co u p l e o f tim e s . If t hat f a il s, p ur c h as e n ew batter i es and try again. UNSUP P ORTED CARD T h e c ar d in th e memory slot is not a m emor y ca r d or i s n ot a supported memory ca r d. Ensur e that th e memory c a rd i s t h e p ro p er t yp e for you r c a mera. ( S e e App endix C: Sp eci fica t ion s on page 13 5.) NO CAR D IN CAMER A T h e c ame r a do es not h ave a memory ca r d ins talled . Install a memory ca r d.
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 105 CARD I S UNF ORMA TTED Pr ess OK to fo rm a t ca r d T he memory car d needs to be f or matted. F ormat t he me mory car d (remo ve the ca r d fr om the camera if y ou do not wan t it to be f or m at ted) . CARD HA S WR ON G FO R M A T Pr ess OK to fo rm a t ca r d T he memory car d is f ormatted f or a d iffer ent de vi c e such as an MP3 pla yer . R e -f or mat t he me mory car d (r emo v e t h e car d fro m t h e c am e r a if y ou do not w ant it t o be r ef o rmatted). Una ble to F or mat Th e memory car d is c o rru pt e d. Re place the me mory c ard . CARD I S L OCKED Th e memory car d is loc k ed. S w it ch th e locking ta b on the memory car d to t he un loc k ed p ositi on. CARD FU L L There i s in s u f ficient r oo m to save m ore images o n the memory ca r d. Unload images fr om the camera t o y our comput er , then dele t e all images on the memory car d (page 6 5) . O r r epl ace the card wit h a n e w one . CARD I S UN R E AD ABL E The c am e ra i s havi ng t rouble r e ading the car d . T he memory ca r d ma y be c o rru pt e d o r a n unsupported ty p e . z T ry t u rn in g th e c a m era off and th en back on . z E n su re th at th e m e mo r y ca r d is the pr oper type fo r yo u r c a m era ( s ee page 13 7 ). If it is the pr o per type , try f orm atting it (see page 6 5 ). If it w ill n ot f or mat , it is pr o bab ly cor r u pt ed . R e place the memory car d. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
106 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual PRO C ESSIN G.. . The c am e ra i s pr ocess ing data , such as sav ing the last p ictur e y ou t ook . W a i t a f e w s e co n d s f or t he camera t o f inish pr o cessing befo r e t aking another p i ctur e o r pr essing another butto n . CHAR GING FLA SH The c am e ra i s re c h a rg i n g t h e fla s h . It take s lo nger to char ge th e f la sh w h en t he batter ie s ar e lo w and in dark scenes. If you see this m ess age a lot , y ou ma y need to r e place or recha r ge th e ba t teries. FO C US T O O F A R and blinking The focus distance is bey on d where th e c a m e ra c a n fo cus in MA CR O mode . z Set the camer a t o NOR MA L focus. z Move cl oser to the su b j ect ( w ithin t he r ang e of MA CRO focus - see pag e 3 6 ) . FO C US T O O CL O SE The focus distance is clo ser th an th e ca m e ra can f oc u s in MA CRO mode. M ov e f u rth er away fr o m th e s u b jec t ( w it hin th e ra ng e of MA CRO fo cus - see pag e 3 6 ) . Blinking The focus distance is clo ser th an th e ca m e ra can f oc us w ithout bein g in MA CRO mode. Set the ca mera to MA CR O fo cu s o r m o v e f arthe r a wa y . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 10 7 UNAB LE T O FO C US The c am e ra cannot f ind foc us in MA CR O mode , possibly due low contr ast . z Use F ocus Lo ck (page 2 5). P oint at a par t of the scene that is br ighte r . z M a ke su re th e c a m era i s wi th i n th e ran ge of MA CR O fo cus (page 3 6). LOW L I G H T - UNAB LE T O FO C US T h e s cen e i s t oo dar k and the camer a cannot fo cus . z Add an e xt er nal li gh t source . z Use F ocus Lo ck (page 2 5). P oint at a par t of the scene that is br ighte r . z Mak e sur e the F oc u s Ass ist light i s set to Auto (page 8 5). (cam er a shake wa rn in g ) The lig ht is low and the image is likely t o b e bl u rr y d u e to th e lon g ex po su re re q u i re d. Use the flash (page 3 2) , or use a tri po d . ERROR S A VIN G IM A GE Me m o ry c a r d was h al f- l ocke d or was rem oved bef or e the cam er a f inished w r iting t o t he car d . z C he ck to se e i f th e tab o n th e ed g e o f th e me m ory car d is full y in the unloc k ed po si ti on . z Al ways wai t u n t i l th e P o w er/ Mem ory li g h t r etu rn s to gr een bef or e re m o vi n g t h e c a rd f ro m the ca mer a. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
108 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual F -n u mbe r an d shutte r spee d turn re d i n Li ve V i ew The c am e ra i s out of r a n ge for the selected ap e rt u r e o r shutte r s peed. z Selec t a diff er ent ape r t ur e w he n us i ng t h e Ap ertu re Pri ority Av e xpos ur e m ode . z Selec t a diff e r e nt s h utt er spe ed when usin g Shutter Pr i or ity T v ex p o s u re mod e . Ca nnot disp la y image P ossibly a p i ctur e taken wi t h anothe r camer a or a c orrupt image f il e ca us ed b y t h e camer a not shutting do wn pr operl y . z T he i ma g e ma y sti l l be OK - dow nload th e image to y our compu te r and try opening it w ith the HP softwar e . z Do not r emo v e the memory car d when t he cam er a i s t ur ned on . Ca mera has e xper ienced an e rror T he camer a ma y have a f irmw a r e pr oblem. T urn the cam er a off and then on again . If that does not f ix the pr oblem , tr y r esetting t he cam er a (see pag e 9 3). I f th e p r o bl em p ers is ts , n ot e t h e e rror code and then call HP Support (s ee p age 114) . Unkno wn U SB de v ice The c am e ra i s connected t o a USB de vice that it does not re c o g n ize . M ake s u re th at th e c a m e ra is connected t o a support ed p r inter or computer . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 109 Una ble to commun i cate w ith pr inter There is no connecti on bet ween the cam er a and pr inter . z Chec k that th e pr in t er is tur ned on . z Ma k e s ure the cable i s con nect ed be t ween the pr inter and th e camer a or the optional H P 8881 camer a doc k . If th at does not wo r k , turn of f the camer a and disconnec t it . T ur n the pr in te r off and t hen on again . Re- co nne c t th e ca me r a an d tur n it on . Unsupported pr inter T he p r in ter is an unsupported de v i ce . Connec t the ca mer a to a supported pr inter , such as a n H P P hot osm ar t printer or anot her HP pr int e r wit h a f r on t panel USB port . Or connect t he camer a t o a computer and prin t f r om th e r e ins t ea d . Photo tr a y is engaged T h e s ele ct ed paper s i ze cannot be used w ith the pr inter phot o tr a y . Dis e ng ag e th e pr i n te r photo tr ay , or c hange th e pa pe r s i z e . Pr in ter top co v er is open T he p r in ter is open. Cl os e th e top c ove r of the pr in te r . Inc orr ec t o r missing print cartri d ge The print e r cartri dge is the incor r ect model or is missing. Install a ne w pr int er c a r t ridg e, t u rn t h e pri nt er off , then turn it back on . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
110 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Pr in ter has a paper jam or The pr int ca r r i age ha s stalled Th er e is a paper jam o r th e pr inter carr iage has st al le d. T ur n off the pr inter . Clear the paper j am, and then tu rn o n th e printer . Pr in ter is out of paper T he pr inter is o ut of paper . Load paper int o the pr in te r , and t hen pr ess the OK or Con ti n ue button on the pr inter . Selected pr int si z e is lar ger than selected pap er si z e. Pr in t si z e is too large for th e paper s i ze . Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Set u p scr een and select pr in t si z e that mat c hes paper si ze . Se l e ct e d pa per si z e is too bi g f o r pr inter . Se l e c t e d pa pe r si z e is larger th an th e max imum si z e supported in the pr inter . Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Set u p scr een and select a paper size tha t fits th e print er . Bor der less pr in ting is onl y supported on photo paper . Y ou tr i ed to pr int a bor derless pictu r e o n p la in paper . P u t phot o paper in the pr in te r , o r pr ess OK on the camera t o r eturn to the Pr int Setup scr een and select a sma ller pr in t si z e. Bor der less pr in ting is not supported on this pr inter . The print e r do es not support bor d er le ss pr inting. Pr ess OK on the camer a to retu rn to th e Pr int Se tup scr een and select a smaller pr in t si z e . Pr in ting ca ncelled T he pr in t job has been c ancele d. Pr ess the OK button on the camer a . Compl ete the pr in t r e quest again . M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 111 Err or Mess a g es on th e Com p u ter M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on Connec ti on be tw een t he imaging d e v i ce and computer fa i le d The ca mera might be connecte d to a compute r through a USB hub. Try conne cting the camera directly to the comp uter, or disconne ct other dev ices a ttache d to the USB hu b. Th e s of t wa re cannot r e tr ie v e the Shar e Menu i n fo rma t io n fro m you r c a mera The c omp u ter n eeds t o w r ite f iles to the memory ca r d dur ing HP Inst ant Shar e setup , but the memory car d is e ither missing , f ull , or loc k e d . E ith er ins tall a memory ca rd , m ake r oom on the memo r y car d , o r unl oc k it b y sw itching the loc king tab on the car d to the un loc k ed p ositi on. Compu ter cannot fi nd t h e connected camera The c am e ra i s tur ned off . T u rn on th e c a m era. The c am e ra i s not workin g cor r ectly . T ry connecting the c a m e ra d ire ct ly t o a n HP Phot osmart pr in ter or an H P pr inter w ith a f r on t pan e l U SB po rt , an d pr in t an ima ge . T his will v er ify that the image , memo ry ca r d , USB co nn ec t i on , an d t h e US B ca b l e ar e f un c t i o ni ng c o rre ct ly . The c abl e is no t connected cor r ectly . M ak e su r e that the cable is f ir mly connect ed to t he computer and ca mer a.
112 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Compu ter cannot fi nd t h e connected camera (con tinu ed) The ca mera is set to the Digital Cam er a setting in the USB Co n figu rat ion sub-menu of the Setu p m en u , b ut the com puter cannot re cog niz e th e cam era as a digital ca mera. Chang e t he US B Co n fig u ratio n set ting to Disk Dri v e in the Se t u p m enu . (page 8 8.) This al lo w s t h e ca me r a t o appear as another disk dr iv e on the c omputer so that y ou ca n ea sily cop y the image f iles fr om the ca me ra to th e h a rd d ri ve of y our comput er . The c am e ra i s connected to t he comput er th roug h a US B h u b , an d yo ur USB hub is no t compatible w ith th e c a m e ra . Connec t t he camer a dir ec tl y t o a U S B po r t on the comput er . Yo u a r e u s i n g t he HP 88 81 cam er a dock and f or got t o pr ess the Sa v e/ Pr in t bu tton . Pr ess t he Sa ve/P r i n t button on the camer a dock . T he memory car d is loc k ed. S w it ch th e locking ta b on the memory car d to t he un loc k ed p ositi on. The USB connection fa ile d. Reb oot the compute r. M essage P ossible cau se Sol uti on
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 113 Ca mera Self-dia gnos tic T es ts If you think your cam er a ma y be d e fecti v e or ma l f unctio ning in some wa y , there is a diagnostic pr ogra m (a set of ele v en diff e r ent t ests ) t ha t y o u can r u n on t he came r a to try to de t e r mi n e t he p r ob l em . T h e f o ll o w ing t hin g s ar e te s t ed o n t h e ca mer a; F la sh , LEDs (l i gh ts), Bu tt ons , L i ve V ie w , L CD C ol o r , M i c r odis pl a y , Au di o P la yba c k , R eco r d Au di o , Mem o ry Car d , and S D R AM . NO TE Th e t est is in English o nl y . 1 Tu r n o f f t h e c a m e r a . 2 Hold i n the Fl a s h butt on on the ba c k o f the c a m era . 3 T ur n o n th e came r a w hi l e co n t in ui n g t o pr ess on the Fl as h button . Y ou should see a bl ue scr een ti tl ed CAMERA SELF - DIA GNO S TIC S ap pea r o n the Im ag e Disp la y . 4 F ol low the si mple in struct ions on the Ima ge Di sp lay to per form the s et of test s. S om e t est s will tel l you i f the c a me r a passe d or fail ed, whi le oth er t ests wi ll m ake the c am er a do somethi ng, and y ou mu st che ck to se e if the c a mer a did it cor r ectl y . If an y o f th e t e s ts f ail , no t e wh i c h o ne (s), so t ha t y o u can pr o v ide t his inf or m ati on w hen y o u con t act H P Su ppo rt . The entir e set o f tes ts tak es onl y a f e w minute s t o com ple te . 5 T o e x it the d iag nostic pr og r am at a n y point , si mply turn of f the c a m era . MF
114 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Get tin g A ssistan ce T his s ect io n cont ains su pport inf o r ma ti o n fo r y o ur di git al camer a , inc lu ding sup po rt w eb sit e in f o r mati on , an e xplan at i on of the support pr oces s , and support phone n umb ers . HP Acces sib ilit y W e bsite C u s tom er s w ith disab ilities can ge t h elp b y v isi ting w w w .hp .com/hpinf o/community /accessibil ity /pr o dserv . HP Photos ma r t W ebsite Vi s i t w w w . photosmar t .hp .c om or www . h p . c o m / p h o t o sm a r t fo r the f ollo win g infor m ati on: z Ti ps o n u s i n g yo ur c a m e ra m ore ef fe ct ive ly a nd cre at ive l y z HP di gi tal came r a d r iv er u p da t es a nd s o ftw ar e z Reg is t er you r pro d uc t z Subscribe to n e wslet ters, dri ver an d sof t war e updat es, and suppor t al ert s Su ppor t Process T h e H P su p po rt p r oces s w or ks mo s t e ff ecti v el y if y ou pe rf o rm th e f o llo w ing st e ps in t he or der s pec if ied: 1 R e v ie w the tr oubleshooting se ction of this User âs Manual , w hi ch star ts o n pag e 9 4. 2 A cces s t he H P Cons umer Ca r e Center website for s upport . If y ou h ave a c c ess to th e I nte rne t , yo u c an o bt ai n a wide r ange of information about y our dig ita l ca mera . V isi t the HP w ebsi te f or pr oduct he lp , dr i ver s, and soft war e updates at www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt .
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 115 Consumer Ca r e is av ailable in the f ollo w ing languages : Du t c h , En g lish , F r enc h , Ge r m an , It al i an , P or tu gue s e , Spanis h , S w edi sh, T r adi tional Chines e , Simplified Chinese , Ja pan es e , K o r ean . (Danish , F innish , an d No rwe gi a n suppor t i nfor mat ion is available in Eng lis h on ly .) 3 A cc ess HP e-su pp or t . If y ou ha ve a cces s to t he In t e r ne t , con ne ct w ith HP v i a e-mail b y g o in g t o: www .h p .c o m / su p por t . Y ou w i ll r ece i ve a per son al r ep l y f r o m an HP Consumer Ca r e techni c ian . E -ma il support is av ailable in the l ang uages l i sted at t hat website. 4 Contact y our local HP de al er . If your dig i tal c a mer a has a ha r dw ar e fa ilu r e , t ak e it t o y o ur lo cal HP d e al er f o r a solution. S er v ice is fr ee du r ing your digi tal ca mera âs l imi ted w arr ant y per iod. 5 Cont act the HP Consumer Care Cent er f or support b y phone . P lease cons ul t the follo w ing w ebsi te to check the de t ails an d co n diti on s o f ph o ne s up po rt in y ou r co un try/ re g io n : www .h p .c o m / su pp o r t . As a part of HPâs continuing e ff orts t o im p r o v e ph on e su p por t i nf o r mati on serv i ce s , w e adv is e y ou to check the HP website on a r eg ula r bas is for ne w i nformation r egarding ser vice feat ur es an d delivery . If y ou cannot solve the pr oblem using the abov e options, call HP whi le you are in fr ont of your c o mputer a nd dig ita l cam era . F o r faster se r vi ce, ple ase be prepar ed to p r o v ide the f ollo win g infor m ati on: ⢠The digit al ca mera âs m odel num ber (loc ated on th e fr ont of the camera) ⢠T he di gital came r a â s ser ial nu mber (locat ed on t he bottom o f t he camera) ⢠The computerâs op er ating sy s tem ⢠T he v e rs i on of the di gital came r a s oftw ar e (locat ed on t he camera âs CD lab el) ⢠Message s displ ay e d at the time the situati o n occur r ed
116 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual The applicable c ondi tion s f or HP phone s uppor t a r e subj ect to ch ang e w it hou t no ti ce . T elepho ne supp ort i s f r ee fr om the date of pur c hase f or the per iod sp eci f ied un less oth er wise noted. Phone Su ppor t in th e United Sta tes Su pp o rt is a va ila bl e bo th d ur ing an d afte r t he w ar r an ty pe r io d . W ithi n the p er iod of yo ur war r anty , telephone support is pr ovi ded fr ee of cha r ge. Call ( 8 00) 4 7 4 -68 36. US phone s upport is av ailabl e i n both Eng li sh and Spani s h 2 4 h our s a da y , 7 da y s a w ee k (da y s an d h ou r s of su pp o rt m a y ch ang e w it hou t no ti ce). A ft e r t h e w ar r anty per i od , call (80 0) 4 7 4 -6 8 3 6 . Ch ar g es ar e $2 5 . 0 0 pe r is su e , and ar e c ha r g e d t o y our c r edit car d . If y o u thin k y our HP pr oduct needs se r vi ce , cal l the HP Cons um er Car e Cente r , which can help determi ne if ser vice is r equired . Lo cat ions Fr e e P h o n e Suppor t P eriod Af r ica 30 da ys Asi a P ac if i c 1 y e ar Can ada 1 year E ur ope 1 y e ar Lat i n Am er i ca 1 year Midd le E ast 30 day s Uni ted States 1 yea r
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 117 Phone Su p por t in Europe, th e Middle East, an d A fr ic a HP Cons um er Supp ort ph one num bers and pol i cies ma y c han ge . V isi t th e f o ll o w ing w e bsit e to c he c k the d et ails an d conditi ons of phone sup port in y our coun try /r e gion: www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt . Alger ia 21 3 (0) 61 56 4 5 43 Aus t ria 4 3 (0) 8 2 0 8 7 441 7 Bahr ain 9 7 3 80 0 7 2 8 Belgium 0 7 0 300 005 (Dutch) 0 7 0 30 0 004 ( F r ench) Cz ech Republic 4 2 (0) 2 6 130 7 310 Denm ar k 45 7 020 2845 Egy p t 2 0 02 53 2 5 222 Fi n l a n d 35 8 (0) 203 66 7 6 7 Fr a n c e 3 3 ( 0) 89 2 6 9 60 2 2 ( E ur o 0 . 34/minute) German y 49 (0) 180 56 5 2 180 (Eur o 0. 12/mi nut e) Gr eec e 30 10 60 7 3 603 Hu ngar y 3 6 (0) 1 38 2 1111 Ir eland 1 89 0 9239 02 Israel 9 7 2 (0) 9 8 30 4848 Italy 848 800 8 71 Luxem bo u rg 900 40 00 6 (F r ench) 9 00 40 00 7 (Ge r man ) Mor occo 212 2 2 4 04 7 4 7
118 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Net her l ands 0 900 2020 16 5 (E ur o 0.10/minute) Norw a y 4 7 815 6 2 0 7 0 Po l a n d 48 2 2 8 6 5 98 00 Po r t u g a l 808 201 4 9 2 Ro m a n i a 40 1 315 4 4 4 2 Ru s s ia n F e d e ra t i o n 7 09 5 7 9 7 3 5 20 (M osco w ) 7 812 346 7 99 7 (St P eter sburg ) Sa udi Ar a b i a 9 6 6 800 8 9 7 14 4 40 Slov a kia 4 21 2 6 8 20 8080 Sou th A f r ica 08 6 000 1030 (inside RS A ) 2 7 -11 2 5 8 9 301 (ou tsi de R S A ) S pain 90 2 0 10 05 9 S w eden 46 ( 0) 77 120 4 7 6 5 Swi t ze rl a n d 0848 6 7 2 6 7 2 (German , F r ench , Italianâ P eak time 0. 08 CH F/O uts i de p eak 0 . 04 CH F) Tu n i s i a 216 1 891 2 2 2 Tu r k e y 90 2 16 5 7 9 71 71 Ukr aine 7 (380 44) 4 90 -3 5 2 0 Unit ed Ar a b Emir a tes 800 4910 Un i te d Ki n gd o m 4 4 (0) 8 7 0 010 4 3 20
Cha pt e r 7 : T r o ub lesh oo ting and Su ppor t 119 O t h er Ph on e Sup p or t W orl dwide HP Cons um er Supp ort ph one num bers and pol i cies ma y c han ge . V isi t th e f o ll o w ing w e bsit e to c he c k the d et ails an d conditi ons of phone sup port in y our coun try /r e gion: www .h p .c o m / s u p po rt . Ar genti na 54 0 810 5 55 5 5 20 Aus t ral ia 61 (3) 88 77 8 000 (or loca l ( 03) 88 77 8 000 ) Br a zil 5 5 (1 1) 3 7 4 7 77 99 ( Gr an d e Sã o P aul o ) 5 5 0800 15 77 5 1 ( outside Gr ande São P a ulo) Canada 1 905 206 466 3 (during t he w ar r a nty per i od) 1 8 77 6 21 4 7 2 2 (aft e r the w ar r an ty pe r i od) Ce n tr al A mer i ca a nd the C ar ibbean 1 800 711 2 884 Chile 5 6 800 2 2 5 54 7 (P o s t-sal es Bu sin ess C om pu t ing 56 800 3 60 9 99 (P ost-s ales Home Computin g) China 86 (21) 3881 4518 Colombia 5 7 9 800 114 7 2 6 Gu at em al a 5 02 1 800 99 9 5105 Hong K ong S AR 85 2 2 80 2 409 8 India 1 600 11 2 2 6 7 or 91 11 68 2 603 5 (Hindi & English) Indonesia 6 2 (21) 3 50 3 408 Japan 05 7 0 000 511 (i nside Japan) 81 3 33 35 9 800 (outsi de Japa n) K or ea , Re pu bl i c of 82 ( 2 ) 3270 0 7 0 0 ( S e o u l ) 0 80-99 9 -0 7 00 (o utsi de S eou l) Mala ys i a 60 1 800 805 405
120 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Me x i co 5 2 5 8 99 22 (M e x i co C it y ) 5 2 01 800 4 7 2 66 84 ( outside M e x ico C ity ) Ne w Ze al and 64 (9) 3 5 6 6640 Pe r u 51 0 800 101 11 Philippine s 63 ( 2) 86 7 35 51 Pu e r t o Ri c o 1 8 77 2 3 20 58 9 Singapor e 6 5 6 272 53 0 0 Ta i w a n 886 0 800 01005 5 Tha i l an d 66 (2) 661 4000 U nit ed S t at es 1 (800) 4 7 4 -68 36 Ve n e z u e l a 5 8 0 800 4 7 46 83 6 8 Vie tn a m 8 4 (0 ) 8 8 2 3 45 3 0
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 121 Appe ndi x A: Bat ter ie s a nd C amer a A cce ssories Managi ng B at te rie s Y o u r c a me ra u s e s f o u r A A b a t t e ri es . F o r b e s t re s u l t s , u s e photo - li thi u m or rechargeable NiM H batt er ies. If you m ust use alkali ne ba t ter ies, use high- g r ade â ultr a â or â premiu m â v ar i eti e s inst ea d o f or dinary alk aline batte r ie s. T h e f o l lo wi ng t ab le sh o w s ho w diff e r en t ty pe s o f batt er i es pe rf o rm in dif f e r ent ty pe of u s e s ce na r i os: Ty p e o f u s e Alk al ine Photo- Li t h i u m NiMH M ost economi cal ( mor e t han 30 pict u res p er mo nt h ) Po o r Fa i r Good M ost economi cal (less than 30 pict u res p er mo nt h ) Fa i r Go od Fa i r H e av y us e o f fl ash, frequ e nt p ict u r es Po o r Good Good Hea vy u s e o f v id eo Po o r Good Good Hea vy u s e o f Li ve View Po o r Good Good Longest o v er all battery life Po o r Good Fa i r Lo w temper atur e/Winter use Po o r Good Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u s e ( w it hou t do c k) Fa i r Go od Fa i r Inf r eq uen t u se (w it h do c k) Fa i r Go od Good Wa n t t o re c h a r g e b a t t e ri e s No No Ye s
12 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual NO TE If you do no t i n ten d to use you r c am e r a for e x tend e d per iods o f time (mor e than a month) , we s tr ongl y re c o m m e n d t h a t yo u re m ove t h e b a t t e ri e s. When replacing bat ter ies, alw a ys r eplace th em togeth er as a set . N e v er mi x dif fer en t ba tter y t ypes or ba tter ies of dif fer en t c ha r g e le v e ls . B a tte ry leak a ge an d d am age to t he cam er a ma y re s u l t . B at ter y G au ge T h e f o l lo wi ng batte ry le v els m a y be dis p la ye d on the st atu s scr een , in Liv e V iew , in Playback , an d w h en the came r a is con n ecte d to a c omput er or pr inter . Icon Des c r ipti on Batter i es ha v e 6 5- 100 per cent battery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e 3 5-6 5 per cen t bat tery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e 10 -3 5 per cent b attery lif e r emaining . Batter ies hav e less than 10 per c ent battery lif e re m a i n in g. C a m e ra wi l l p owe r do wn so on. Li ve View is disabled . Bli nk i ng Batter i es are deplet ed . Cam er a will pr oce ed to po w er do wn. Camer a is ope r atin g on A C po w e r ( w ith f ull o r no n- r ec har geable bat ter i es). Ani ma te d ba tt ery f illing up Camer a is oper ating on A C p ow e r and is char ging th e b a t teries .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 12 3 NO TE T he batt ery g a ug e is mo s t a cc ur ate aft er a f e w min ut e s o f u s e . W he n t he cam er a is tu r ned o ff , the ba tt e r ies r eco v er and th e initi al ga uge r ead ing m a y not be as accurate as that obta in e d du ring act ual use. Y ou mi gh t n o ti ce th at occa si o nal ly the ba tte ry le ve l i con s w ill f lu ctua t e w it h t h e sam e s et o f b att er ies . T h is o cc ur s b ecau s e some operating modes like Liv e Vi ew and v i de o r ecor ding con sum e much more po w er tha n oth er modes, and wil l cause the bat tery lev el icon s to ind ica te your ba t teries a r e lo w , bec ause bat ter y oper ati ng tim e in those modes is short. W hen y ou s witch to a mod e that r equ ir es les s pow er , l ike Pl a yb a ck , t he ba ttery le v el i co n ma y go ba c k up , in di catin g th er e is mor e time le ft in the ba tte r i e s if y o u s t a y in t ha t m ode . NO TE When y ou r emo v e the batt er ies f r om t he cam er a , the date a nd tim e set tings are pr eser v ed f or appr o x imately 10 minu te s . If the came r a is w it ho u t batte r ies f or l onge r tha n 10 mi nut es, th e clo ck i s set to th e last da te a nd t i me at which the cam era w as u sed. Y ou ma y be prom pted to updat e the date an d tim e . Extending B a t ter y Life z Min im i z e the use of Live View on the Im age Dis pl a y an d v ideo , es p ec i al l y w he n u sing al k a line ba tte r i e s . z Use the v ie wfinder mic r odisp lay to f r am e pictur es ins tead of t he Im a ge D i sp la y . L ea v e th e I ma ge Di sp la y o ff w he ne ve r possi b le . z Mak e sur e the Eye Star t sens or is set t o On ( pag e 84) . z Use z oom o n l y when ne cess ar y . z Use t h e AU TO F L A S H set ting rather tha n FL AS H O N (pag e 3 2) .
12 4 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual z Do n o t se t Aut o P owe r Of f in the Se t u p menu to Never (pag e 8 6) . z M i n i m ize p o we r c yc l i n g. I f y o u ex p e c t t o a v e ra g e m o re t h a n one p ictur e ev er y fi v e minutes , leave the camera on r ather th an tur ning it o f f af te r ea c h sho t . T his mi nimi z e s t he n umbe r of time s the lens ha s to e x te nd and r etr ac t . z Use an opt ional HP A C p ow e r a dapter or H P 8881 camer a doc k w hen the cam er a w ill be on f o r e x te nded per i ods of time, o r when unload ing pi ctur es to y our com pu ter o r pr i nting . R e cha r geabl e Ba tte r ie s Ni c k e l Met al H y d r id e (N iMH) ba tte r ie s can be r ec h ar ged b y u sing a batte ry c har ge r . N iMH ba tte r i e s can als o be r ec har ged in th e came r a whe n t he came r a is connec ted to a n op tio nal HP A C po we r adapter or HP 8881 cam er a dock. When the batteri es ar e r e char gi ng , the P o w er/M emor y light on t he ba c k o f t h e ca me r a b lin ks g r een . Ba tte r i es ar e f ull y r echa r ged v ia t he HP AC pow e r ad apter or ca mera dock i n 15 hou rs . Some t hi ngs to keep i n m ind when usin g NiM H bat t er ies are: z T h e f irs t time t h at y ou u se a se t of N iMH b att e r ies , b e sur e that y ou fully cha r ge t hem b ef or e using t hem in the c a mer a . z Y ou ma y noti ce th at the f irst se v er al time s y ou u se N iMH bat ter ies, the bat ter y li fe seems shorter tha n what y ou e xpect . P erf or man ce w ill imp r ov e an d becom e op timal a ft e r t he b att er ie s ha v e bee n c har ged a nd t he n dis c h ar ged (u sed) com ple t el y f our o r f iv e times . Y o u can u se the cam er a norma l l y to di s ch arge th e ba t te r ies du rin g thi s â c onditionin gâ per iod .
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 1 2 5 z Al w a y s r ec har ge all f our N iMH ba tte ri e s at t he sa me time . One low-cha r ged ba t tery w ill reduce t he ba tter y l i fe for the other batter ies in the camer a . z NiMH bat ter ies dis char ge when not in use , whether the y are in stal le d i n a c amera or not . If th e y hav e not be en used f or mo r e t han tw o w ee ks, r ech ar ge t h em be f o r e u sin g t h em ag ain . Ev en if yo u ar e not us ing y our batte r i e s , it is a good idea to char ge them e very s i x months to a y ea r to pr ol ong the ir useful l ife . Sleep Time -out for P o w er Co ns erv at io n T o conse rve batte ry po we r , the ac ti v e disp l a y tur n s o ff au t oma tica ll y if th er e is no b utt on a cti v ity f or 60 second s . Wh en t he came r a is in t his â s leep â st a te , pr ess ing an y butt o n w i ll w ak e th e c ame r a u p a g ain . If n o b utt ons ar e p r esse d dur ing t h e sl ee p st a t e , t h e ca me r a w i ll tur n o ff aft e r t h e t ime th at is set in the Au to P o we r O f f men u ( pa ge 8 6 ), unle ss it is co nn ec te d to a co mputer , pr inter , o r T V .
12 6 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual P urc h a sin g Ca m era Access ories Y ou can pur chas e the se acce sso r ies f o r y o ur camer a fr om y ou r loca l r et ailer or onl ine at www .h p sh o p p in g .c o m : z HP Photos mart 88 81 ca mera dock (C8881A , o ption #A 2L in the United States and Ca nada , option #0 02 for re st of the world) inclu des : ⢠Cam e ra d ock ⢠F our r ec har gea ble N iMH batter i es ⢠A udi o/v i deo ca ble ⢠U SB c abl e fo r connecting to compu ter or pr inter ⢠6 .6V A C po we r adapt er z HP Phot osma rt D igita l Camera Delux e Starter Kit (C888 9A #A2 L f or United St ates and Canada, C8884B #UUS f or continental Eur ope , C8884B #A BU f or the United K ingdom , C 888 9A #ABG f or A ustr a lia , and C888 9A #AB1 for K ore a) i n c l u d e s : ⢠Quic k battery char ger (w ith 6.6V A C pow er adap ter and car adap ter ) - c har ge s batte r i es in 2 - 4 ho ur s ⢠Four re chargeable NiMH batteries ⢠32 MB SD memory card ⢠Expand able pa dded came r a cas e z HP Phot osma rt D igita l Camera St art er K it (Y17 8 9B, option #A2L fo r United States and Canada , #UUS for c o nt i ne nt a l Euro p e, # AB U for th e Un i te d Kin gd o m, #ABG f or A u s tr alia , and #AB1 for K o r ea) includes: ⢠Quic k batter y ch ar ger (w it h 6 .6V A C po w e r adap ter ) - char ge s batt er i es in 2 - 4 hour s ⢠Four re chargeable NiMH batteries ⢠Expand able pa dded came r a cas e
Appe ndi x A: Batter ie s and Camer a Access or ies 12 7 z HP Photosma rt 6.6V A C pow er adapter (C88 7 5A, option #001 for the Unit ed States and Cana da, #0 0 2 f or E ur ope , A u s tr ali a , Ne w Z e al an d , and K o r ea) HP s upports only H P A C pow er adapter s and other acce ss or ie s e x pr essl y a ppr ov ed b y HP . z HP Photos mart SD Memor y ca rds (for more info rmatio n ab out s uppo rted m emo ry card s, see Stor ag e on pag e 13 7 ) ⢠3 2 MB S D c ard (C889 5A) ⢠64 M B SD ca r d (C 889 6A) ⢠128 MB S D card ( C88 9 7A) A t th e time of t his pr inting , HP w as in the p r ocess o f r eleasing 25 6 MB a nd 512 M B c ar ds to the mark et . The y sh ou ld be av aila ble in t h e s ame r et ail pl a ce s w he r e y o u f in d the ca rds l iste d ab ov e . z SD to CF ca r d adapt er ( C888 5A - only av ailable i n the U .S . on w ww . h psh oppin g.com ) z HP Phot osma rt p add ed c amera case ( C8906A ) z H P audio /video a c cess or y c able to c on ne ct to a te lev is ion (T V) . NO TE Yo u c a n a l s o u s e a n y Y- adapter aud io cable with dua l R C A p lu g s on o n e e n d a nd a 1/ 8 in c h ( 3 .17 5 mm) mini-ster e o jac k on the ot her end . Y ou will also need an adapter plug th at ac cept s the 1/8 i nch (3.17 5 mm ) jack and fit s i nto the 3 /3 2 i n ch (2 . 38 m m) jack on your camer a.
12 8 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 129 Appe ndi x B : Ca me r a D ock Ge tt in g S ta rt ed w i th th e D ock T h e o pti ona l HP Ph o to smart 8 881 cam er a d oc k all o ws y ou t o easi ly unloa d i mages to y ou r co mputer , print ima ges di r ectly to a pr inter , an d di spl ay images and v ideo cl i ps on a te lev i s ion (TV) . In a d ditio n , if y ou ha v e r echa r g e abl e ba tte ri e s in t he c a m e ra ( p rov i d e d i n t h e b ox wi t h t h e c a m e ra d o c k ) , t h ey w i l l be r ech ar ged an ytime the came r a is in the came r a d oc k . 1 F oll o w th e instr u cti ons o n the Se tu p po s te r tha t w a s pack aged with the cam er a dock. T hes e steps i nclud e: ⢠A t t a c h i ng t h e d o c k i n s e rt t h a t wa s i n yo u r c a m e ra b o x to t h e t o p of th e c am era d o ck. ⢠Inst alling r echar geable N iMH batter ies in y our came r a . ⢠Connecting the A C po we r sour ce t o the dock . ⢠Conn ecting th e doc k to a com put er , pr in t er , and/or te le visi on . NO TE T he f ir s t time that y ou us e the r e c har geab le ba tter ie s , be s ur e t ha t y ou f ul l y c har ge the m in t h e c ame r a be f o r e u sing th e came r a . It ma y tak e up t o 15 hou r s to fu ll y charge the bat ter ies.
130 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual The ca m era dock has four co nn e ctors on th e ba ck: A slid i ng do or ov e r the pr inter and computer co nne ctors pr e v e n ts y ou f r om u sing bo th conne ct or s a t th e same time ( th e c a me ra d o ck i s not a US B hub) . NO TE Th e HP came r a doc k does not w or k w ith o ut A C pow er . Be sur e to use ONL Y the HP A C ad apter and the c ables that ca m e with the c a me r a d o ck. 2 B e fore p l a ci n g t h e c a m e ra i nt o t h e d o c k re m ove t h e ru b b er p l u g fro m t h e dock connector on the bot tom of the ca mer a , a s w ell a s an y ca bl e s tha t may be at ta ched to the ca m era . 3 P l ace the camer a in the doc k w it h t he back of the cam er a fac ing th e fr on t of the d ock. Ico n Desc r ipti o n Connects to an HP A C po wer adapt er . Co n n e ct s to th e te levi s io n . Connects dire ctl y to USB-enabled HP D eskJet and Ph ot os m a rt prin ters . Connects t o y our com put er. 6V MF
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 1 31 D ock L ight s a nd Bu t to ns T h e camer a d ock ha s a li gh t nea r the to p f r ont th at p r o v i d es batt ery char ging st a tu s . Wh en that li gh t is: ⢠On - t he camer a is in the doc k , the doc k ha s po w e r , and t he batt er i es ar e f ull y c har ged (or ar e not r e ch ar gea ble). ⢠Bli nk in g - the camer a is in the doc k , and the doc k is ch ar gin g the camera batter ies . ⢠Off - the d ock has no pow er or ther e is no ca mer a i n the dock. T wo buttons on the f r ont of the dock ac ti v ate co nnecti o ns to t he de v i ces in di cate d b y the ir i co ns: z The Sa ve/Pr int bu tt on ac ti va t e s the c o nn ec t ion to th e c ompu ter o r th e pr inter , dep en ding on which of those de v i ces is connec ted t o t he do c k . If th e lig ht is blinkin g , the n ther e is an ac tiv e connection betw een the came r a an d t he com pu t er or pr in te r . z The TV butt on acti va t es the T V connecti o n , w hi c h s t arts a sli d e sho w o f ima g es f r om y our came r a . If t he l i gh t in th is bu tto n is o n , th e do c k is co nnect ed to t he T V . If the l i gh t is bli nki ng, then an audio/ v ideo sig n al is being sent to the TV .
13 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Unlo ad in g Im a g es to a Comp uter Usi ng t he Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do ck i n se r t th at ca m e in yo u r c a m era b ox i s at ta ch ed to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he USB cabl e is connec ted between t he camer a dock and y our com pute r , and the po w er cabl e is plugged int o the doc k (see t he camer a dock Setu p pos t er ) ⢠T he HP Pho to & Imaging s oftwar e is install ed on yo ur compu ter (see Inst alling t he S o ft w ar e on page 2 0). ⢠If you are using a Ma cinto sh computer , th e ca mera âs USB C o n figu rat ion is s et to Dis k Dr i v e in t he Setu p me n u ( s e e USB C o n figu rat ion on page 88.) 2 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 3 Pr ess the Sav e/P r int button on the do ck . The HP I m a g e U n l o a d sof t ware wi l l l au n ch o n you r c omp ute r . I f yo u ha v e se t the s o ftwar e to a ut o mati c all y unl oad t he im age s in th e cam er a , th e ima ge s w ill a u tom ati ca ll y u nloa d t o t he com pu te r . Otherw is e , in t he We l c o m e screen , click St ar t Un l oa d . The im age s ar e un lo ade d to the c omputer , and then if th er e ar e an y still image s tha t w e r e pr e v i ou sl y s ele cted f or pr intin g (p age 60 ) or sel ected for HP Ins t an t Sha r e desti nat ion s (pa ge 6 9) , t hose a ction s are s tar ted. 4 When the un loa d scr e en on the computer say s Fi n i s h e d , y our imag es ha v e been sa ved and sha r ed . Y ou can tak e the ca m era out of the do ck, or le a ve it the r e to r ech arge the came r a ba tter ie s (if the batt e r ies ar e r echar gea bl e).
Appe ndi x B : Camer a Doc k 133 Printin g Im a ges Using t he Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do c k i n s er t th at ca m e in yo ur c a m era b ox i s at ta ch e d to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he USB cabl e is connec ted between t he camer a dock and y our pr inte r , an d the po w e r cable is plugged int o the dock (see the camer a dock Setu p pos t er ) ⢠T he pr inter is tur ned on and pape r is loade d in t he pr inter . 2 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 3 Pr e s s th e Sa v e/P r in t bu t to n on t he doc k , an d the Pr int Se tup me n u d is p la y s on t he ca me r a . If y ou alr ead y se l ect ed imag e s to pr int u sing the came r a Pr int button, the number of i mages se lec ted is sho wn in the Pr int Setup men u . Oth e rw is e , Images: AL L i s displ ay ed. T o sele ct or change the sel ect i on s of imag es to pr i n t , pr ess the Pr int but ton, scr oll through th e im ages usi ng the button s , th en u se the bu ttons t o adj u s t t he n umbe r of cop ies f o r each im age , an d when sati s fied with y our sele ct ion s, press the Prin t but ton a gai n to r etu rn to th e Pr int Setup menu . 4 If al l th e sett i ngs i n the P r in t Setu p me n u l oo k c or r ect , p r es s OK on the camer a to beg in pr intin g . Or , yo u can chan ge se ttings in the Pr in t Se tup me nu us ing the ar r o w k e y s on the cam er a , then follo w in structions on the scr een to be gin pr inti ng. NO TE Th er e is a p r in t pr ev i e w in t he l o w er r i gh t-han d co r n er of t h e P r in t Setu p scr een s how ing the page la yo ut that w il l be used for pr in ti ng i mage s. Thi s pr int pr e vie w upda tes as y ou ch a ng e th e set t i ng s for th e Pr in t Si ze an d P aper S i z e .
134 HP Ph otosmar t 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Dis p la ying Im a g es on a T V Usi n g t h e Doc k 1 Conf ir m t he follo w ing: ⢠Th e do ck i n se r t th at ca m e in yo u r c a m era b ox i s at ta ch ed to th e top o f the camer a dock (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . ⢠T he au di o/v i deo cabl e is connect ed betwee n the camer a dock and y our T V , and the po w e r cable is plugged in to the doc k (see the camer a dock Setup poster ) . 2 Y our cam er a w ill se n d e ith er an N T S C o r P AL v i d eo si g nal to a T V . The NTS C f ormat is used pr imarily in Nort h Am e r ica an d Jap an , while the P AL fo r m at is used pr imar ily in E u r o pe . T his se tting is m ade f or y ou w he n y ou set t he lan gu age o f t he came r a . T o c hec k the c ur r en t s e tting or change th e video sig n al format , go to th e T V Con figu ration se tting in the Setup men u (pag e 89 ) 3 Y our cam er a w ill be t he s ou r ce f or the T V si g n al (j u st li k e a V CR or ca mc or der ) , so you must set th e T V to ta k e video in pu t f r om an e xte r n al v id eo so ur ce (y o ur cam e r a) inst ea d of th e a nte n na or T V c able. Ref er to the T V userâ s ma nua l f or dir ecti ons on ho w to do this. 4 P lac e th e cam er a in t o the came r a doc k . T he cam e r a w il l tur n on a utomatically . 5 Pr ess the TV b utt o n on th e do c k . T he camer a st arts a slidesho w of each image , play i ng an y attached audio clip or v id eo c lip , an d t hen s w it c hing to t he ne xt image . Y o u can also ma nua lly scr oll th r ough the i mages by pr essi ng th e buttons on the c amera . T o end th e slidesho w , pr ess th e TV but ton agai n . NO TE The Image Disp lay on t he ca mer a tu r ns off when the camer a is connect e d to a TV , b ut y ou ca n still use the Pl ay b ac k an d Sh ar e me n u s, beca us e th e me n u s w ill dis pla y on the T V scr een .
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 135 Appe ndi x C : Spe c ifi c a tions Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on Res o l ut i o n St il l pictu r es: ⢠5 .2 6 M P (2 668 by 19 7 0) total pi x el count ⢠5 . 08 M P (2 608 by 19 5 2) effecti v e pi x el count Vide o cl i ps : ⢠2 88 b y 20 8 to tal pi x el count Sensor Diagonal 9 . 04 m m (1/1 .8 -inch , 4:3 for mat) CC D Color depth 3 6 -b it (12 b i ts b y 3 co l or s) Lens F ocal length: ⢠Wide â 7 . 6 mm ⢠T el eph ot oâ61 mm ⢠3 5 mm equi v ale nt a ppr o x imatel y 3 7 mm - 300 m m F- N u m b e r : ⢠Wi deâ f/2 .8 to f/ 11 .3 ⢠T el eph ot oâf/3 .1 t o f/12 .4 Lens thr eads 5 5 m m diameter for optional lenses a nd fil ter s (separat e lens ad apt er r equir ed - r ef er to T iffen ca ta lo g th a t was in cl u d ed in you r ca m era b ox) View f i nde r Zooming 1/4 V G A color sequenti al micr odispla y view fin d e r wi t h di o p t er co n t rol Eyesta r t s en so r fo r vi ew fin de r z Minimum acti v ation dist ance: 3 0 mm z Maxim um ac ti v ati o n distanc e: 5 5 mm z Maxim um dea cti v a ti on dist anc e: 7 0 mm
13 6 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Zoom 8x opti c al , 7x di gital z oom Fo cu s z TTL a u t o f oc u s z Wi deâ0.1 m (3.9 in ) to in fi nit y . z T el eph ot oâ0.9 m (3 5 .4 in) to inf inity . z F ocu s setti ngs: NORM AL (de f aul t), MA CRO , INFI NITY , MANU AL F OCU S Shutt er s peed 1/200 0 t o 16 secon ds Tr i p o d m o u n t Ye s Built-in f la sh Built-in f l ash a ssembly , 3 second r e char ge . Fl as h wo r k i n g dis ta nc e Z oom Po s i t i o n ISO 100 IS O 200 I S O 400 Wi de 2 .4 m 3 .4 m 4.8 m 7 .9 ft 11 . 2 f t 1 5 .7 ft T elep ho t o 2 .2 m 3 .0 m 4. 4 m 7 .2 ft 9 .8 f t 14 .4 f t Ex ter nal flash No Fl as h s e t t i n g s Fl a s h O f f , Auto F lash , Auto with Red-ey e Red uct io n , Fl a s h O n , Fl as h O n w i t h Re d - ey e Red uct io n , Ni ght , Ni ght w ith R ed- e y e R eduction Image Displa y 2 -inch colo r LED backl it , pol y sili c on TFT L CD w ith 130, 3 38 p i x e ls (5 5 7 b y 2 3 4) Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 1 3 7 Storag e z Slot for m e mor y c a r d z One 3 2 M B SD mem ory card inclu ded. z T his camer a su pport s both Sec ure Digit al (SD) and s ome MultiM edi aCar d TM (MMC ) mem ory car ds. O nly MMC card s th at h av e b een veri f ied compliant to the MultiM edi aCar d TM specification as of January 2000 are su p ported. Compliant MMC mem ory c a rds hav e th e Mu ltiM ediaCar d TM logo on the card or package. z SD c ar ds ar e r ecommended , as t he y ar e f a ste r t han MMC car ds at r eading an d wr iting dat a . z T his camer a ma y su pport memory car ds up to 2 GB, though HP has only tested up to 51 2 M B, as 1 GB an d 2 GB c ar ds ar e n ot a v ailable y et . Car ds lar ger than 2 GB w ill no t w or k. A hi gh capacity ca r d itself doe s not affect cam er a perf or mance , bu t a lar g e n umber o f fil es ( ov er 300) does a ffect t he time it tak es fo r the camer a to t u rn o n. z T he n umber of ima ges that c an be sav ed in memo ry d epends on t he i mage q ual ity se ttings (see Memory Car d Capa c ity on page 141). Image c aptur e options z St il l (d efault) z Self - Timer âstill pictur e or v ideo clip tak en after 10 se co nd delay z Self - Time r - 2 sh ots â st i l l pict u re ta ken a f te r 10 se cond d elay , then a se cond pictur e ta k e n abou t 3 seconds late r z Burst âc a mer a tak es pic tu r es until the buffer is fu l l (t ypic a l ly 4 - 6 p ic tu r es ) z Vid e o â15 fr ames per secon d (inc ludes au dio), max imum length up to 1 minute Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
138 HP Ph otosmar t 9 4 5 Userâs M anua l Audio captur e Wi th st i ll pict u r es: ⢠EX IF 2 .2 at a minimum samp ling r at e o f 22.0 5 K H z . ⢠M axi mum of 6 0 se co nd s of au dio ca n b e ca ptur e d at the time a pi ctur e is tak en b y hold in g down th e Shu tte r but t on a f ter ta k i ng a pic t ure ( n ot ava il ab le i n Bur s t or Self - T imer mod es ). ⢠A udi o c lip an nota ti on (max imum 6 0 seconds ) can be added t o image in the P l a y bac k men u . Wit h v ideo cl ips: ⢠A udi o is captur ed aut omati call y w it h v i deo . ⢠MP EG1 le v el-1 minimum sampl ing r ate o f 22.0 5 K H z ⢠B i- li ne ar u p s am p l ed t o 44.1 KHz Expos ur e M ode settings Au to (de f a u lt), Act ion , Landscape, Po r t r a i t , Apertu r e P r ior ity , Shu tt er Pr io r ity , Vi deo Expos ur e Comp e ns ation Can be set ma nuall y fr om -3. 0 to 3. 0 EV (Exp o sur e V alue) in 1/3 EV inc re me nts . Whi te Ba la nce settings A uto ( def ault) , Sun , Shade , T ungst en, F luor es cent , Manual AE Met e r i ng settings A v er a ge , Center - W eighted (def ault) , Spot I S O Sp eed settings A ut o (d ef ault),100, 200, 400 Di gital F lash Off (def ault) , Low , High Colo r settings F ull Col or (de f a ult), Black & White , Sep i a Res o l ut i o n settings z 5 MP - 2 6 08 x 19 5 2 (default) z 1MP - 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 139 Compr ession settings â Best â Better (default) â G ood Satur ati on settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High Sh ar pnes s settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High Con tr ast settings Lo w , Me diu m (def ault) , High P la yback ma g ni fica t ion Magnifi es a still image to 150x on the Image Dis pla y Pr int opti ons Pr in t button allo ws yo u to selec t images in th e ca m e ra to be pr int e d au to m at ic a l ly (up to 99 copi es of the im age) when the ca mera is connected to a c omputer or certain H P pr int er s . Compr ession fo rm a t z JPE G (EXIF ) f or still images z MPEG1 for vi de o clip s In te r f ac es z USB M ini-AB r ece ptacle; allow s USB ( A to Min i- B) to a c o mp ute r or US B ( M i n i -A to B ) to c e rta i n printers ( any H P P h otos m a rt p r int e rs or a ny othe r HP pr in t er w ith a f r on t panel USB port) z A/V (2 .5mm male s ter eo ja ck) ou t to TV z DC input 5 .9 to 6.6Vdc @ 20 00 mA z HP P hotosmart 888 1 camer a dock O rienta t io n Sensor Ye s Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
140 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual Standar ds z PTP t r an sfer (1 5 7 4 0) z MSDC tr ans fer z NT S C/ P A L z JPE G z MPEG1 z DPOF 1.1 z EXIF 2 .2 z DCF 1.0 Po w e r Cam er a has a maxim um steady state powe r consu mpti o n o f 8 W at ts (1300 mA @ 6. 2 Vdc) . P o w er s our ces in clude: z 4 AA batt er ie s ( 4 non-r echar geab l e AA batt er ies inc luded) or opti onal HP A C po w er ada pt er . Acceptable batteri es include phot o -lith ium, â ultr a â or â pr emium â gr ade alk a line , or r echar ge ab le NiMH. NiMH batte r i es can be r echar ge d in t he camer a us ing the opti on al HP A C pow er adap ter or HP camer a dock . z Opti onal HP A C po we r adapt e r (see Pu rc h a s i n g Cam era Ac ce s sories on page 12 6 f or part numb ers for di ffer en t r eg ions) : ⢠Input: 10 0 to 2 40V ac ⢠Output: 5.9 to 6.6Vd c @ 200 0mA z Optional HP P hotos mar t 8881 cam era dock (see P urch as i n g C a m e ra A c c ess o rie s on page 12 6 fo r pa rt num bers f or di ffer ent regions) R ec har ging in camer a w ith the op ti onal HP A C po w er adapte r or HP camer a dock ( 100% in 15 hou rs) . A ut omatic ad v anced pow er management . Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
Ap pe ndix C: Spe cificat io n s 14 1 Memo ry Car d Cap a c ity The follow in g table l ist s the appro ximate n umb er of st il l i mag es t ha t can be s to r ed o n a 3 2 M B Sec ur e Di g it al (SD) m e mo ry car d when the cam er a is set t o the d iffer ent Re s o l u t ion an d Compr ession settin gs a va ila bl e in th e Captu re m enu (s ee pag e 51) . NO TE T he actu al f il e si z e s a nd n umbe r o f s till ima g es th at can be stor ed on the memor y ca r d w ill var y , dep endi ng on the con ten t o f ea c h s ti ll i mag e . Ext er n al bod y dimensions 115 mm (L) by 85 mm (W) b y 8 5 mm (H) (measure ments with cam er a off and f lash do wn) We i g h t 300 gr a ms (9 .6 ounces) w it ho ut batter ies Te m p e r a t u re ra n ge Oper ational: 5 t o 4 5° C ( 41 t o 113° F ) at 15 t o 85% r el ati v e humid ity Storage : -30 t o 6 5° C (- 2 2 t o 14 9° F ) a t 15 t o 90% r el ati ve h umidity W a rra nt y HP 1 year ex c hange war ranty 5MP - 2 608 x 195 2 Re so l ut ion 1 M P - 12 9 6 x 9 7 6 Re so lu t ion - Bes t Compr ession 11 images (2 .6 M B each ) 23 i m a g es (1.2 5 MB eac h) - Bette r Compr ession 23 i m a g e s (1 .25 M B eac h) 48 images (600 KB each) - Good Compr ession 48 images (600 KB each) 96 i m a g e s (300 KB each) Fe a t u re Desc r ip ti on
14 2 HP Phot os mart 9 45 U ser â s Manual
In d e x 143 Index A AA batteries 121 AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 14 HP part number 140 purchasing 127 accessories for camera 126 Action setting 38 2-second release priority 39 active display, using 23 AE Me ter ing, s etting 4 5 alkaline batteries 121 Aper ture Prior ity ( Av), s etting 39 aperture, setting 3 9 arrow buttons on Con troll er 11 audio clips delete 65 play 64 reco rd 28 , 64 audio/video (TV) cable 127 conne ctor 81 Auto Power Off s etting 86 automatic exp osure, ove rride 38 Av Aperture Priority, setting 39 B batteries door on camera 15 ext end lif e of 12 3 gauge 122 install 16 rechargeable 124 types to use 1 21 Best Compr ession set ting 52 Better Compression setting 52 blinking lights on camera 11, 14 bo nus so f twa r e 20 , 21 brackets in Live View s creen 25 brightening an i mage 42 Bu rs t button 10 using 35 buttons on camera 10 on ca me ra do ck 1 31 C calibrating color of images 44 came ra rese t 9 3 self-diagnosti c test 1 13 specifications 1 35 turn on/ off 17 came ra acce ss orie s 12 6 came ra d ock buttons 131 conne ct to 129 conne ctor on camera 15 description 9 display to TV 134 dock in ser t 9, 12 9 printing from 133 purchasing 126 unload images 1 32 Came ra S ounds , s etting 8 4 Capture menu Help for menu options 41
14 4 Index using 40 Colo r of imag es, s e tting 50 comp r essio n f orm at 1 39 Compression, sett ing 5 2 compute r conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 conn ec t cam era to 77 conne ctions as a USB Mass Stor age Device Class (MSDC) 88 to cam era d ock 1 29 to comp uter 77 to TV 8 1 conne ctors audio/video (TV) 81 came ra d ock 130 descriptions 14 conne ctors, des cript ions 15 Contra st, se tt ing 55 Con trol ler wi th arrow butto ns, description 11 customer support 114 D darkeni ng an i mage 42 Date & T ime, settin g 19 , 87 delete audio only 65 during Instant Review 27 images and video clips from memory card 65 diagnostic te st 113 Digital Flash, setting 48 digital zoom 31 dio pt e r co nt ro l 12, 19 direct print printing images from camera to printer or comp uter 79 printing images using camera dock 133 selecting image s 60 disk drive, camera as 8 8 display images and video clips on TV 82 displays, using microdisplay or Ima ge Di s pl ay 2 3 E en lar g e ima ge 6 6 erro r mes s ag es on camera 104 on computer 111 EV Com pensa tion, setting 42 Exposur e Mode sel ec to r 1 3 setting 38 Eye St art sensor location 12 setting 84 F files delete from memory card 65 effe ct of Compression sett ing on size 52 effect of digital zoom on size 31 effect of Resolution s etting on size 5 1 Resolution setting 51 flas h button 10 pop-up description 1 3 set ti ng s 3 2 using 32 working dist ance 1 36
14 5 Index Flas h Off 33 F- number, sett ing 39 Foc us brackets, using 25 Infinity setting 36 lock 26 Ma cro setting 36 Ma nu a l Foc us se t ti ng 3 6 , 37 Norm al setting 36 search priority 37 set ti ng s 3 6 focu s button 10 came ra sha ke 30 rang e 13 6 Foc us A ss ist l ig h t 1 4 setting 85 form a t mem o ry c ard 65 G gauge, battery 1 22 Good Compression se tti ng 5 2 H Help for Capture menu options 41 help from cust omer support 114 HP AC power adapter conne ctor on camera 14 purchasing 127 HP Instant Share customizing the Share menu 70 description 9, 69 selecti ng images for HP Instant Share de stinati ons 74 Share button 1 1, 70 turn on/ off 70 usi ng the Sha re m enu 7 3 HP web sit e s 114 I Ima ge Di s pl ay changing bright ness 8 5 description 12 Live View button 1 2 stat u s scr ee n 18 using 23 Imag e Inf o, u s ing 6 7 images AE Meter ing settin g 45 brightening 42 Color setting 50 colo r tint 44 Compression se tting 52 Contr ast se tti ng 55 darkeni ng 42 delete 65 Digital Flash setting 4 8 Exposure Mode settin g 38 Image Info in Playback 67 ISO Speed setting 47 magnify 66 number remaining 24, 59 number saved on memory ca rd 5 1, 52, 14 1 reco rd au dio clip s 2 8 Resolution setting 51 Saturation s etting 53 Shar p nes s se tti ng 54 too dark/light 42 unload using camera dock 132 unloading c amera to compute r 77 White Ba lance set ting 43
146 Index Infinity focus setting 3 6 install batteries 1 6 lens cap teth er 1 5 memory card 17 neck s trap 1 6 sof twa re 20 , 21 Instant Rev iew setting 86 ISO Spe ed, settin g 47 L La ndsca pe set ti ng 38 Lan gu a ge change setting 90 choose at first startup 18 LCD Br ightness setting 85 LEDs (l ights ) o n came ra Foc us A ss ist l ig ht 1 4, 85 Powe r /Me mory 11 Self- Timer 14 lens cap teth er attaching 1 5 Liv e Vie w button 12 description 24 lo ng ex po sur es , n oi se r ed uc t io n 39 M Macintosh compute r bo nus so ftw ar e 21 conn ect to 7 7, 13 2 install sof tware 21 USB s etting on camer a 88 Ma cro focus settin g 3 6 magnify image 66 Ma nua l Focus setting 36 , 37 Manual Whit e B alance, sett ing 44 mem ory c a rd Compression se tti ng, effe ct of 52 delete images, audio only, or vid e o c lip s 6 5 door 11 image capaci ty 51, 5 2, 141 install 17 pictures remaining 24, 59 purchasing 127 Resolution s etting, eff ect of 5 1 supported types and sizes 137 memory light 11 menus Capture 40 Playback 61 Setup 8 3 Share 7 3 message s on camera 104 on computer 111 microdisplay i n viewfinder dio pt e r co nt rol 19 location 12 using 23 microphone, description 14 Mo de se lec to r 13 N neck st rap attaching to c amera 1 6 mount on camera 13 NiMH batte ries 1 21 noise r eduction, long exposure s 39 Norm al focus setting 3 6
14 7 In de x number of images on memory car d 51 , 52, 141 num ber of p ictur es r ema ini ng on mem or y ca rd 24 , 5 9 O OK button, descripti on 11 online He lp for Capture me nu options 41 optical zoom 30 orientation sensor 59 over-exposing an image 42 override automatic exposure 38 P photo-lithium batteries 121 pictures reco rd au dio clip s 2 8 sha r e 69 take self-timer 34 take stills 27 play audio or video clips 6 4 Playback Playback button 11 using 57 Playback button, description 11 Playback menu, using 61 pop-up flash description 13 using 32 Portra it se tting 38 power Auto Power Off s etting 86 battery level icons 122 light 1 1 specifications 140 turn on/ off 17 power adapter, HP AC conne ctor on camera 14 purchasing 127 Power ON/OFF switch, description 11 Powe r/ Me mory li ght , description 11 Print button description 11 using 60 print images selecting images for direct print 60 using camera dock 133 using HP Instant Sh are 69 printer conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 problems, troubleshooting 93 product support 1 14 R rang e Exposur e Compensa tion 13 8 flas h 13 6 F- num b er 13 5 focu s 1 36 foc us set ti ngs 36 rechargeable batteri es 124 reco rd audio clips 28, 64 vid e o c lip s 2 9 red-eye reduction, description 33 remaining pictur es count 24, 59 Remembered Settings 90 rese t cam era 93 Reset S ettings 91 Resolution, setting 5 1 reviewing images 57
148 Index S Saturation, s etting 53 se l e c t in g im a g e s for dire ct pri nt 60 for HP Instant Share destinations 74 Self- Timer button 10 light 1 4 using 34 settings Re mem ber ed 9 0 Reset 91 Setu p menu, using 83 Share button 1 1, 70 Share menu customizing 70 description 73 selecti ng images for HP Instant Share de stinati ons 74 set up 70 using 73 share pictures 69 Sharpness , setting 54 Shutter button description 13 lock exposure and focus 25 Shutter Priority (T v), setting 39 shutter s peed r ange 136 slid e show , d is pla y o n T V 82 sof twa re, in stal l 2 0, 21 soun ds of came ra 84 space r emaining on memory car d 24 , 59 spe ak er , de sc ri pti on 1 3 specifications 135 stat us scr ee n 18 still pict ures, take 2 7 su ppo rt f or u ser s 11 4 T te chn i cal s uppo r t 11 4 tether to l ens cap, attachin g 15 Time & D ate, se tting 19 , 8 7 tripod m ount, desc ription 14 troubleshoot problems 93 turn on/ off came ra so und s 84 HP Instant Share 70 Ima ge Di s pl ay 2 3 microdisplay i n viewfinder 23 Playback 57 power 17 TV ( tel evi sion ) button on camera dock 131 cable to co nne ct c amer a 1 27 configuration s etting 89 conn ec t cam era do ck to 1 30 , 134 conn ect cam era to 8 1 conne ctor on camera 14 Tv Sh utter Prior ity, setting 3 9 U under-exposing an image 42 unload images came ra to comp uter 77 using camera dock 132 USB configuration s etting 88 conne ctor on camera 14 co nne ct or o n cam er a d ock 130
149 Inde x V vid e o c lip s delete 65 play 64 reco rd 29 Video setting 3 8 viewfinder microdisplay dio pt e r co nt ro l 19 using 23 viewfinde r, description 12 viewing images 57 W web si te s for HP 114 Wh ite Ba la nc e, se t ting 43 Windows computer bo nus so ftw ar e 20 conn ect to 7 7, 13 2 install sof tware 20 working dist ance of flash 136 Z zoom digital 3 1 optical 30 specifications 136 Zoom lever, description 11 Zoom Out and Zoom In c ontrols 11
150 Index